Chapter 4 Police Operations

1
PROCEDURE MANUAL
CHAPTER 4
Chapter 4 / Police Operations
Patrol Operations / 4.000

Mobile Video Recording / 4.001
Operation of Emergency Vehicles / 4.002
Citizen Complaints / 4.003
Reporting Police Vehicle Crashes / 4.004
Hate Crime Related Incidents / 4.005
Bicycle Operations / 4.007
Animal Complaint Enforcement / 4.014
Body Armor / 4.015
Notification for Death and Serious Injury / 4.018
Firearms, Impact Weapons and O/C Spray Reg / 4.024
Patrol Rifle Police / 4.025
Reporting Hazardous Conditions / 4.027
Vehicle Pursuit / 4.031
Field Interviews / 4.032
Police Cadet Program / 4.033
Community Service Officer (C.S.O.) / 4.034
Domestic Violence / 4.035
Criminal Investigations / 4.200
Interviews and Interrogations / 4.200(a)
Investigator Call Out / 4.201
Juvenile Contact Procedure / 4.202
Juvenile Unit Operations / 4.203
Informants / 4.204
A Child is Missing Program / 4.205
Community Relations / 4.301
Bomb Threats / 4.400
Alarm Response / 4.401
Missing Persons / 4.402
Psychiatric Referrals / 4.407
Hostage/Barricaded Subject Incidents / 4.411
V.I.P. Security / 4.412
Special Events / 4.413
Special Operations / 4.414
Intelligence Operations / 4.500
Selective Traffic Enforcement / 4.601
Traffic Crash Investigation / 4.604
Ancillary Motorist Services / 4.606
Ancillary Services / 4.606A
Hazardous Material Incidents / 4.607
Towing Vehicles / 4.608
Respiratory Protection / 4.609
Respiratory Protection Program / 4.609(a)
2
In-Car Audiovisual Recording System / 4.610

Traffic Direction and Control / 4.611
Traffic Incident Management / 4.612
Traffic Violator Contact / 4.613
DUI Traffic Enforcement / 4.614
Traffic Enforcement / 4.615
Roadblocks / 4.616
Roadside Safety Checks / 4.617
Hearing Impaired / 4.618
Wearable Mini Cams(Portable Audio/Video Device) / 4.619
Operations Audio Recording Equipment / 4.620
Interaction w/Mentally Ill / 4.620(a)
Conceal and Carry Firearms / 4.620(b)
Inspections / 4.700
Electronic Recording of Homicide Interrogation / 4.700(a)
Internal Affairs / 4.701
Line of Duty Death / 4.702
Honors Funeral Protocol / 4.703
3
Title: PATROL OPERATIONS Procedure: 4.000
Date Issued: MAY 01, 2002
Revised:
Reviewed: October 2014
PURPOSE:
To provide continuous, effective and efficient 24 hour patrol service to the community.
To outline the general duties and responsibilities of the Patrol division.
POLICY:
The importance of patrol to a community cannot be overstated. Whether it be gauged

with the number of police patrol personnel, the portion of the budget allocated to patrol
operations, or that the uniformed officer is frequently the most visible component of the
Department, patrol is the foundation of police work. The manner in which patrol officers
carry out their responsibilities affects not only the quality of justice, but also citizen
perceptions of law enforcement and the criminal justice system.
PROCEDURE:
FUNCTIONS AND OBJECTIVES

Preventive patrol.
Crime prevention activities.
Response to calls for service.
Preliminary investigation of crimes and incidents.
Arrest and processing of prisoners.
Traffic direction and control.
Traffic accident investigation.
Maintenance of public order.
Ancillary services.
Provisions of emergency services.
Development of positive relationships between citizens and the Department.
Reporting of information to appropriate organizational components.
ASSIGNMENT
4
The Chief of Police shall assign officers and supervisors to patrol shifts.
Officers will be assigned to a beat by the shift supervisor at the beginning of the shift.
Officers shall be given exposure to all beats and are responsible for law
enforcement services and activity within their beat. Officers shall not leave their area
without advising the shift supervisor, unless in pursuit of a violator or directed by a
supervisor or dispatch center.
Supervisors should rotate beat assignment on a daily basis.
RESPONSIBILITIES
The Patrol division shall be responsible for:
Answering calls for service and general public assistance, providing the
necessary aid and recording the information pertinent to the incident;
complete area coverage and performance of tasks to accomplish Department

objectives;
the preliminary investigation of all cases, including the preservation of evidence

and effecting arrests;
enforcement of all traffic laws, regulations of traffic flow and investigation of all
accidents;
selective traffic enforcement and visible patrol;
inspection and premise checks for all residences on watch, business, industrial and
governmental buildings, and;
identifying hazards and reporting them to the proper department component for
corrective action.
OPERATIONS:
1. Personnel in the Patrol Division will report for duty as assigned.
2. All personnel will be in full uniform of the day and equipped to receive information
and perform their duties at the beginning of roll call.
3. Supervisors shall conduct a ten to fifteen minute roll call at the beginning of the
tour of duty.
4. Roll call should cover, but is not limited to:
report briefing from prior 24 hours;

5
problem areas to be checked in an officer's beat;
beat and squad car assignments;
inspection of full uniform, appearance and equipment;
schedule changes, new assignments and court dates;
review procedures, directives and memos;
investigation personnel will inform patrol officers of any pertinent information,

pending arrests or activity;
any hazardous areas, weather and road conditions, and; training.
5. The on duty shift will respond to calls until properly relieved.
6. Attendance by investigative personnel at roll call, crime data bulletins distributed

by the crime prevention officer, monthly staff meetings and review of new directives and
procedures shall provide a basis for communications between the patrol division and
the other components of the Department.
7. Officers, when assigned a call, shall respond safely and without delay.
8. Officers will respond in a routine, expeditious or emergency manner, as outlined

in the Operation of Emergency Vehicle procedure #4.002.
9. Two or more officers shall be assigned to answer calls where the nature of the
situation is not readily ascertained, report of a crime in progress, domestic disturbances,
911 hang up calls, calls from liquor establishments, or as directed by a supervisor.
10. Supervisors shall respond to all calls of major consequence and serious
emergency. The supervisor shall take direct control at a major crime scene,
pending the arrival of investigative personnel. The supervisor shall ensure that
the scene is protected, witnesses are identified and offenders arrested.
11. Officers shall conduct a preliminary investigation of all criminal acts.
12. Follow-up investigations may be assigned to patrol officers by their shift

supervisor when circumstances warrant, and:
the investigation is confined to the Village limits or leaving the Village is authorized by
the supervisor;
the investigation does not require a specialist's services;
sufficient manpower is available; and
the investigation can be conducted during duty hours.

6
Field interviews are endorsed and

encouraged by the Department. Field interviews help identify persons of questionable
intentions for possible follow-up action. Officers are encouraged to be aggressive, but
be courteous and respectful of Constitutional rights.
14. Patrol officers shall immediately notify their supervisor when a confidential
information source is developed or used. Utilization of informants and criminal
information shall be in strict compliance with all applicable legal standards and
Department procedure # 4.204.
RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
1. Each officer is assigned a personal portable radio and shall carry it while on duty.
It is the officer's responsibility to ensure that the radio batteries are kept charged and
that the radio is in proper working order.
2. Officers shall identify themselves by their assigned number when calling the
communications center or another police unit.
3. Officers shall keep the communications center apprised of their status at all times
so that supervisors and fellow patrol officers know their status, including, but not limited
to:
Arrival at a scene;
when making a vehicle or pedestrian stop;
when completing assignments and resuming patrol; and
when leaving the vehicle for any reason.
4. Officers may use an Alternate Radio Frequency when the primary band traffic
volume dictates and when other priority traffic takes precedence.
5. All radio traffic between patrol units and the communications center, or between
other agencies and this department will be kept brief, concise and professional.
6. Officers must constantly be aware that all radio frequencies are shared with other
police agencies, and shall remain courteous and professional at all times.
7. Officers shall use the Alternate Radio frequency for non-essential communication
between patrol units.
DEPARTMENT MOTOR VEHICLES
1. Department vehicles used for traffic and general patrol will be clearly marked and
distinguishable as Law Enforcement Emergency vehicles. The following markings and
equipment shall be considered standard:
agency name, vehicle number, , red and blue revolving emergency lights and strobe
lights, siren and speaker assembly, spotlight, alleylights, offsetting flashing head and
7
taillights, mobile radio transceiver and alternate radio frequency, personal protective
equipment, flares, fire extinguisher, mobile data terminal, radar unit(if available), and an
arrow stick light bar.
2. When requesting any replacements for the above equipment, or if the mobile
radio or MDT needs repair, officers shall submit a memo to their supervisor. The report
shall indicate the items requested and a brief reason for the request, when appropriate.
When reporting trouble with a mobile radio or MDT, be as descriptive as possible when
explaining the problem. The supervisor will forward the memo to the Administrative
Service Commander for replacement or repair.
If the vehicle needs repair, a request for service form shall be completed.
4. Seat belts and/or harnesses shall be used whenever patrol vehicles are in
motion, by both the driver and passenger.
5. Any unmarked vehicle that may be used for traffic enforcement will be equipped
with a siren and emergency lights.
NOTIFICATIONS
1. Medical Examiner: The medical examiner will be called in all cases of sudden,
violent, unattended or unexplained deaths.
2. Disruption of Utilities: The investigating officer shall immediately notify the

dispatcher if there is any utility disrupted as a result of an accident, or severe weather.
The dispatcher will then notify the proper authority.
3. Road Debris: The investigating officer will immediately notify the dispatcher of
any road debris or hazard. The dispatcher shall notify the proper authority for its
removal.
4. Media: The news media will be informed by the shift supervisor, or his designee,
of any major traffic congestion or road closure to alert traffic to use alternate routes.
5. Notification of Death: medical emergencies or other messages of an emergency

nature involving life, health or safety will be delivered in person by the patrol officer
assigned to that beat.
8
Title: MOBILE VIDEO RECORDING Procedure: 4.001

EQUIPMENT
Date Issued: FEB. 01, 2003
Revised:
PURPOSE:
To provide employees with written guidelines for the use of in-car video equipment.
POLICY:
It shall be the policy of this department to supplement reports and investigations and
ultimately aid in the prosecution of traffic and related offenses; to improve officer
performance through training, and promote officer safety. The goals of this policy are:
Documentation of events, actions, or statements made during arrests and critical

incidents to enhance report preparation and investigation.
Assisting the agency in reviewing field practices, especially legal requirements for
probable cause, arrest, searches, and seizures.
PROCEDURE:
1.Officers assigned vehicles with video

equipment will be responsible for operating it according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. No officer is to operate this equipment without having read the
manufacturers instruction manual.
2. At the start of your shift, officers will test the equipment to insure that the unit is
working properly, and that any problem is reported to the supervisor immediately.
The video equipment automatically activates whenever the emergency warning devices
are activated. Officers may manually activate the system, or turn it off when covering
accident scenes or other non-enforcement activities.
Officers will activate their video equipment to record interviews with suspects, field
sobriety tests, or in any other instance when the officer deems necessary for later
judicial proceedings. Such incidents may include crime scenes, accidents, or
confiscation of evidence.
All police activity can be recorded. All officers should record with sound, any oral
conversation between the officer, who has identified his office, and the person who was
stopped for an offense under the IVC (720ILCS 5/14-3(h)).
When the unit is activated, officers are encouraged to articulate reasonable suspicion or
probable cause: this articulation should continue through the entire taped incident. On
9
traffic stops the officer should articulate the type of vehicle, location of the stop, license
number, number and description of occupants. This procedure does not in any way
relieve the officer of notifying the dispatcher of the same information.
The officer has no obligation to inform a suspect that he or she is being video or audio
recorded.
Officers will not erase or in any way alter videotapes used for evidence. Further, officers
will receive an adequate supply of videotapes for each tour of duty. Officers will
maintain a log to record each tape used, with relevant case numbers for any
investigative use.
Officers will only use tapes provided by the department.
Tapes containing evidence will be taken out of service, and treated as evidence with
appropriate processing procedures.
Officers will indicate on associated reports, the evidence inventory number of the tape,
and clearly state that a videotape of the incident exists.
SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITY:
Supervisors will ensure that officers follow established procedures for operation of video
equipment, and associated materials.
Supervisors will at least monthly, randomly review videotapes to assess officer

performance and to determine whether the video equipment is being used properly.
Supervisors will ensure that no videotape is altered, destroyed, or tampered with by any
person when the tape has been determined to contain evidence.
10
Title: OPERATION OF EMERGENCY VEHICLES Procedure: 4.002
Revised:
PURPOSE:
To provide for the safe operation of Department vehicles as emergency vehicles.
POLICY:
To carry out the mission of protecting life it may become necessary for an officer to
operate a police vehicle as an emergency vehicle. It is the policy of this Department to
safely respond to emergency situations.
DEFINITION:
An emergency is a situation in which there is a high probability of injury or death to a

person that could be averted or reduced by the presence of an officer.
An emergency vehicle is a police vehicle operated with its emergency lights and or siren
activated.
PROCEDURE:
1. Police vehicles will be operated as emergency vehicles when the officer has
reasonable cause to believe a life is in danger or when in immediate pursuit of an
offender. Communications personnel will attempt to ascertain the true degree of
emergency involved in all complaints and relay this information to the cars dispatched.
2. The following may be considered some examples of emergency situations

necessitating the operation of a police vehicle as an emergency vehicle:
Officer needs assistance.
Report of a forcible felony in progress.

A person calling for help in such a manner as to indicate immediate danger.
Report of an explosion.
Report of a shooting or stabbing.
Report of an auto accident with injury or other extenuating circumstances.
Pursuit of an actual or suspected violator of the law.
An industrial accident.
11
Responding to a crime in progress in which there is a threat of physical danger to the

parties involved.
3. Regardless of the nature of the emergency, officers should not drive in such a
manner as to endanger the life and property of another. Officers shall always consider
road, traffic and weather conditions and their ability to control vehicles under adverse
circumstances.
4. When responding to an emergency situation, an officer driving an authorized

emergency vehicle may:
Proceed past a red or stop signal or stop sign, but only after slowing down as may be
required and necessary for safe operation.
When approaching a "red" traffic light or stop sign an officer will:
Decelerate and be prepared to stop,
Enter the intersection only when it is safe,
Yield to all moving vehicles and pedestrians,
Accelerate only when it is safe.
When approaching a "green" traffic light an officer will:
Decelerate and be prepared to stop,
Enter the intersection only when it is safe.
Accelerate only when it is safe.
Exceed speed limits so long as he does not endanger life or property.
Disregard regulations governing direction of movement and turning.
Drive against traffic on one-way streets only when there is no danger to life or property
and then only with caution.
5. The following guidelines shall apply when operating a police vehicle as an

emergency vehicle:
Emergency Lights
The lights should be used in all situations in which the officer is to take liberties in his
driving and to expedite his free movement in order to reach his destination more quickly.
The lights are also to signal traffic violators to the extreme right of the roadway and
stop. It may be necessary to use both the lights and the siren to effect the stop.
The lights are also used to assist motorists parked or stopped in hazardous locations.
12
When the patrol vehicle is parked or stopped on the roadway or in a hazardous location.
Siren
The officer should be discreet in his use of the siren as it frequently complicates traffic
problems. Under extreme conditions the siren should be actuated continuously.
The siren should also be used to signal violators to stop when other means of attracting
the violator's attention have failed.
Officers should use the siren based on existing traffic, roadway conditions, and the
urgency of their arrival.
Emergency lights and siren in combination shall be utilized in the following

circumstances:
During pursuit situations.
When responding to emergency situations.
When responding to an alarm, the siren may be deactivated so as not to announce your
pending arrival.
Spotlight
The spotlight should be used as a protection to the officer when hazardous conditions
exist.
The spotlight should be used to signal violators to stop but care must be exercised so
as not to cause temporary blindness to the violator or other drivers on the roadway.
Public Address System

The public address system may be utilized to stop violators and direct their actions from
a safe distance, so as to minimize the hazard to the officer.
The public address system may also be used in directing persons when unusual
conditions exists, such as temporary traffic hazards or conditions and communicating
with other persons.
When pulled off the side of a roadway to complete an assignment or assist other units,
these lights should be used to warn motorists.
6. Unmarked police vehicles will not generally be operated as emergency vehicles.

Officers operating unmarked vehicles will use extra caution because unmarked cars are
more difficult for other drivers to identify as police vehicles.
7. Officers will not conduct an escort without prior approval of the watch
commander.
Officers will not escort other emergency vehicles using flashing lights and sirens unless
it is absolutely necessary to guide them to their destination.
13
Caution should be exercised especially when crossing intersections. Speed limits

should not be exceeded.
Officers will not follow ambulances, fire apparatus, or other emergency vehicles so
closely as to constitute a hazard.
Except as qualified below, officers will not use flashing lights and siren to escort non-
emergency vehicles. This is an extremely dangerous practice that could expose the
officer, Department and Village to civil liability.
In cases of serious illness or injury, an ambulance will be called. Sick or injured

persons should not be transported in Police Department vehicles.
If it is necessary to escort funeral processions, parades, or slow moving vehicles with

oversize loads, the police vehicle's flashing lights may be used. Caution should be
exercised while the escort is in progress.
14
Title: CITIZEN COMPLAINTS Procedure: 4.003
Revised:
PURPOSE:
To clarify the procedure for handling citizen complaints.
To provide for documentation of specific allegations.
To facilitate the investigation and disposition of citizen complaints.
POLICY:
It is the policy of the Police Department to investigate all complaints against Department
personnel, regardless of the source of such complaints. Investigations of these
complaints through standardized procedures will demonstrate the Department's desire
to provide honest, efficient police service and will inspire public confidence in its
personnel.
DEFINITION:
A citizen complaint is defined as that action taken by a citizen to bring to the attention of
the Department any police action or inaction that the citizen considers to be contrary to
law, proper procedure, good order, or in some other manner prejudicial to the citizen,
the police department, or to the community as a whole.
PROCEDURE:
1. A citizen complaint will be addressed whenever a citizen brings to the attention of

a member of this Department a complaint concerning an action described above.
Whenever a citizen requests to file a complaint against a member of this Department
the on duty watch commander will discuss the incident with the citizen. If after
discussing the incident with the supervisor, the citizen still desires to file a complaint, a
Citizen Complaint Form will be provided. A citizen complaint will not be accepted that
involves only the citizen’s contention that he is innocent of a charge placed against him
by the officer.
2. The citizen will be instructed to document, in his handwriting, as much as

possible concerning the incident and will be given whatever assistance is needed to
complete the form. The identity of the assisting person will be included in the narrative.
15
3. When the citizen is finished the Department member receiving the form will
check it for legibility and sign the form. The original will be retained and the complainant
will receive a copy.
4. The Department member receiving the form will record, on the back of the
original complaint form, any comments or discussion with the complainant, of any
significance, and the complainant's physical and mental condition. Evidence indicating
that the complainant is under the influence of an intoxicant or drug is suffering a mental
disorder or any other evidence of traits or conditions bearing upon his credibility will be
noted. The Department member will also note the complainant's physical condition,
specifically any visible marks or injuries relative to the complaint.
5. The Chief of Police will assign the complaint for investigation. All investigations
are confidential and the investigating officer will discuss the investigation with only those
individuals that will be involved in the investigation.
6. The investigating officer will thoroughly document his investigation and all
interviews conducted. The results of his investigations and findings will be forwarded, in
a sealed envelope, directly to the Chief of Police.
7. After review by the Chief of Police, the complainant will be contacted by the
investigating officer with the findings.
8. A record of all investigated citizen complaints will be kept by the office of the Chief
of Police.
16
Title: REPORTING POLICE Procedure: 4.004

VEHICLE TRAFFIC CRASHES
PURPOSE:
To provide for investigation and uniform reporting of traffic crashes involving

Department vehicles.
POLICY:
Whenever the operator of a police vehicle from the Police Department is involved in a
traffic crash, certain procedures will be implemented to safeguard the objectivity of the
investigation. Watch Commanders should consider the nature and circumstances of the
traffic crash and protect the integrity of the Department and all individuals involved.
PROCEDURE:
1. The operator of any police vehicle involved in any vehicular traffic crash within
the corporate Village limits will:
Allow the vehicles to remain in the post accident position, if traffic conditions permit.
Under no circumstances should they be removed from the immediate vicinity.
Request that the on duty watch commander respond to the accident scene.
Request medical aid when necessary.
2. All traffic crashes which occur within the corporate Village limits involving a police
vehicle, will be investigated the Illinois State Police, or the Cook County Sheriff’s Police
when available, or by the on duty watch commander who will complete the Traffic Crash
Report including a diagram.
3. Watch Commanders may request the assistance of an accident investigator to
investigate any traffic crash involving injuries, extensive damage to property, or where
special circumstances are present, such as potential liability to the Village.
4. The operator of the vehicle involved in a traffic crash will submit a memo
explaining the circumstances of the traffic crash. This memo will be prepared and
submitted before the operator ends his tour of duty.
5. The on duty watch commander investigating the traffic crash will submit a Report
to the Chief of Police, through the chain of command, indicating the findings of his
investigation. This report will include the following information:
traffic crash report
charge and court date, if an arrest is made,

17
citation number and court date if a ticket is issued,
other drivers’ insurance company and policy number,
brief narrative of the crash,
number and description of photographs taken,
name of accident investigator, if one used, and;

findings concerning negligence of operator and recommendations relating to corrective
action and/or discipline.
6. If the vehicle operator is disabled and cannot prepare the necessary reports, the
investigating watch commander will, when medically permissible, interview the injured
operator and prepare the report.
The investigating watch commander will examine the damaged vehicle to determine if it
is safe for use, considering both mechanical defects and unsightliness.
8. If the on duty watch commander is involved in a traffic crash, State Police will be
contacted to complete the traffic crash report.
9. The operator of any police vehicle involved in any traffic crash outside of the
corporate Village limits will:
Allow the vehicles to remain in the post accident position, if traffic conditions permit.
Under no circumstances should they be removed from the immediate vicinity.
Notify the proper jurisdiction and request medical aid if necessary.
Contact the communications center and have them advise the on duty watch
commander.
Obtain a copy of the Traffic Crash Report from the reporting agency.
Submit a memo explaining the circumstances of the crash.
10. The on duty watch commander will complete a Report after interviewing the
operator involved in the traffic crash and reviewing the traffic crash report. The watch
commander will submit this report to the Chief of Police, through the chain of command.
This report will include the following information:
traffic crash report
charge and court date, if an arrest is made,
citation number and court date if a ticket is issued,

18
other drivers’ insurance company and policy number,
brief narrative of the crash,
number and description of photographs taken,
name of accident investigator, if one used, and;
findings concerning negligence of operator and recommendations relating to corrective

action and/or discipline.
11. If the vehicle operator is disabled and cannot prepare the necessary reports, the
investigating watch commander will, when medically permissible, interview the injured
operator and prepare the report.
19
Title: HATE CRIME RELATED Procedure: 4.005

INCIDENTS
POLICY:
It is the policy of the Police Department to protect the constitutional rights of all citizens
regardless of their race, color, ethnicity, or religion. When the rights of any citizen are
infringed upon by intimidation, force, or violence, the Department shall expend
resources necessary to conduct a thorough investigation, identify the perpetrators, and
bring them before the court.
There will be special emphasis placed on victim assistance and community cooperation
to reduce the fears of the victim and the community.
The Police Department will not tolerate malicious or criminal incidents that are racially or
religiously motivated. The Department will also investigate incidents, non-criminal in
nature that adversely affect the community.
DEFINITION:
A hate crime related incident is an act or a threatened or attempted act by any person or
persons against the person or property of another individual or group which may in any
way constitute an expression of hostility toward the victim because of the person’s
actual or perceived race, color, creed, religion, ancestry, gender, sexual orientation,
physical or mental disability, or national origin. Such acts include, but are not limited to,
vandalism, cross burning, fire bombings, bomb threats, assaults, battery, threatening
phone calls, and any other incidents where the result of the action is real or perceived.
FACTORS TO BE CONSIDERED IN IDENTIFYING HATE CRIME RELATED

INCIDENTS:
The motivation behind the act determines whether an incident is hate related. Although
no one factor is conclusive, the following criteria, applied singularly or in combination,
should be used to determine if probable cause exists to believe that an incident was
motivated entirely or in part by animosity toward the victim because of his actual or
perceived race, color, creed, religion, ancestry, gender, sexual orientation, physical or
mental disability or national origin.
1. Were words, symbols, or acts that are or may be offensive to an identifiable

group used by the perpetrator, or are they present as evidence? For example, is there
a burning cross or a painted swastika, or were derogatory words or slurs or graffiti
directed at a particular racial, religious, ethnic or other minority group?
2. Are the victim and the suspected perpetrator members of different racial,
religious or ethnic groups?
20
3. Has the victim or victim’s group been subjected to past similar incidents? Has
there been tension or hostility between the victim’s group and another particular racial,
religious or ethnic group?
4. Is the victim the only minority group member in the neighborhood or one of just a
few such persons?
5. Did the victim recently move into the area? Is the victim acquainted with
neighbors and or local community groups? Has there been evidence of hostility toward
the victim by neighbors?
6. When multiple incidents occur at the same time, are all the victims of the same
race, ethnicity, religion, national origin or sexual orientation?
7. Does a meaningful portion of the community perceive and respond to the

situation as a hate crime related incident?
8. Does the incident appear to be timed to coincide with a specific holiday or date of
significance, (e.g. Martin Luther King Day, Rosh Hashanah)?
9. Has the victim been involved in recent public activity that would possibly make
him a target? Has the victim been associated with any prominent recent or past
activities relating to his race, ethnicity, religion or sexual orientation, (e.g., NAACP, gay
rights rally, demonstrations by or against the KKK)?
10. Has there been prior or recent news coverage of events of a similar nature?
11. What was the manner and means of attack, (e.g., color of paint, symbols or signs
used, unusual spelling of the words used)? Is the modus operandi similar to other
documented incidents?
12. Is there an ongoing neighborhood problem that may have initiated or contributed
to the act, (e.g., could the act be retribution for some conflict between neighbors or with
area juveniles)?
13. Does the perpetrator responsible have a true understanding of the impact of the
crime/incident on the victim or other group members? Are the perpetrators
juveniles?
14. Does the crime/incident indicate possible involvement by an organized hate

group, (e.g., KKK, American Nazi Party)? For example:
Is the literature printed or handwritten? Does it contain an Identifiable hate group
symbol or insignia or hate group address?
Is there any documented or suspected organized hate group activity in the area?
PROCEDURE:
REPORTING OF HATE CRIME RELATED INCIDENTS

21
1. A written report and thorough follow-up investigation will be made for all hate
related incidents. The report will be made regardless of the victim's desire for
prosecution. In some cases, the motivation behind the act will be unclear.
REPORTING OFFICER’S RESPONSIBILITY

1. When an incident is determined to be hate related, the reporting officer is
responsible for the following:
Aid the injured, stabilize the victim, and provide necessary assistance;
Apprehend the offender, when possible;
Take steps to prevent the incident from escalating;
Protect the crime scene;
Request that a supervisor respond to the scene;
Conduct a preliminary investigation;
Prepare the appropriate report; and
Provide assistance in accordance with the Department’s procedure for victim/witness

assistance.
SUPERVISOR’S RESPONSIBILITY
1. When informed that a hate motivated incident has occurred, the supervisor will:
Respond to the scene to determine the seriousness of the incident;
Determine whether additional personnel are needed;
Notify the Chief of Police, an investigator, or other personnel as necessary;
Take whatever steps are necessary to prevent the incident from escalating;
Supervise the preliminary investigation;
Review and approve all initial reports; and
Assist the Chief of Police in carrying out any necessary community relations functions.
INVESTIGATOR’S RESPONSIBILITY
1. When called to the scene of a hate motivated incident, the investigator will:
Assume control of any necessary follow-up investigations;
Conduct all necessary crime scene searches, surveillances, or activities to secure

evidence and apprehend the offender;
22
Contact the appropriate federal, state, and local law enforcement agencies for
assistance if necessary;
Submit all follow-up reports and prepare the case for prosecution; and
Keep the Chief of Police and the victim informed of the status and any changes in the
case.
2. The Criminal Investigations Unit is responsible for maintaining a file on all hate
motivated incidents and establishing a liaison with the appropriate federal, state, and
local agencies for intelligence information exchange.
3. A follow-up investigation will be conducted by a member of the Criminal
Investigations Unit on all reports of hate crime related incidents.
23
Title: BICYCLE OPERATIONS Procedure: 4.007
PURPOSE:
To provide for the safe operation and use of Department bicycles.
To provide Department procedures for the operation of the police bicycle.
POLICY:
Department bicycles will primarily be used to provide highly visible police patrol in the
business and park areas. The bicycle is an effective vehicle in that it combines mobility
with close citizen contact.
PROCEDURE:
The bicycle unit is a function of the Patrol Division and is under the direct supervision of
the watch commander.
PERIOD OF OPERATION:
1. The bicycle will be used as a specialized vehicle from April 1 through October 31.
Personnel will normally be assigned depending on shift staffing levels.
2. The bicycle will not be used during periods of inclement weather.
BICYCLE UNIT PERSONNEL:
1. Personnel will be assigned to the bicycle unit by the Chief of Police. Only
authorized personnel are allowed to ride the police bicycles.
BICYCLE EQUIPMENT:
1. The police bicycles will be equipped with a headlight, taillight, reflectors, and
audible warning device and contain police markings.
2. The bicycle officer shall use the trunk mounted bicycle carrier for the
transportation of the bicycle.
3. Bicycle unit personnel are responsible for submitting a request for service form if
a bicycle is in need of repair or service.
BICYCLE OFFICER’S UNIFORM

24
1. The bicycle officer’s uniform shall consist of the following items:
Black shorts.
Black short sleeve polo shirt.
Duty belt.
Helmet with police lettering.
Protective eyewear.
Black bicycle gloves.
Black athletic shoes.
PATROL UTILIZATION:
The police bicycle will not normally

Be utilized as a beat vehicle. At the watch commander’s discretion, a bicycle officer
assigned a beat, may mount his bicycle to his squad and ride as time permits. The
officer should not distance himself too far from his squad to impact response time.
Department police bicycles will be used to access those areas not accessible by a
car.
A police bicycle will not be used to transport prisoners.
4. A police bicycle will under no circumstances be involved in or used as a pursuit

vehicle for pursuing another vehicle.
25
Title: ANIMAL COMPLAINT ENFORCEMENT Procedure: 4.014
PURPOSE:
To provide a guideline for department response to animal complaints.
To establish a procedure for handling animal bite reports and impoundment.
POLICY:
The Police Department will handle stray, injured, lost or found animals in a humane
manner.
PROCEDURE:
WILD, STRAY, OR INJURED ANIMALS
1. When a call is received concerning an animal complaint, the communications

operator will determine if the complaint involves a wild animal or a stray domestic
animal.
2. If the call concerns a stray domestic animal, a unit will be dispatched and attempt
to capture the animal in a humane manner.
3. Stray domestic animals will be transported to animal welfare if the owner cannot
be contacted.
4. Stray animals will be impounded as determined by village ordinance and an

attempt made to determine ownership. If the owner cannot be located, the animal will
be disposed of by the animal shelter.
5. If the animal is vicious and cannot be captured without injury to the officer, or
presents a danger to the public, the officer may use a weapon to destroy the animal.
Animals requiring destruction will be killed through the most reasonable method
available for the time, location, and circumstances. The officer will document his
actions on a memo and forward to the Chief of Police, through the chain of command.
ANIMAL BITES
1. Officers will respond promptly to all reports of animal bites and ensure that the
person bitten has received medical attention.
26
The officer will attempt to locate the owner of the animal and advise them of the incident
and instruct the owner to take their animal to a veterinarian.
The officer will obtain all necessary information to complete an animal bite report for the
Department of Animal Control.
If the animal is a stray, the officer will impound the animal and advise the veterinarian
that this animal has bitten a person.
5. If the officer is unable to identify the owner or the animal, a complete description
of the animal will be obtained and an incident report written.
27
Title: BODY ARMOR Procedure: 4.015
PURPOSE
To provide for the highest degree of safety to all police officers while on duty.
To establish procedures for the use of the soft body armor vest as an item of police
department safety equipment.
POLICY:
The most valuable resource of the Department is its personnel. Any loss due to injury is
a substantial loss to the Department. Therefore, a primary objective of the Department
is loss control with proven loss prevention techniques. The policy of the Police
Department shall be to provide, to all full time sworn personnel, a protective soft body
armor vest.
PROCEDURE:
ISSUE AND USE
1. All full time sworn personnel shall be issued a soft body armor vest. Make,
model and threat level shall conform to the National Institute of Justice standard
#0101.03 for threat level protection.
2. Department members shall be REQUIRED to wear the soft body armor vest
while involved in uniform police operations.
3. Patrol personnel shall have soft body armor readily available while on duty.
Readily available means in the passenger compartment of the police vehicle.
4. Body armor shall not be stored in a trunk compartment of any police vehicle.
5. Body armor shall be worn while performing hazardous duties such as stake outs,
planned felony arrests, tactical functions or when directed by a supervisor under
potential or known volatile or hazardous conditions.
6. The vest may be worn under the uniform shirt or over the uniform shirt in an
approved vest shell.
7. It shall be the supervisor's responsibility to ensure that personnel are properly

equipped with body armor during their tour of duty.
MAINTENANCE AND CARE

28
1. Personnel shall maintain the vest in a clean and serviceable condition.
2. The vest is subject to periodic inspections by supervisory personnel, as are

uniforms and other departmental equipment.
3. Cleaning shall be done only according to the manufacturer's instructions, as

contained in the Kevlar Personal Body Armor Facts Book.
DAMAGE INSPECTION
1. Immediately after the vest has been subject to stress (attack by sharp or blunt
objects, projectiles, or substantial impact), the vest is to be examined for damage to the
Kevlar fabric.
2. Any attack to the vest shall be reported in writing to the officer's supervisor and
shall be inspected by the manufacturer or his representative.
3. If the Kevlar has been damaged or penetrated, it will be immediately replaced.
4. If the vest has become wet, allow it to air dry naturally.
REPLACEMENT AND REPAIRS
1. The Police Department will establish a vest replacement program following the
manufacturers’ recommended life expectancy of the vest.
2. The Police Department will replace or repair all vests damaged in the line of duty.
3. The officer shall be responsible for replacement or repair of the vest under the
following circumstances:
Weight gain that makes the vest unwearable.
Damage caused by negligence or not in the line of duty.
Wear caused by faulty maintenance.
Theft or loss due to negligence.

29
Title: NOTIFICATION FOR DEATH Procedure: 4.018

AND SERIOUS INJURY
PURPOSE:
To ensure prompt notification of a family member in all cases involving deceased or

seriously injured persons.
To establish Department procedure for making notifications.
POLICY:
Every effort will be made to locate and notify the nearest relative of a person who has
suffered serious or fatal injuries, as soon as possible. Notifications will be made in
person by a member of this Department or from another agency. Cooperation of the
news media will be sought when withholding identity of the subject(s) pending the
notification of a relative of the victim.
PROCEDURE:
CITIZENS
1. In cases involving death or serious injury to an adult, juvenile or mentally

impaired person or any injury to a juvenile or mentally impaired person, the officer
executing the original report will be responsible for notifying or causing notification of a
relative. However, if the death is a homicide or suspicious circumstances surround the
death, the Criminal Investigations Unit will be contacted before any notifications are
made. Death notifications should, if possible, be made in person by two officers.
2. If a relative lives in an adjoining community, the notification may be made in

person. The Police Department of that community will be notified of our presence and
purpose. Supervisors will determine the appropriate distance for the neighboring
communities.
3. If the relative lives in a jurisdiction outside our notification area, the appropriate
Police Department will be requested to make the notification when death has occurred.
In cases involving serious injury and the person has been transported to a hospital,
notification can be made by telephone advising a responsible person of the basic
information regarding the injury and where the person is being treated.
The official police report will contain the name and relationship of persons notified, date,
time, and name of notifying officer.
DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL
30
1. The Chief of Police will be notified immediately whenever a member of the

Department suffers serious injury or death.
2. In any case of serious injury or death to a member of the Department while on

duty, the Chief of Police, or his designee, will make personal notification to the
member's family.
3. When necessary, transportation for the family will be arranged for or provided by
the supervisor.
4. It will be the responsibility of each member and employee of the Department to

provide a current home address and telephone number of the person to be contacted in
the case of injury.
31
Title: ELECTRONIC CONTROL WEAPONS (TASER), Procedure: 4.024

IMPACT WEAPONS,
AND O/C SPRAY REGULATIONS
PURPOSE:
To set forth guidelines and regulations for the type of weapons and ammunition
authorized by the Department, and to ensure proper training and qualification
procedures for all personnel.
To outline general guidelines for the carrying and use of firearms by police personnel.
The use of a firearm is probably the most serious act in which a police officer will
engage. It is imperative that the officer act within the boundaries of legal guidelines,
ethics, good judgment, and accepted practices; but also be prepared by training and
direction to act within the scope of this procedure whenever using a firearm in the line of
duty.
PROCEDURE:
GENERAL:
Full time sworn personnel of the department who are authorized by law to carry
firearms shall exercise the utmost care and caution in the use of firearms.
Full time sworn personnel may carry their approved firearm within the provisions of
State law. When carrying the firearm off duty and out of uniform it must be concealed.
Part time sworn personnel are not permitted to carry a weapon off duty without
written permission of the Chief of Police.
4. It shall be prohibited for any member to appear in public in an intoxicated condition

while carrying a firearm. No member shall carry a firearm under the influence of any
intoxicant.
5. Carrying a firearm while on suspension or during a leave of absence, where the

officers’ official commission is suspended, is prohibited.
6. All handguns, whether carried on or off duty, must be registered with the
Department.
7. The carrying of a second exposed handgun while on duty is prohibited.
8. Only firearms and ammunition authorized by the Department shall be used in the
performance of duty.
32
9. Officers will not point their firearm at a person unless circumstances create a
strong reasonable cause to believe that it may be necessary to lawfully use the weapon
in conformance with other sections of this procedure.
10. Officers will secure and store their weapons, both on and off duty, in such a
manner as to deter unauthorized persons from gaining control over the weapon.
11. Officers will immediately report any loss or theft, of a weapon, to the Department.
AUTHORIZED FIREARMS
1. All sworn officers of the department will, at their expense, equip themselves with
a handgun, as outlined below, to carry while on duty.
A double action, .45ACP, .40CAL, or 9mm caliber semi automatic pistol of quality
manufacture, inspected and approved by the Department Range Officer.
2. Officers will carry the weapon with a round chambered. All semi-automatic
handguns will be double action and equipped with an internal or external safety to guard
against accidental discharge if the weapon is dropped. Weapons will not be carried in
the holsters with the hammer cocked.
FIREARMS QUALIFICATIONS
1. All sworn personnel shall pass a qualification course with their duty weapon(s)
annually, and attend and pass quarterly firearms training. An officer must pass a
weapons qualification course with any authorized duty weapon before carrying it on
duty. The officer will supply training ammunition for duty weapon training for weapons
not capable of chambering .45 caliber ammunition.
2. All sworn personnel shall pass a qualification course with their off duty weapon(s)
annually. An officer must pass a weapons qualification course with any authorized off
duty weapon before carrying it off duty. The officer will supply the ammunition for the
course if the weapon is not capable of chambering .45 caliber ammunition.
3. All sworn personnel utilizing the department approved shotgun and/or patrol rifle
shall pass a qualification course annually, and attend and pass quarterly training.
4. All sworn personnel are afforded periodic range training sessions, scheduled by
the range officer.
5. All courses for qualification and proficiency shall be approved by the Department
Range Master.
6. Firearms qualification includes achieving minimum scores on prescribed courses

of fire, attaining and demonstrating a knowledge of the laws concerning the use of
firearms, and being familiar with, and exercise safe handling procedures for the use of
firearms. Officers must demonstrate the ability to break the weapon down for cleaning
purposes, and reassembling it, restoring it to firing condition.
33
8. Members that are unable to shoot a qualifying score will be required to attend
additional range training with the Range Officer. The Range Master will be advised and
monitor the progress to ensure all members qualify.
9. The list of authorized duty weapons will be reviewed annually by the Range
Officer newer model weapons may be added as technology or threat levels change.
AMMUNITION
1. Duty ammunition will be provided by the Department. All members on duty will
carry the manufacturer's rated amount loaded in their handgun and a minimum of one
fully loaded magazine as a spare.
2. Only Department issued or authorized ammunition may be carried on or off duty. The
Department authorized ammunition will be the Winchester Ranger .45 Cal., .40 Cal., or
9mm Caliber or comparable ammunition, as approved by the Range Officer.
3. The standard ammunition for Department shotguns will be 12 gauge, 1 ounce

rifled slugs, or “00” buckshot.
4. The standard ammunition for Department approved patrol rifles will be 5.56/.223
General Purpose and/or Barrier Penetrating Ammunition.
5. No other type of ammunition will be authorized without specific prior approval of

the Chief of Police.
INSPECTIONS
1. Firearms carried on or off-duty shall be maintained in a clean and serviceable
condition.
2. All sworn officers shall submit their duty firearm for inspection by a Range Officer
at the semi-annual qualifications. Off duty weapons shall be inspected during the
off-duty weapon training. Any firearm that does not pass inspection will be immediately
removed from service. A Department weapon will be lent to the officer until his duty
firearm is serviceable or repaired, and inspected.
3. Any unsafe or unauthorized equipment shall be reported to the Officer's

supervisor in writing, by the Range Officer.
4. Supervisors shall have frequent unannounced inspections to ensure that

personnel are carrying only authorized weapons and ammunition and that all equipment
is clean.
5. The Range Officer shall maintain, and update annually, a Weapons Authorization
Log describing every weapon an officer is authorized to carry while on duty. This
will include Department owned weapons. Information to be included:
Manufacturer of Weapon
Model of Weapon
34
Barrel length
Caliber
Serial number
Class of weapon
Dates of qualification
6. The Range Officer shall maintain a Weapons Log describing all off duty weapons
authorized to be carried by an officer.
RANGE PROCEDURES
1. All organized Department shoots will be scheduled and supervised by the

Department Range Officer.
2. The Range Officer will be in charge of all personnel while participating in any
shooting program on the range, regardless of rank or position.
3. Uniform members will use their service weapon, holster and ammunition carrier
when firing on the range course.
4. Detectives and Administrative personnel shall use the weapon and holster they
wear while on duty on a routine basis.
5. Members may use a substitute weapon if their weapon is not usable at that time.
Substitute weapons must conform to department regulations, and be approved by the
range officer before any Department shoot.
6. Members will be required to wear ear and eye protection at all times.
7. Weapons will be loaded and unloaded only on the firing line and only upon
command of the Range Officer.
8. All weapons and ammunition malfunctions or suspected malfunctions shall

immediately be reported to the Range Officer.
9. Any member sustaining an injury while on the range will immediately report it to
the Range Officer. A written report will be made to the Chief of Police.
10. Any incidents on the range involving weapons, misconduct, or violations of

department rules will be reported to the Chief of Police by the Range Officer. The
Range Officer has the authority to order members off the range in cases of serious
misconduct.
11. All members are on duty while at the range and all rules and regulations apply.
12. No civilians are to be on the range firing line without permission from the Range
Officer.
All officers shall adhere to all range rules and regulations.

35
14. The range officer shall complete a range qualification report after every training
session and submit it to the Chief of Police.
MISCELLANEOUS
1. All on duty officers will carry their duty handgun in a holster. Uniformed officers
must use a holster as specified in Department uniform guidelines.
2. No officer will internally or externally modify any mechanical operating

component of their on duty or off duty firearm, from factory specifications, without first
obtaining written permission from the Department Range Officer.
AUTHORIZED LESS-THAN-LETHAL WEAPONS
1. All sworn officers of the Department will equip themselves with their choice of a
less-than-lethal weapon. A less-than-lethal weapon will be carried on the person
whenever an officer is out of his police vehicle. O/C Spray and Taser Electronic Control
Weapon an impact weapon, may be carried. The impact weapon, excluding flashlights,
will conform to the following standards:
An ASP Collapsible Straight Baton (either sixteen, twenty-one or twenty- six inch
length baton) or,
A standard straight police baton made of wood, not to exceed twenty-six inches in
length.
2. The Departmentally approved O/C Spray is First Defense Oleoresin Capsicum

Spray described as follows:
MK VI .68 ounce canister or

MK III 1.47 ounce canister or
MK IV 3.00 ounce canister.
3. The Department approved Electronic Control Weapon (ECW).
CARE OF LESS-THAN-LETHAL WEAPONS
1. Officers who carry O/C Spray should routinely inspect the canister and nozzle for
signs of erosion, leakage, dirt in the nozzle, fullness and/or other signs of damage.
2. O/C Spray should not be stored in direct sunlight or in areas where the
temperature can exceed 120 degrees Fahrenheit, such as in the trunk or passenger
compartment of a vehicle.
The ASP collapsible baton should be kept dry. If exposed to water, the baton
should be opened and dried with a soft cloth. The butt cap or plug should be
periodically checked to make sure it is tightly screwed onto the handle. The tip should
be checked for looseness.
36
TRAINING
1. All sworn officers will be trained prior to carrying a less-than-lethal weapon.
2. Training will consist of classroom training and hands-on practical application of

the less-than-lethal weapon.
3. Officers will be retrained in the use of less-than-lethal weapons annually.
4. Only those officers demonstrating proficiency in the use of agency authorized

weapons will be allowed to carry such weapons.
5. Training will be conducted by certified weapons instructors.
6. As part of the annual in-service training, the use of force procedure will be
reviewed.
37
Title: Patrol Rifle Policy Procedure: 4.025

Date Issued: December 12, 2007
Purpose:
The authorized patrol rifle/carbine may be provided by the Police Department or

individually Officer owned.
Patrol rifles/carbines will be deployed consistent with the Departmental Use-of-force
Policy
Officer deploying the patrol rifle/carbine will maintain control of the firearm at all times or
insure that the weapon is secured by another police officer.
Patrol rifle/carbine deployment is recommended when the following conditions are
identified; potentially dangerous/deadly force situation where the officer has reason to
Any believe that the deployment of the patrol rifle/carbine will contribute to the safe
resolution of the incident or diminish risk to the officer or the public
The officer is assigned as a member of a Rapid Deployment team, C.E.R.T. (combined
Emergency Response Team), or a special assignment
The officer is assigned as a cover officer on perimeter security or a containment team
member during a tactical operation.
The officer has cause to believe that an armed offender is wearing body armor or is
shielded by an intervening barrier.
The officer has cause to believe that an offender may be engaged at an extended
distance.
The destruction of an injured or sick animal per Departmental Policy.
Authorized Specifications
All authorized patrol rifles/carbines must meet the following specifications. The Chief of
Police or his designee shall provide any variation in type or caliber of the patrol
rifle/carbine The Primary patrol rifle/carbine shall be an AR-15/CAR-15 type secured in
a weapon rack mounted inside the car or locked in the squad car trunk.
Chambered for 5.56mm rifle ammunition.
A barrel length of at least 16 inches.
Semi-automatic only.
Iron Sights.
The butt stock may be either fixed or collapsible.
Primary magazines are 20 rounders loaded with 18 rounds.
Back-up magazines may be 30 rounders, loaded with 28 rounds.
Ammunition shall be of a type approved by the Chief of Police
Equipped with a sling system suitable for tactical deployment where the weapon may be
retained “hands free” yet ready for immediate use.
Procedure #4.703 38
Patrol rifles/carbines owned by an Officer must be inspected and approved by a Department Range
Master to insure that it meets Department authorized specifications.
Modifications
No modifications, other that the following list, will be permitted without prior approval of the Chief of
Police. Requests for any other modifications must be submitted in writing through the Range Officers,
with recommendations to the Chief of Police.
Generally approved options;
Front night sight

Weapon mounted light attachment
Redi-mag
Vortex Flash Hider
Ambidextrous Safety
Replacement pistol grip
Extractor Defender D-Ring
Supplemental Sighting System: The use of a supplemental sighting system must be approved by the
Chief of Police, with recommendations from the Range Officers. The device must be suitable for
tactical close quarter engagement and allow immediate access to the iron sights should the system
fail.
It is recognized that an Officer’s assignment to C.E.R.T. (Combined Emergency Response Team) or
any other specially assignment/unit may require or determine special modifications.
Training and qualification
Officers must complete a Department approved patrol rifle/carbine training course.

Officers must successfully complete the quarterly Department training and/or qualification course-of-
fire to remain eligible for field deployment of the patrol rif
Procedure #4.703 39
Title: REPORTING HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS Procedure: 4.027
PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines for identifying, reporting and correcting hazardous highway conditions and
other emergency situations.
POLICY:
Upon the discovery of a hazardous condition the officer shall notify Communications Center and
request that the appropriate agency be contacted to have the hazard corrected.
PROCEDURE:
1. When an officer observes a situation that he believes to be potentially dangerous, or such

hazard requires immediate correction, such as a fallen tree or electrical wires down, the officer
will immediately notify communications and identify the type of assistance and equipment required.
The officer will protect the scene, bystanders and direct traffic or take any other action deemed
necessary to correct the situation.
2. A supervisor shall respond to the scene of any emergency, upon request, to correct a
hazardous condition.
3. When a hazard is detected that represents a potential accident situation, but the threat of such
is not imminent, the officer shall notify communications of the situation, who will then contact the
proper agency.
4. Officers shall report conditions, which may require the service of another Village Department.
5. Hazardous conditions are identified by one or more of the following categories:
Malfunction
Defective
Missing or lack of
Broken or damaged
Obstructed
Improperly located
6. Hazardous conditions may include but are not limited to:

Mechanical traffic devices
Procedure #4.703 40
Traffic and information signs
Train crossing locations
Roadway lighting
Broken water mains
Electrical wires down
Fallen trees
Roadway debris
Dangerous ice or snow accumulation
Roadway safety devices: road markers, striping, reflectors and impact devices
Defects in the roadway:

Vehicles parked or abandoned on the travel portion of the roadway.
Procedure #4.703 41
Title: VEHICLE PURSUIT Procedure: 4.031
PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines and responsibilities for vehicle pursuits requiring emergency operation of
Police Department vehicles.
POLICY:
Emergency operations of department vehicles shall be conducted in strict accordance with existing
statutes, rules and procedures.
Vehicle pursuit is one of the most dangerous duties a police officer must perform. When a decision to
pursue is made, the safety of all concerned must be considered. The seriousness of the offense
must be weighed against the hazards of the health and welfare of citizens who might be affected by
the chase. During the pursuit, continuous balancing of the seriousness versus safety is mandatory.
The Department expects an officer, or his supervisor, to terminate a pursuit whenever the risks to the
safety of the officers or citizens outweigh the danger to the community if the offender is not caught.
No task is of such importance as to justify the reckless disregard of the safety of innocent persons.
The principles of safety shall not become secondary.
The responsibility for the decision to overtake or pursue another vehicle rests on the individual officer.
In arriving at his decision he must carefully consider all factors involved and the possible
consequences. To diminish the likelihood of a pursuit, officers intending to stop a vehicle should,
when possible, be within close proximity to the vehicle before activating emergency lights and siren.
DEFINITIONS:
Vehicle Pursuit: An active attempt by one or more officers to apprehend a suspect operating a
motor vehicle, while the suspect is trying to avoid capture by using high speed or other evasive tactics
such as driving off the roadway, sudden or unexpected movements or willfully failing to yield to a
signal to stop.
Forcible Felony: A felony, that involves an actual or threatened attack that the officer has
reasonable cause to believe could result or has resulted in death or serious bodily injury.
Roadblock: Any method, restriction or obstruction used or intended for the purpose of preventing
free passage of vehicles on a roadway to effect the apprehension of an actual or suspected offender
in a vehicle.
Primary Pursuing Unit: The police unit that initiates a pursuit or any unit that assumes control of the
pursuit.
Procedure #4.703 42
Terminate Pursuit: The officer will deactivate audible and visual emergency warning equipment
(emergency lights and siren) and resume a safe speed.
Supervisor: The on duty patrol shift watch commander.
PROCEDURE:
Vehicle pursuit is justified only when the officer knows or has reasonable grounds to believe the
suspect is attempting to evade apprehension and the suspect, if allowed to escape, may present
a danger to human life or cause serious injury to other people.
Officers engaged in emergency vehicle operations shall use audible and visual emergency warning
equipment (emergency lights and siren).
INITIATING PRIMARY UNIT RESPONSIBILITY
1. The responsibility for the decision to initiate pursuit rests with the individual officer. The officer
shall, in all cases, notify the Communications Center when a pursuit is underway and provide the
following information:
Police unit identification;
Location, speed and direction of travel, with continuous updates;
Vehicle description including license number, if known;
The specific reason for the pursuit, including known laws violated;
Number and description of occupants;
When, or if, the pursuit leaves the municipal limits; and,
When switching to another radio frequency.
2. Failure to provide sufficient information will be cause for the supervisor to order termination of
the pursuit.
3. The initiating/primary unit shall be in field command and bears operational responsibility for the
pursuit unless relieved by a supervisor. The authority of this unit pertains to the immediate field
operation and is, always, subordinate to the shift supervisor or commanding officer.
4. The primary unit may maintain pursuit as long as it is safe to do so; until directed to terminate
the pursuit by a supervisor; the suspect is stopped; or a reasonable distance has been covered which
may indicate the futility of continued pursuit.
5. The decision to abandon pursuit may be the most intelligent course of action. A pursuing
officer must constantly question whether the seriousness of the offense justifies continued pursuit. In
any case, a pursuit shall terminate under any of the following circumstances:
Procedure #4.703 43
If, in the opinion of the pursuing officer or a supervisor, there is a clear and unreasonable danger to
the officer or others created by the pursuit which outweighs the necessity for immediate
apprehension;
The suspects identity has been established so that later apprehension can be accomplished and
there is no longer a need for immediate apprehension;
The prevailing traffic, roadway and environmental conditions dictate the futility of continued pursuit;
The pursued vehicle's location is no longer known; or,
The pursuing officer knows or is reasonably certain that the offender is a juvenile, the offense is a
misdemeanor or non-serious felony, and the safety factors involved are obviously greater than
those with which a juvenile can cope.
6. Termination of a pursuit does not necessarily prohibit the following of a vehicle at a safe speed
or remaining in an area to re-initiate pursuit if the opportunity and conditions permit.
7. When terminating a pursuit, the officer must advise dispatch that he is terminating pursuit. The
officer will also turn off his vehicle’s emergency lights and siren.
ASSISTING UNIT RESPONSIBILITY
1. Assistance will be coordinated by the Communications Center under the direction of the
supervisor. The supervisor and primary unit will be advised of the identity and locations of units who
can assist.
2. An active pursuit will normally involve no more than two units (the primary unit and one backup
unit). If more assistance is specifically requested the amount will be determined by:
Nature of offense;
Number of suspects;
Whether the participating units are single or double man cars; and,
Other clear and articulated facts that would warrant the increased hazards.
3. Only the supervisor may authorize more than two units to be in active pursuit. All other units
will remain aware of the direction and progress of the pursuit but shall not actively participate unless
specifically authorized to do so.
4. An authorized assisting unit shall immediately notify the Communications Center of its identity
upon joining the pursuit.
5. If the primary unit is a one-man car the assisting unit may assume radio communications
responsibility allowing the primary to devote full attention to driving.
6. The assisting unit will maintain a safe distance behind the primary unit.
Procedure #4.703 44
7. Assisting units shall avoid intersecting the path of an oncoming high-speed vehicle.
8. If the primary unit becomes disabled, the assisting unit will become the primary unit. A new
backup unit may be authorized by the supervisor.
SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITY
1. Upon being notified of a pursuit, the supervisor will verify the following:
No more than the necessary units are involved;
The proper frequency and procedures are being utilized; and,
Affected allied agencies are being notified.
2. The supervisor will direct the pursuit, approve or order alternative tactics, and maintain control
until the pursuit is terminated.
3. Remain within our corporate limits to provide proper supervision unless the supervisor is the
primary unit. The supervisor will designate an officer to remain within the corporate limits and
assume command until the supervisor returns.
4. In the absence of adequate information from the primary or backup units, the supervisor will
terminate the pursuit.
5. As with many tactical field problems, it is not necessary that the supervisor be physically
present in order to coordinate and control the pursuit.
6. If the pursuit terminates in our jurisdiction, the supervisor will proceed to the termination point
to provide guidance and necessary supervision.
7. Ensure proper completion of required reports.
PURSUIT INITIATED BY ANOTHER POLICE AGENCY
1. A unit may become directly involved in the pursuit if authorized by the supervisor as long as
the pursuit remains within our corporate limits. To continue outside of our corporate limits,
authorization to do so must be received from the supervisor.
2. All other relevant guidelines described in this procedure will apply.
SUPERVISOR'S RESPONSIBILITY IN PURSUIT BY ANOTHER AGENCY
1. Closely monitor the pursuit while it is in our jurisdiction to ensure that adequate assistance is
provided.
2. Ensure that Police units do not continue the pursuit once the chase has passed our corporate
limits unless necessary to assist the pursuing unit.
VEHICLE OPERATIONS, TACTICS, LIMITATIONS AND PROHIBITIONS

Procedure #4.703 45
1. Traffic Violations: Pursuits for minor traffic violations are prohibited.
2. Property Crimes: Pursuits for property crimes will be based on the seriousness of the crime
weighed against the danger to life posed by the offender and the danger posed by the pursuit itself.
3. Offensive Tactics: During the course of a pursuit, deliberate contact between vehicles;
forcing the offender into parked cars, ditches, or any other obstacle; boxing in or heading off;
ramming; or driving along side the pursued vehicle while it is in motion shall be prohibited unless such
actions are specifically approved by the supervisor. Such tactics may be approved only when the use
of deadly force would be authorized. Reckless or hazardous driving maneuvers of the pursued
vehicle shall not be duplicated by any pursuing unit.
4. Civilian Ride-Along: No unit will engage in a pursuit when accompanied by a civilian

ride-along.
5. Unmarked Police Vehicles: Officers operating unmarked vehicles (provided the vehicle is
equipped with emergency lights and siren) may engage in a pursuit only when the offender presents
an immediate and direct threat to life. The unmarked car will withdraw from active pursuit when a
marked unit becomes available to take over the pursuit.
6. Caravanning: There shall be no caravanning by field units not directly involved in the
immediate active pursuit.
7. Passing: Passing another pursuing police vehicle in a pursuit is prohibited.
8. Spacing: All units in a pursuit shall space themselves at a distance that will ensure proper
braking and reaction time for any sudden or unexpected maneuvers.
9. Controlled Access Highway: Units shall not pursue offenders the wrong way on the toll
road, interstate or other controlled access highways, divided highways or ramps.
10. Traffic Control Devices: Extreme caution must be used whenever officers disregard traffic
signs or signals.
11. Emergency Equipment: No officer will continue a pursuit if the emergency equipment on the
unit ceases to function properly.
12. Collisions: No officer will continue a pursuit if his unit becomes involved in a traffic collision
unless the collision is with the pursued vehicle and no other police unit is available to assume control.
13. Roadblocks: The use of roadblocks must be authorized by a supervisor. Generally, a

roadblock will be employed only as a last resort. The use of a roadblock must be directly associated
with the seriousness of the offense. The roadblock must be clearly visible and provide adequate
warning to allow vehicles to come to a safe stop. The roadway shall not be completely blocked
unless the use of deadly force would be authorized.
14. Boundary Limits: No officer will continue a pursuit initiated by this Department once the
pursuit has reached the far corporate limits of an adjoining municipality without the specific approval
of the supervisor.
Procedure #4.703 46
REPORTING AND CRITIQUE
1. At the conclusion of a pursuit, the primary unit officer will complete a Law Enforcement
Training Standards Board Pursuit Driving Report.
The Watch Commander will review the Pursuit Driving Report and conduct a critique of the
pursuit.and forward the report to the Chief of Police. This report will contain:
A review of the facts surrounding the incident as it relates to adherence to Department policy and
procedure, and:
A finding and recommendation in those circumstances where there are deviations from policy and
procedure.
3. The Chief of Police will forward the Pursuit Driving Report to the Law Enforcement Training
Standards Board.
Procedure #4.703 47
Title: FIELD INTERVIEWS Procedure: 4.032
PURPOSE:
To identify suspicious persons and their possible association with criminal activity.
POLICY:
It is imperative that police departments adopt aggressive measures for the prevention of crime and
the apprehension of criminals. Field interviews are endorsed by the Police Department as an
appropriate technique to deter and identify criminals.
LAW:
Temporary questioning without arrest

A peace officer, after having identified himself as a peace officer, may stop any person in a public
place for a reasonable period of time when the officer reasonably infers from the circumstances that
the person is committing, is about to commit or has committed an offense and may demand the name
and address of the person and an explanation of their actions. Such detention and temporary
questioning will be conducted near where the person was stopped.
Search during temporary questioning

When a peace officer has stopped a person for temporary questioning and reasonably suspects that
he or another is in danger of attack, he may search the person for weapons. If the officer discovers a
weapon, he may take it until the completion of the questioning, at which time he shall either return the
weapon, if lawfully possessed, or arrest the person so questioned.
PROCEDURE:
1. When an officer has a reasonable suspicion of possible criminal activity he may stop an
individual. The standard of reasonable suspicion is substantially lower than the requirement of
probable cause. However, the reasonable suspicion must be based upon objective circumstances
that led the officer to suspect possible criminal activity and possible involvement by the suspect.
2. When determining the appropriateness of field interviews the officer should evaluate
contributing factors including suspicious behavior, time of day, the actions of the person, the
circumstances of the moment, and the general awareness of crime in the areas.
3. When stopping a suspicious person or vehicle the following will apply:

Notify communications of the location of the stop and a brief description of the person(s);
If a vehicle is involved give a brief description of the vehicle, license number and number of
occupants; and,
Procedure #4.703 48
The communications operator will dispatch a backup unit to assist in the field stop, unless the officer
indicated that a backup is not necessary.
4. Field interview stops will normally be concluded in one of three ways:
The officer's original suspicion is unfounded and no written report is necessary;
Probable cause for an arrest is established and the offender is taken into custody and the arrest
report is completed.
5. On all citizen contact stops, when a report is completed, the officer should request the
communications operator to initiate a complaint and advise when the stop is complete.
Procedure #4.703 49
Title: POLICE CADET PROGRAM Procedure: 4.033
PURPOSE:
To outline the general duties and responsibilities of the Police Cadet Program.
POLICY:
The Police Department's Cadet Program is designed to provide a variety of benefits to young adults
interested in law enforcement as a career as well as benefit the Police Department and the Village.
Police Cadets will experience practical training, service to the community and service to the police
department in a variety of activities as station and field assignments. Character development,
physical fitness, and good citizenship are integral parts of the program. Police Cadets have no legal
authority or police powers as a result of participating in the Police Department Cadet Program.
PROCEDURE:
CADET PROGRAM ESTABLISHED
1. The Police Department Cadet Program is established through the Police Department.
CADET PROGRAM QUALIFICATIONS
1. Requirements for becoming a Police Cadet are as follows:

Applicants must be between 16 and 18 years old and may remain in the program until their 21st
birthday;
Be a United States citizen;
Have an acceptable average in their scholastic studies and maintain such an average in order to
remain in the program. Agree to enroll in one college level law enforcement course per semester
after graduation from High School;
Have no prior arrest record or serious traffic violations;
Agree to furnish his/her uniform and
Sign a waiver of any right to initiate a legal cause of action against the Village, the Police Department
and/or any of their agents. Parents must also sign the waiver.
CADET SELECTION CRITERIA
1. The following criteria will be used to select Police Cadets from a pool of applicants and once
chosen, a Police Cadet is considered an "at-will" member of the Program:
Procedure #4.703 50
Oral interview;
Background check; and
Willingness to comply with all Police Department and Cadet Program rules, regulations, training and
duty requirements.
CADET PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
1. Cadets are required to perform the following activities:

Attend monthly meetings or training sessions as required by the Cadet Program Manual, and Fulfill
16 hours of "duty time" per month:
Duty time consists of such activities as attending training functions, workshops, assisting Police
Personnel with clerical functions, and attending parades and special functions in a support capacity to
the Patrol Division.
Duty time will be arranged by the Cadet Program Advisor with the approval of the Chief of Police.
3. Any time a Cadet is on duty he shall report directly to the Watch Commander on duty, apprise
the Watch Commander of his assignments for that shift and be under the guidance of that Watch
Commander for that shift.
4. Conduct themselves in a professional, courteous manner at all times.
PROHIBITED ACTIVITIES
1. Police Cadets are prohibited from the following activities:

Working in the police station detention/prisoner processing area unless accompanied by at least one
sworn member of the Department at all times.
Processing prisoners.
Driving marked patrol cars unless authorized to do so, AND ONLY WITH “CADET” MARKINGS
AFFIXED TO THE SQUAD.
Handling bond money.
Handling evidence.
Possessing any type of firearm on their person except during approved, supervised training.
Possessing anything designated as a weapon.
Possessing or carrying handcuffs.
Participating in any covert operations or related activities for the Police Department or any other law
enforcement agency without permission from the Chief of Police.
Procedure #4.703 51
Appearing in public in uniform or representing themselves as Police Cadets without prior approval
from the Cadet Advisor or any other supervisor within the Police Department.
FIELD ASSIGNMENTS
1. During any field assignment of a Police Cadet, the following procedures will apply:
Cadets will be allowed to "ride-along" in police vehicles with designated police personnel with
approval of the watch commander.
Cadets will not be allowed to ride-along between the hours of 2300-0700.
The Police Cadet will be under the direct supervision of the Officer to which he is assigned and will
not be allowed to perform any functions unless authorized by that Officer.
The Police Cadet will remain in the police vehicle on all assignments unless otherwise directed by the
Officer in control of the vehicle.
The Police Cadet will remain an observer at all times and will only operate the police vehicle when
authorized by the Officer in charge of the vehicle.
The Police Cadet will not operate the police radio unless authorized to do so or unless the
circumstances warrant the immediate use of the police radio (i.e., Officer in need of assistance, etc.).
The Police Cadet will not take an active part in any field activities while on a ride-along and will not
answer any questions pertaining to law enforcement activities that are posed by the general public.
Such questions will be referred to a sworn police officer.
In the event an emergency arises during a field assignment, the Police Cadet will remain as
uninvolved as possible and will remove himself from the immediate area of the situation without
delay. At no time will the Cadet attempt to intervene in an emergency unless directly told to do so by
a sworn police officer as authorized under State law.
UNIFORMS
1. Police Cadet uniforms will be distinct from sworn Police Officer uniforms. These uniforms will
conform to the standards set forth in the Police Cadet Manual.
Procedure #4.703 52
Title: COMMUNITY SERVICE OFFICER Procedure: 4.034
Date Issued: August 20, 2010
Review Date: August 20, 2014

PURPOSE:
The purpose of this order is to establish the Community Service Officer Program and provide
guidelines and direction for all
employees with responsibilities as indicated within this directive.
16.4.1. POLICY STATEMENT
The Community Service Officer (C.S.O.) program is designed to assist the Patrol Division in
performing all the tasks which are necessary and service oriented by nature. This assistance will
afford relief to the Patrol Division in order that the beat officers can better provide the police services
and functions for the Village of Palos Park.
The Community Service Officer (C.S.O.) is a civilian position and they will not have the authority to
carry weapons or have the power of arrest.
The Community Service Officer (C.S.O.) shall be under the command of the Sergeant or Officer n
Charge of the particular shift they are working
The Community Service Officers will obey orders or requests directed to them by any on-duty
supervisor.
16.4.2. COMMUNITY SERVICE OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Specific In addition to the general and individual responsibilities of all members and employees,
the C.S.O. is specifically responsible for the following:
1. Reporting for Duty: The C.S.O. shall report promptly before the designated hour and place in
proper uniform for assignment. The C.S.O. shall listen attentively to orders and instructions of the
superior officer and read such materials as are made available to them.
2. Inspect the assigned police vehicle or any other assigned equipment and report new or unreported
damage prior to leaving the police headquarters. Any such discrepancies shall be noted and/or
reported to the Shift Commander.
3. Complete assigned reports for incidents accurately and on the proper report forms.
B. General
The Community Service Officer (C.S.O.) shall be responsible for any assignment given by the Chief
of Police, C.S.O. Supervisor or Shift Commander or his designee and shall include, but not be limited
to, the following:
Procedure #4.703 53
1. Traffic Control
a. The issuance of parking citations or warning notices for violations of parking or local vehicle
registration ordinances.
b. Vehicle and pedestrian traffic control as authorized by the Shift Commander or designee.
c. Motorist assists, including:
1. Disabled vehicles.
2. Vehicle lock-outs.
d. Traffic and neighborhood surveys.
2. Enforcement of Ordinance Violations
a. Animal control, to include capture of loose running animals, setting of animal traps and transfer of
animals to Animal
Welfare.
3. Intra-department Support Services:
a. Desk assignment - maintain working knowledge of desk duties.
b. Collect Metra parking lot collections.
c. Deliveries of legal notices and inter-departmental mail.
d. Assist court officer when assigned.
4. School Crossing Guards (relief - assist)
5. Vehicle Maintenance (support)
LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY
A. A Community Service Officer will not be assigned any calls involving the investigation of a criminal
matter. They will immediately call for a sworn officer to take over any assignment they are handling if
circumstances indicate a sworn officer is needed. They will observe any actions and report same to
the officer whose assistance is called.
B. A C.S.O. shall not be assigned to or become involved in any assignment or investigation which
requires the use of any force.
C. A C.S.O. shall obey all traffic laws and shall not drive with emergency equipment in operation.
D. A C.S.O. shall not respond to crime-in-progress.
. COMMUNITY SERVICEOFFICER UNIFORMS
Nothing shall be worn on the C.S.O. uniform unless it is approved through this directive.
A. Pants
1. The uniform pants shall be plain black in color.
B. Shirts
1. The winter shirt shall be long sleeve, black in color.. The uniform tie will be worn whenever the long
sleeve shirt is worn.
2. The summer shirts shall be same as the winter shirts but shall have short sleeves. The uniform tie
is not to be worn with the short sleeve shirt.
3. CSO rockers are worn on the shirts.
C. Jackets
1. Jacket shall be button down in the center of the pocket flap. Jacket shall be black in color with
silver buttons.
Procedure #4.703 54
2. Winter jacket shall be black in color. Jacket shall be waist length with zipper front that is covered
by a flap that has four buttons down the front from collar.
3. CSO rockers are worn on the jackets.
Socks shall be navy blue.
Pants belt.
Pants belt shall be black leather.
Boots or Overshoes
Boots or overshoes shall be black in color.
Scarves may be worn during the winter months and must be solid navy blue in color.
Any leather accessories worn on the belt shall be plain black.

P. Badge
1. Five point silver badge will be worn on the uniform jacket or on the shirt when the jacket is not
worn.
2. Name Plate
3. Name plates, silver in color, shall be worn on all uniform shirts and jackets.
16.4.5. PROCEDURE FOR SELECTION
The selection process for Community Service Officers (C.S.O.) is as follows:
A. Complete employment application.

B. Chief of Police must approve hiring.
C. Orientation .
D. Oral interview.
E. Background investigation, signing of release forms.
F. Pre-employment physical examination.
G. Any C.S.O. applicant that is deemed by the Chief of Police to be lacking prior significant
employment experience must be enrolled in a college law enforcement program while employed by
the Palos Park Police Department. (Exception: during college summer session).
H. C.S.O. will not work over 32 hours per week, unless approved by the Chief of Police.
Procedure #4.703 55
Title: DOMESTIC VIOLENCE Procedure: 4.035
Revised:
PURPOSE:
To provide guidelines for officers responding to incidents of domestic violence.
To inform officers of their requirements under the Domestic Violence Act.
To establish guidelines, responsibilities and procedures for domestic violence intervention.
POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Police Department to view domestic violence as a serious crime.
Therefore, this department shall take a proactive response to safeguard victim’s rights, provide victim
assistance and use arrest as a deterrent to future violence. Officers shall familiarize themselves with
the Domestic Violence Laws.
DEFINITIONS:
“Domestic violence” means physical abuse, harassment, or intimidation of a dependent,

interference with personal liberty or willful deprivation but does not include reasonable direction of a
minor child by a parent or person in loco parentis.
“Family or household members” include spouses, former spouses, parents, children, stepchildren
and other persons related by blood or by present or prior marriage, persons who share or formerly
shared a common dwelling, persons who have or allegedly have a child in common, persons who
share or allegedly share a blood relationship through a child, persons who have or have had a dating
or engagement relationship, and persons with disabilities and their personal assistants.
PROCEDURES:
TELECOMMUNICATOR RESPONSIBILITY
1. Two officers shall be dispatched on all domestic disturbance calls.
Because the Telecommunicator is likely to be the first to receive the call, they are the key in
determining the type of response. To assist the responding officers, the Telecommunicator shall
determine the following information, if possible:
The name of the complainant;
If the incident is in progress;
If there is a weapon involved, or

Procedure #4.703 56
If there are any weapons in the house
If anyone has been injured and needs medical attention;
A description of the offender, his name, his location, direction and mode of travel;
If any drugs or alcohol are involved;
If there have been prior incidents;
If there are any minors in the house; and
Check the domestic card file for any cautions.
The Telecommunicator will maintain telephone contact until the officers arrive to monitor the incident
and provide support to the victim. Background noises may help to evaluate the situation and provide
further information to the responding officers.
OFFICER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
1. Priority of response to domestic violence calls shall be no less than if the incident involved
strangers.
2. Upon arrival, officers should verbally identify themselves as police officers and give an
explanation for their presence.
3. Officers may enter and conduct a search of the residence if consent has been given to do so.
Although a consent search eliminates the need for a search warrant and probable cause, such
consent must be freely and voluntarily given. If two people have joint ownership of a place or thing,
either one may give a valid consent. However, if one of them exercises sole control over part of the
premises, the other cannot give valid consent to search that part.
4. When entry to a residence is refused, officers shall be persistent, explaining that a complaint
was received and must be investigated. If entry is still denied, request the telecommunicator to call
the residence and establish contact with the victim. If entry is still refused, officers shall request the
presence of the Watch Commander.
5. There may be times when sufficient probable cause exists to indicate that a crime is being
committed, has been committed or that a life is in danger. In these cases, if entry has been refused,
or there is no reply from the premises, forced entry may be necessary. Officers shall evaluate the
following elements when considering a forced, warrantless entry:
The degree of urgency involved and the time required to secure a warrant:
The possibility of dangers to others, including police officers;
Whether the offense involves violence:
Whether the officers reasonably believe that persons may be armed.

Procedure #4.703 57
6. Upon investigation of a domestic violence incident, the officer shall evaluate the
circumstances surrounding the incident and determine if probable cause exists to make an arrest.
7. Officers will make an arrest if the officer has probable cause to believe that the person has
committed or is committing any crime. Arrest is the preferred response to family violence because
arrest offers the greatest potential for ending the violence. Refusal of the victim to sign an official
complaint against the offender shall not prevent, nor shall it be a consideration, in an officer’s
decision to arrest.
8. Under no circumstances will an officer of this department use the threat to arrest all parties
involved for the purpose of discouraging the victim from signing a complaint.
9. When a domestic violence crime has occurred, ONLY with extenuating circumstances and the
Watch Commander’s approval will an arrest not be made. In that instance, a written police
report will be made articulating the specific reasons why an arrest was not made.
10. Bonding of offenders arrested for a domestic violence related incident will be in accordance
with the rules of the Presiding Judge.
11. Any officer assigned to investigate an allegation of domestic violence, neglect, or exploitation
incident between family or household members will make a written police report of any bona fide
allegation and the disposition of such investigation even if an arrest is not made. The report will
include the victim’s statements as to the frequency and severity of prior incidents of domestic
violence, neglect, or exploitation by the same family or household member, and the number of prior
calls for police assistance to prevent such further domestic violence, neglect, or exploitation.
12. If the allegation is not bona fide, Citizen Contact cards will be completed.
13. In all cases domestic violence the victim will be issued a victim information notice and a
Domestic Violence Act form.
VICTIM ASSISTANCE
1. Officers will offer victims immediate and adequate information (the Domestic Violence Act
form) written in a language appropriate for the victim, which shall include a summary of the
procedures and relief available to victims of domestic violence.
2. If the victim requests assistance in leaving the premises, the officer will stand by for a
reasonable amount of time to allow the victim to gather some necessary personal belongings and
possessions.
3 Officers will provide the victim with a referral to the Family Shelter.
4. Officers will advise the victim about seeking medical attention and preserving evidence
(specifically including photographs of injury or damage and damaged clothing or other property).
5. Officers will provide or arrange for transportation of the victim and, at the victim’s request, any
minors or dependents in the victim’s care, to a medical facility for treatment of injuries or to a nearby
place of shelter or safety.
Procedure #4.703 58
ORDERS OF PROTECTION
1. An Order of Protection is a court order available to family or household members prohibiting
the abuser from certain activities or ordering the abuser to take certain actions.
2. The officer should ask the victim if an Order of Protection has been issued.
3. The officer should verify the existence of a valid Order of Protection, and its provisions by
referring to the victim’s copy.
4. Officers should closely read the Order of Protection for restrictions.
5. Offenders will be arrested for any violation of a valid Order of Protection

6. An Order of Protection can only be issued, extended, modified or revoked by a Judge. The
victims cannot “change their minds” and allow a violation of the order of protection.
OUT OF STATE ORDERS OF PROTECTION
1. Out of state Orders of Protection are not enforceable in the State.
LIMITED LAW ENFORCEMENT LIABILITY
1. Any act of omission or commission by any law enforcement officer acting in good faith in
rendering emergency assistance or otherwise enforcing the Domestic Violence Act shall not impose
civil liability upon the law enforcement officer or his or her supervisor or employer, unless the act is a
result of willful or wanton misconduct.
Procedure #4.703 59
Title: CRIMINAL INVESTIGATIONS Procedure: 4.200
POLICY:
To outline the administrative and operational guidelines for efficient and effective criminal
investigations.
To outline the administrative and operational guidelines of the Criminal Investigations Unit.
To establish a component within the police department to conduct follow-up investigations.
PURPOSE:
The function of the Criminal Investigations Unit is to supplement the efforts of the Patrol division by
ensuring those follow-up investigations of criminal offenses are conducted by trained detectives. The
Detective's responsibility begins when the Patrol Officer has reached a point in the preliminary
investigation when he can no longer continue because of time; area, workload or specialized skills
are needed. The Department's responsibility is to ensure that criminal offenses are thoroughly
investigated and that the offenders are promptly and efficiently brought to justice.
PROCEDURE:
1. The Criminal Investigations Unit is a component of the Support Services Division.
The Criminal Investigations Unit Is under the command of the Lieutenant of Police who is responsible
for the direct supervision of all detectives and their activities, as well as for their conduct and
efficiency, and to insure that all rules, regulations, policies and procedures are carried out by
detectives and that the operation of the Unit conforms to the highest ethical standards.
3. The supervisor shall ensure that all cases meeting the criteria for follow-up investigation are
effectively and aggressively investigated in a manner that will facilitate the apprehension and
prosecution of criminal offenders and/or clearance of reported crime.
4. The supervisor shall assign reports to the detective for follow-up.
5. The supervisor will review and approve all supplementary reports submitted by the detective.
6. The supervisor will ensure that all reports submitted are of the highest quality and correctly
reflect the proper direction of the investigation.
Procedure #4.703 60
7. Determine work schedules and ensure that an on-call schedule for the detective is
maintained. A copy shall be given to all supervisors.
8. Ensure that the Chief of Police, through the chain of command is informed concerning all major
investigations.
9. Submit monthly reports, to the Lieutenant of Police indicating the number of cases assigned,
and their status.
10. Cooperate with all other supervisors to ensure unity of Department goals, and achievement of
organizational objectives.
11. Insure that crime analysis, trends and general criminal information is disseminated to Patrol in
a timely manner.
12. Insure that investigation logs, records, and files are maintained and updated.
13. Insure the maintenance and security of juvenile records.
Annually evaluate all investigative personnel.
DETECTIVE RESPONSIBILITY
1. A detective holds the rank of patrolman and is assigned to the Criminal Investigations Unit by
the Chief of Police.
2. Each of the following duties, responsibilities and tasks are performed on an ongoing basis:
Conduct follow-up investigations on each assigned case, until there is an approved disposition.
Investigate delinquent and status offenses committed by juveniles.
Inform the supervisor of all progress in cases assigned by promptly submitting detailed
supplementary reports.
Develop intelligence information regarding criminal activity and identification, and forward such
information to the Patrol Division by regularly attending roll call.
Develop confidential sources of information to further investigative effectiveness.

Maintain a cooperative liaison with law enforcement agencies at the local, state, and federal levels,
sharing information and cooperating in investigations whenever appropriate.
Assist and cooperate with other Department members in the investigation of offenses, toward the
objectives of apprehension and prosecution of criminals and the recovery of property.
Assist State evidence technicians in the collection of physical evidence on major cases, ensuring
proper preservation and chain of custody.
Prepare cases for court, testifying at each stage of the trial process and cooperate with the
prosecutor whenever requested.
Procedure #4.703 61
Use a major case check list whenever assigned to a major or critical investigation.
Insure civil treatment and the protection of constitutional rights of all persons coming within the scope
of the investigation.
Submit daily and monthly activity reports on case assignments.
3. The Chief of Police may assign patrol officers temporarily, to the Criminal Investigations Unit to
benefit the Department in the following ways:
Strengthen the investigation process;
Improve criminal investigation reporting;
Improve and provide more complete preliminary investigations;
Create a pool of patrol officers with investigation experience; and
Enhance career development for the individual officer.
CASE SCREENING
1. All reports shall be forwarded to the supervisor of the Criminal Investigation unit for review and
assignment.
2. Utilizing the solvability factors, the Criminal Investigation Supervisor shall determine which
offenses, shall be investigated.
3. The supervisor of the Criminal Investigations Unit shall also consider the type of crime,
seriousness, frequency, impact on the community, research conducted by the Department and from
other agencies, and documented experiences of the Department or from other agencies, when
screening cases for follow-up.
4. All cases assigned to the Criminal Investigations Unit shall be given a due date. Investigative
supplements shall be returned with the proper Uniform Reporting code indicating the case status.
5. All case extensions must be approved by the Criminal Investigation Unit supervisor.
CASE ASSIGNMENT
1. The supervisor of the Criminal Investigations Unit will assign cases to unit personnel.
2. Cases requiring specialized skill, knowledge, and ability should be assigned to personnel
having those credentials.
3. All cases assigned shall be logged in the case assignment book.
4. The detective assigned a case for follow-up will become the primary detective and is
responsible for the conduct and results of the investigation.
Procedure #4.703 62
5. All supplementary reports, including records of statements, results of examinations of
physical evidence, case report status and all other reports, shall be forwarded to the supervisor for
review and approval.
6. In all major cases, i.e., murder, major sex offenses, arson, major burglary, drug cases, etc., or
any case where there are extensive files involved, a major case folder will be constructed and
maintained by the assigned detective.
7. The supervisor of the Criminal Investigations Unit can authorize the suspension of an assigned
case. The determination to suspend shall be based upon the following:
All leads have been exhausted;
Unavailability of Department resources;
Seriousness of crime; and
Impact on the community.
8. All major cases suspended shall periodically be reviewed to determine if any new techniques,
information or evidence has surfaced which would result in a reassignment.
9. In all cases where the investigation is suspended, or administratively closed, the

victim/complainant will be notified and advised of the change. This notification shall be documented
in the supplemental report.
FOLLOW-UP INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES
1. After preliminary investigation and the determination that an investigation follow-up is required,
the case will be assigned to the detective. The assigned detective is accountable for conducting the
follow-up investigation. All folllow-up investigations should practice acceptable methods of developing
information through witnesses, victims, informants and other sources of available information. The
following should be considered when conducting an investigation:
Information Development -- use department record systems, contact outside agencies and
LEADS/NCIC computer system for background, supportive and historical data.
Interview/Interrogations -- valuable information is obtained by interviewing victims, witnesses and

officer that were at the scene. Interrogations of suspects and offenders will provide information on
involvement, intent and knowledge of the crime.
Physical Evidence -- the collection and preservation of evidence is often critical in the prosecution of
many cases. Every effort should be made to use the best available techniques for gathering
evidence. The rules of evidence, proper packaging and chain of custody must be thoroughly
understood and applied.
Surveillance -- observations of suspects, offenders and fixed locations are helpful in documenting
activities. Surveillance often detects criminal behavior and provides a basis for obtaining a search
warrant.
2. When a case is received by a detective he shall notify the victim or complainant, and other
principals involved.
Procedure #4.703 63
3. The detective should discuss the merits of the case, outline the basic course of the
investigation and stress the importance of the victim’s cooperation in any prosecution. The detective
shall notify the victim any time there is a change in the status of their case.
4. Follow-up investigation supplementary reports will be submitted within 10 days of assignment.
5. The following steps shall be considered by officers when conducting a follow-up investigation:
Review and analyze all reports from the preliminary phase,
Conduct additional interviews and interrogations,
Review Department records,
Seek additional information (uniform officers, informants),
Review results from laboratory examinations,
Arrange for dissemination of information as appropriate,
Plan, organize and conduct searches,
Prepare cases for court presentations,
Assist in prosecution,
Identify and apprehend suspects,
Collect physical evidence,
Determine involvement of suspects in other crimes, and
Check suspects criminal histories.
6. The following steps shall be considered by officers when conducting a preliminary investigation
for a homicide or major case:
Upon arrival, enter the scene by the route least likely to disturb evidence, noting your route of travel.
Check the victim for signs of life.
Summon medical assistance if necessary.
Be aware of dying declarations. Ask the victim if they know who did this to them, if they can give a
description and if they know that they may die.
If the victim is unconscious and being transported to a hospital an officer will remain with the victim at
all times for the purpose of a dying declaration
If the victim must be removed from the scene and if possible, photograph the victim’s position before
removal. If not possible, note and sketch the victim’s position.
Procedure #4.703 64
Accompany the victim to the hospital to collect and mark items of evidence. If doctors and nurses are
involved in the evidence recovery process, note the time recovered and identity of that person.
If the victim remains on the scene, secure the scene.
Prevent anyone from touching the body or disturbing anything, pending the arrival of the
investigators, evidence technicians or the medical examiner.
Detain and identify witnesses.
Prevent the destruction of fragile evidence such as footprints, tire tracks, etc.
7. Investigation personnel may, on occasion, request that a polygraph examination be conducted

to aid an investigation. All such requests must be approved by the Criminal Investigations
Supervisor.
8. Any detective who has received approval to use a polygraph examination shall only use the
services of the State.
9. All constitutional rights, guaranteed suspects of crimes, shall be strictly adhered to by all sworn
personnel. Sworn personnel of the department SHALL NOT:
Use coercion for confessions or admissions;
Unnecessarily delay a suspects arraignment;
Fail to inform a suspect of his rights;
Deprive a suspect of counsel;
Release pretrial publicity tending to prejudice a fair trial.
BACKGROUND INVESTIGATIONS
1. The Criminal Investigations Unit shall be responsible for conducting background investigations.
Background investigations may be necessary to aid criminal investigations or identify organized crime
figures.
2. Pre-employment and liquor license background investigations shall be conducted by an

investigator.
3. The following sources of information will aid the detective during the background investigation:
F.B.I.
State Police
Secretary of State
Credit Checks
I.R.S.
Utility Companies
Banks
Procedure #4.703 65
State Welfare Agencies
Local Law Enforcement Agencies
Military Criminal Investigations Educational Institutions
Associates -- neighbors, family, acquaintances
Employers
Social Security Number verification
4. Information obtained in a background investigation will be controlled through the Criminal

Investigations Unit. Files will be separated from other police and investigation records, and shall not
be distributed without the approval of the Chief of Police.
5. All information obtained as a result of a criminal background investigation shall be periodically

updated and purged as circumstances dictate, and in accordance with State and Federal Law.
MAINTENANCE OF CASE FILES
1. Detectives will maintain a file on cases assigned for follow-up investigation. A typical case file
may include reports and support documents.
2. Case assignment information will be logged in the master logbook maintained by the CIU
supervisor.
3. Detectives will be responsible for maintaining all copies of pertinent reports and documents in
their case file. When an original document relating to the case comes into the custody of the
detective he will make a copy for his file and forward the original to the Records unit for inclusion into
the master file.
4. Only active cases will be kept by the detective and once the investigation is complete the case
will be turned over to the supervisor for review.
5. Access to investigation case files will be on a need to know basis, with permission of the
assigned detective or Investigations supervisor.
6. Case files will be purged according to the Illinois Records Act.
INVESTIGATION OPERATION FUNDS
1. The Department maintains a special fund to support operations by the investigative personnel.
The Investigations Unit supervisor is responsible for the security, maintenance, records and
accountability of this fund. Only the Investigations supervisor and the Chief of Police are authorized
access to the fund.
2. Funds may be used for purchasing contraband as evidence, expenses for surveillance
activities, and other related investigation assignments.
3. Fiscal and procedural management of this fund will include the following:
Authorization of the CIU supervisor as responsible for the fund, including acceptance of money into
the fund account and disbursement of funds;
Maintaining the fund in a secured location;

Procedure #4.703 66
Submission of requests for funds prior to use;
Maintaining a ledger that identifies the date, amount and purpose of the expenditure;
Quarterly audit of expenditures to the Chief of Police; and,
Annual financial statement of the fund.
4. The Chief of Police must give prior approval for all expenditures from the fund. If there is an
emergency, and the Chief of Police cannot be reached, the Investigation unit supervisor may
authorize the expenditure. However, the supervisor will, as soon as possible, inform the Chief of
Police of the expenditure. When the Chief of Police is out of town the supervisor will contact his
designee for approval.
5. The Chief of Police will annually request a financial statement of the Investigation Operation
Funds. This statement will detail all transactions of the fund.
6. The Chief of Police, or his designee, will conduct periodic audits of the Investigation
Operations Fund. These audits will check to ensure that funds are properly detailed, that the funds
are maintained in a secure location, records of all transactions are documented, and funds have been
disbursed for approved activities.
INVESTIGATION TASK FORCES
1. When members of this department take part in an investigation task force, the following
concerns will be addressed:
The purpose is identified;
Responsibilities and authority are defined;
Accountability is established;
Available resources will be identified; and
Results of the task force and their continued necessity will be evaluated.
The department is a member of the Southwest Major Case Unit, and the South Suburban Major
Crimes Task Force. These units are available to assist our department with additional manpower and
equipment for follow up investigations and investigation of major criminal events.
Procedure #4.703 67
Palos Park Police Department Policy
INTERVIEWS AND INTERROGATIONS
Purpose:
The purpose of this policy is to provide standards and general guidelines for law enforcement
interviews and interrogations that are accurate, credible and professionally accomplished.
Policy:
A. It is the policy of the Palos Park Police Department that, the conduct of police interviews and
interrogations should be fair, competent, and totally objective. It is extremely important that this
practice should also be perceived as non-coercive and unbiased by the courts and the general public.
B. It is the policy of Palos Park Police Department that that, interviews and interrogations comply with
all constitutional requirements, applicable state and local laws and strictly adhere to agency
investigative procedures.
C. It is the policy of Palos Park Police Department that to accurately and completely record or
otherwise document the conditions, content, and conclusions of any interview or interrogations.
This agency acknowledges the advantages of electronic recording whenever investigative and
environmental conditions allow.
Procedure: 4-200 (A)
Definitions:
A. Interview: A purposeful and non-accusatory conversation with a victim, a complainant, a witness,

or even a possible criminal suspect. The atmosphere is non-custodial and the interviewee should feel
that he/she is free to end or terminate the interview and leave at any time.
B. Interrogation: During an interrogation, the person being questioned by the police is not free to
leave, and police questioning or conduct is specifically designed to elicit incriminating responses
implicating the person in criminal activity. All custodial interrogations shall be preceded by issuance of
the Miranda warning.
C. Electronic Recording: The practice of audio recording and/or videotaping an interview or
interrogation shall be within the framework of Illinois law to audio-tape any conversation without the
consent of all parties.
D. Custody: A suspect is considered to be in custody if, under similar circumstances, a reasonable
person in the suspect’s position would feel that his/her liberty to move about freely or leave was being
restrained in any way.
IV. Guiding Principles - Interviews:
A. Interviews are critical components of a police investigation. Most police interviews are conducted
with victims, complainants and witnesses to a criminal act. Interviews may be conducted in the field,
in police facilities, in vehicles, or in any other convenient location.
B. Officers should give clear notification, followed by acknowledgment by the person
being interviewed that the questioning is non-custodial and that the person being questioned is free to
discontinue and leave at any time.
C. A fact-finding interview of a possible criminal suspect is not an interrogation. Thus the Miranda
warnings are not required.
Procedure #4.703 68
D. If, at any time during an interview, a person’s responses incriminate, or tend to incriminate
him/her in the commission of a crime, the questioning officer shall give the Miranda warnings before
continuing the interrogation, regardless of whether the person has been arrested. The warnings
indicate that the person is now a suspect and that he/she is not at liberty to leave.
E. Whenever possible and practical, officers should prepare a typed (or written) statement of an
interview and have it reviewed, acknowledged as accurate and signed by the interviewee.
F. While electronic recording may be appropriate for interrogation of criminal suspects, non-custodial
interviews of crime victims, witnesses and associated individuals may also be electronically recorded.
G. Any interview that is electronically recorded must have the express consent of all parties. Persons
being interviewed should sign a consent form.
V. Guiding Principles – Interrogations:
A. Custodial interrogations of criminal suspects shall always be preceded by Miranda warnings, using
the agency pre-printed form. If at any stage of the custodial questioning, the suspect indicates that
s/he wants to stop talking or to consult with an attorney before continuing, the questioning shall stop.
B. Interrogations should be pre-planned and investigating officers should have a clear understanding
of the issues to be covered. This ordinarily includes an understanding of the evidence available,
victim/witness accounts, offense elements, possible alibis and defenses, and applicable laws.
C. Interrogations should, whenever possible, be conducted by two officers. Prior to the interrogation
each officer should have a clear understanding of the respective roles each will perform.
D. If a confession to a criminal act is obtained, officers should prepare a written statement to that
effect and endeavor to have it reviewed, acknowledged as accurate, and signed by the suspect.
E. Where practical and when available, consideration should be given to recording the entire
interrogation on videotape. This consideration should be given regardless of whether the interrogation
is conducted in the field or in a police facility.
F. If the interrogation is to be electronically recorded, the suspect should first sign a consent form.
Covert or surreptitious electronic audio recordings of interviews and interrogations are prohibited by
Illinois law.
G. Under no circumstances are interrogating officers allowed to utilize physical force or any physically
inhumane or abusive coercion against a suspect to make him or her provide incriminating information.
The use of physical force or employment of torture techniques or psychological coercion during an
interrogation is unconstitutional.
H. Officers have no authority to offer promises of leniency or special consideration as inducements for
admissions or cooperation. This subtle form of coercion is prohibited.
I. Information developed through interrogations and/or confessions should be corroborated to the
fullest extent possible by information and evidence available through other investigative means.
J. If there is more than one suspect, any incriminating statements or information supplied by one
suspect against another must be independently substantiated.
VI. Special Cases – Juveniles:

A. Juveniles have the same Miranda rights as adults. A juvenile suspect may waive Miranda and
make a voluntary statement during a custodial interrogation, but whether the statement is voluntary
depends on factors such as: age; experience; education; background; intelligence; capacity to
understand his or her rights and the consequences of waiving them; and presence of a parent during
the interrogation.
B. The practice of the Palos Park Police Department is that the juveniles parents should be contacted
and aware of any interrogation for parental guidance, to have the capacity to understand the
significance of his Miranda rights and the consequences of waiving them.
Procedure #4.703 69
C. Interrogation of juveniles should be limited to a reasonable time-duration with opportunities for
periodic rest breaks. The number of officers participating in the interrogation of a juvenile should be
limited.
Procedure #4.703 70
Title: INVESTIGATOR CALL OUT Procedure: 4.201
PURPOSE:
To provide for 24-hour availability of a criminal investigator to conduct follow-up investigations when a
serious crime has occurred.
POLICY:
It shall be the policy of this department to Insure that a member of the Criminal Investigations Unit is
notified when a serious crime has occurred and the investigator will be on call at all times.
PROCEDURE:
1. The types of incidents in which an investigator will be notified are as follows:
Homicide
Suicide
Questionable death
Armed robbery
Sex offenses
Child abuse
Burglary
Arson
Bombings
Aggravated battery
Any incident that the watch commander determines needs the immediate attention of an investigator.
2. The watch commander will review all pertinent information surrounding the incident to
determine if an off-duty investigator should be notified.
3. If an immediate follow-up investigation is required, the watch commander will authorize the
investigator call out.
4. Communications Center personnel will contact the investigator. The watch commander may
contact the investigator or have a telecommunicator make notification.
When the on call investigator is contacted, he should be advised of the type of incident, location and
any special equipment needed.
6. If the investigator cannot be contacted, the Criminal Investigations Unit Supervisor should be
contacted immediately.
7. If the watch commander determines that the incident is of major consequence, the chief of
Police and the Criminal Investigations Unit Supervisor will be contacted.
Procedure #4.703 71
Title: JUVENILE CONTACT PROCEDURE Procedure: 4.202
PURPOSE:
To outline methods of handling contacts with juveniles.
To respect family autonomy and minimize coercive state intervention, officers dealing with juveniles
are encouraged to use the least coercive among reasonable alternatives, consistent with preserving
public safety, order and individual liberty.
POLICY:
The police role in juvenile justice should be responsive to community needs. Department members
should function in both an enforcement and prevention capacity, emphasizing neither role at the
expense of the other. The highest priority is the best interest of the youth providing however that the
safety of the community is not endangered. Police contacts with young people require the exercise of
tact, understanding, and adherence with legal principles.
DEFINITIONS:
ABUSED MINOR: Any minor under 18 years of age whose parents or immediate family member, or
any person responsible for the minor’s welfare, or any person who is in the same family or household
as a minor, or any individual residing in the same home as the minor, or a paramour of the minor’s
parent:
Inflicts, causes to be inflicted, or allows to be inflicted upon such minor physical injury, by other than
accidental means, which causes death, disfigurement, impairment of physical or emotional health, or
loss or impairment of any bodily functions;
Creates a substantial risk of physical injury to such minor by other than accidental means which
would be likely to cause death, disfigurement, impairment of emotional health, or loss or impairment
of any bodily function.
Commits or allows to be committed any sex offense against such minor, as such sex offenses are
defined in State law, and extending those definitions of sex offenses to include minors under 18 years
of age.
Commits or allows to be committed an act or acts of torture upon such minor.
Inflicts excessive corporal punishment.
Whose environment is injurious to his/her welfare.
ADULT: A person 21 years of age or older.

Procedure #4.703 72
DELINQUENT MINOR: Any minor who prior to his 17th birthday has violated or attempted to
violate, regardless of where the act occurred, any federal or state law or municipal ordinance.
DEPENDENT MINOR: Any minor who is under the age of 18 and:

Is without a parent, guardian or legal custodian;
Is without proper care because of the physical or mental disability of his parent, guardian or
custodian;
Is without proper medical or other remedial care recognized under State law or other care necessary
for his well being through no fault, neglect or lack of concern by his parents, guardian or custodian; or
Has a parent, guardian, or legal custodian who with good cause, wishes to be relieved of all residual
parental rights and responsibilities, guardianship or custody, and who desires the appointment of a
guardian of the person with power to consent to the adoption of the minor.
The taking of a minor into temporary custody under this section is not an arrest, nor does it constitute
a police record.
DETENTION OF MINORS: Except for minors accused of violations of an order of the court, any
minor accused of any act under Federal law, State law or a municipal ordinance that would not be
illegal if committed by an adult, cannot be placed in a jail, municipal lockup, detention center or
secure correctional facility.
MINOR REQUIRING AUTHORITATIVE INTERVENTION: Any minor under 18 years of age who is:
Absent from home without consent of parent, guardian or custodian, or
Beyond the control of his or her parent, guardian or custodian, in circumstances which constitute a
substantial or immediate danger to the minor's physical safety; and who, after being taken into limited
custody for the period provided for and offered interim crisis intervention services refuses to return
home and cannot agree to an arrangement for an alternative voluntary residential placement.
NEGLECTED MINOR: Any minor under 18 years of age who is not receiving the proper or necessary
support, education as required by law, or medical or other remedial care recognized under State law
as necessary for a minor’s well-being, including adequate food, clothing and shelter, or who is
abandoned by his or her parents or other person responsible for the minor’s welfare, except that a
minor shall not be considered neglected for the sole reason that the minor’s parent or other person
responsible for the minor’s welfare has left the minor in the care of an adult relative for any period of
time; or
Any minor under 18 years of age whose environment is injurious to his or her welfare; or
Any newborn infant whose blood or urine contains any amount of a controlled substance.
Any minor under the age of 14 years whose parent or other person responsible for the minor’s
welfare leaves the minor without supervision for an unreasonable period of time without regard for the
mental or physical health, safety, or welfare of that minor.
MINOR: A person under the age of 21 years.
PROCEDURE:
Procedure #4.703 73
DELINQUENT MINOR
1. When involved with juveniles, officers must remember that the same degree of probable cause
is necessary to arrest a juvenile, and the same degree of proof is required to convict a juvenile as is
necessary to arrest and convict an adult.
2. When an officer detains a juvenile on a minor violation, the officer may determine that
immediate processing through a Juvenile officer is not necessary and he may escort the juvenile
home, explaining to the juvenile's parents or guardian the nature of the police contact.
3. The officer will then fill out the necessary offense report and juvenile contact report indicating
whether it appeared that the parents or guardian are responsible people who will take appropriate
action to prevent new violations. All reports will then be processed and reviewed by the Criminal
Investigations Unit to determine if a follow-up is necessary.
4. When taking a juvenile into custody for an alleged criminal act, the juvenile shall be advised of
his constitutional rights, specifically the Miranda warnings, in such a way as to ensure that the
juvenile is able to understand them.
5. Immediately make a reasonable attempt to notify the parent, or other legally responsible
person, that the juvenile has been taken into custody and where he/she is being held.
6. A Juvenile Officer will be notified upon the arrest of a juvenile for any of the following:
Homicide
Criminal sexual assault
Robbery
Aggravated battery
Burglary
Felony theft
Auto theft
Arson
Forgery
Any other felony sex or drug charge
The Juvenile Officer will review State law to determine if the juvenile is eligible for automatic transfer,
should be released or detained.
8. If the Juvenile Officer feels that a juvenile should be confined in a Detention Center, he must
contact the designated court personnel for that jurisdiction. In order for secure detention of a juvenile
to be authorized, the Juvenile Officer must be filing delinquent charges against the minor.
10. Juveniles requiring medical attention should be treated at Cook County Hospital prior to
processing or transporting to the intake center.
Juveniles arrested and taken into custody for serious misdemeanors or felonies will be photographed.
Juveniles arrested and taken into custody for a forcible felony or unlawful use of weapons must be
fingerprinted. Officers will fingerprint the juvenile using both the State and Federal fingerprint card.
The State arrest packet and the FBI card will be forwarded to the Criminal Investigations Unit
supervisor for processing.
Procedure #4.703 74
13. Juveniles should not be handcuffed to a stationary object, placed in a locked room, or placed
in a detention room, locked or unlocked, in the police facility, unless the officer has determined that
the minor should be detained in custody.
14. Whenever it becomes necessary to obtain other forms of identification from a juvenile (e.g.,
hair, blood, urine, handwriting samples, etc.), the rights and procedures mandated for adult offenders
must be observed. Officers must consider the following:
Juveniles cannot always give legal consent for some evidence collection procedures.
A valid court order or warrant must first be obtained if the officer is unable to get voluntary consent
from a parent or guardian.
Consent must be written and maintained in the case file.
If there is doubt or confusion, contact the Prosecutors office for advice before taking action.
15. The collection, dissemination and retention of fingerprints, photographs, and other forms of
identification pertaining to juveniles shall be the responsibility of the Criminal Investigations Unit
supervisor.
16. The detention of juveniles will be handled in the following manner:

No juvenile under 16 will be placed in an adult cell.
Juveniles that have reached their 16th birthday can be placed into the adult lockup, if no adults are in
the lockup facility. If an adult prisoner is in the lockup the juvenile must be placed in the juvenile
detention room.
Juveniles detained shall be separated by sex.
No juvenile will be detained in the lock up facility for more than six (6) hours.
The period of detention will begin once the juvenile is handcuffed to a stationary object, placed in a
locked room, or placed in a detention room, locked or unlocked, in the police facility.
Any juvenile confined will be under constant supervision, and will not be permitted to come into
contact with adults who are in custody.
The minor will be informed of the purpose of detention, the time it is expected to last and that it
cannot exceed six (6) hours.
No juvenile under the age of ten (10) may be detained in the police facility.
If any juvenile is placed into confinement, the proper information will be placed into the juvenile lockup
book.
17. Officers WILL NOT disclose the identity of any juvenile in releasing information to the general
public as to the arrest, investigation, or disposition of any case involving a juvenile. All requests for
information concerning juveniles will go through the Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor.
INTERROGATIONS OF JUVENILES
Procedure #4.703 75
Officers must comply with the following when interrogating juveniles:
The juvenile is informed and understands his Fifth Amendment rights prior to any custodial
interrogation.
Interrogations, with no more than two officers present, should not be unreasonable in length.
The juvenile be allowed to talk with his/her legal attorney.
Officers shall use discretion in allowing the juvenile to confer with his/her parent or guardian. The
type of crime committed and the age and mental state of the juvenile should be considered.
The officer interrogating the juvenile must explain the procedures governing the interrogation
process.
If the juvenile shows signs of duress or fatigue, terminate the interrogation.
MINORS REQUIRING AUTHORITATIVE INTERVENTION
1. Officers may take a minor into limited custody, however such custody is limited to six hours
and does not constitute an arrest. Officers will document the exact time limited custody was taken.
2. A minor under this section (M.R.A.I.) CANNOT be locked up, placed in a jail cell or detention
facility.
3. The officer must inform the minor the reason for the limited custody.
4. Every reasonable effort must be made to inform the minor's parents of the limited custody and
the reason for it.
5. If the minor consents, the police may transport or release the minor to his/her parents and refer
them, if needed, to an appropriate social service agency.
6. If the minor refuses to go with a parent or guardian, the police officer will contact the Youth
Service Bureau responsible and provide the counselor with all pertinent case information. The
counselor has the final decision on what will happen to the minor. If for any reason the officer cannot
contact this service, the officer will call the Department of Children and Family Services.
7. If the minor refuses to allow an officer to take him/her into limited custody the officer must use
discretion, M.R.A.I. acts are not delinquent acts. If the officer feels the minor is in danger of life or
health, or fits into the abuse or neglect act, then the officer may use what force is necessary to take
the minor into custody, remembering at all times that this is for the minor's protection.
ABUSED, DEPENDENT AND NEGLECTED MINORS

1. Officers may, without a warrant, take into temporary custody a minor whom the officer with
reasonable cause believes to be neglected, abused or dependent, as defined, or who has been
adjudged a ward of the court and has escaped from any commitment ordered by the court, or who is
found in any street or public place suffering from any sickness or injury which requires care, medical
treatment or hospitalization.
Procedure #4.703 76
2. Officers taking temporary protective custody shall immediately make every reasonable effort
to notify the person responsible for the child's welfare and inform that person that the minor has been
taken into custody and where the minor is being held.
3. Officers shall immediately notify the Department of Children and Family Services. DCFS will
initiate proceedings for continued temporary custody of the child.
TRAFFIC ARREST
1. Juvenile traffic arrests should be handled in the following manner:
If necessary, a report will be completed.
The juvenile's parents will be notified if the juvenile is taken into custody.
If a cash bond is needed, the officer should allow the youth to make every effort to secure funds. If all
efforts fail and the bond cannot be made, then on the approval of the shift supervisor, an I-Bond will
be issued. The juvenile should not be detained for more than two (2) hours while arranging for bond.
Juveniles awaiting bond for FINE ONLY offenses may be placed in the lobby vestibule.
Juveniles arrested for traffic offenses where jail is a possible penalty may be confined in the juvenile
detention room until bonding or release. The juvenile's parents will be notified if the juvenile is held in
custody.
Procedure #4.703 77
Title: JUVENILE UNIT OPERATIONS Procedure: 4.203
Date Issued: JANUARY 01, 2002
PURPOSE:
To establish the organizational, administrative and operational responsibilities of the juvenile unit.
POLICY:
Recognizing the police role regarding juveniles in the criminal justice system, the Police Department
is committed to the development and perpetuation of programs designed to prevent and control
juvenile delinquency. All personnel shall share the responsibility for the Department's juvenile
operations function and delinquency prevention efforts.
PROCEDURE:
RESPONSIBILITY
1. The Juvenile Unit is a component of the Criminal Investigations Unit and has the primary
responsibility for the investigation of cases involving juvenile offenders and victims.
2. All Juvenile Unit personnel will be trained for the specialized function of handling cases
involving juveniles.
3. The function of the Juvenile Unit includes, but is not limited to, the following:
To assist the Crime Prevention Officer in designing and implementing programs intended to prevent
and control delinquent and criminal behavior by youths;
Follow-up processing of juvenile arrests;
Coordinating and preparing court cases in which a juvenile offender is involved;
Diverting juvenile offenders out of the juvenile justice system;
Participating in community recreational youth programs;
Provide a liaison between the Police Department and all outside agencies and organizations sharing
a mutual interest in juvenile matters;
Seek assistance from these agencies to review and comment on the Department's current policies
and procedures and solicit their advice and recommendations;
Maintain an up to date listing of social service agencies that provide services for area youths; and
Assist patrol personnel when requested or called out on juvenile matters.
JUVENILE RECORDS AND IDENTIFICATION

Procedure #4.703 78
1. Juvenile records are kept in accordance with the provision of the Juvenile Court Act.
Requires separation of juvenile and adult arrest records;
Provides for the confidentiality and accessibility of records; and,
Provides for court ordered expungements of juvenile records.

2. Copies of juvenile records will also be maintained in a separate secure file by the Criminal
Investigations Unit.
3. The supervisor of the unit will designate one Juvenile Officer to collect, disseminate and file
juvenile records, photographs, fingerprints and other forms of identification.
4. Juveniles arrested and taken into custody for serious misdemeanors or felonies will be
photographed.
5. Juveniles arrested and taken into custody for felony offenses will be fingerprinted.
6. The Juvenile Officer shall also classify all juvenile contact cards as "active" or "inactive" based
on the following determinations:
Active -- minor under seventeen years old
Inactive -- persons seventeen years and older
7. The Juvenile Officer shall pull all records from the juvenile file of all persons when they reach
their seventeenth birthday.
8. Inspection and copying of juvenile records maintained by the Police Department which relates
to a minor who has been arrested or taken into custody before his seventeenth birthday is only done
in compliance with the provisions of the Juvenile Court Act and access to all records shall be on a
need to know basis only.
9. It is the responsibility of the designated Juvenile Officer to secure and control access to the
juvenile files.
CASE DISPOSITION AND ALTERNATIVES
1. When a minor juvenile has been taken into custody for a delinquent act, the Juvenile Officer
may take one of the following actions:
Station Adjustment with release of the minor;
Station Adjustment with release to a parent;

Station Adjustment with referral to community services;
Station Adjustment with release to a third party, pursuant to agreement of minor and parents;
If the juvenile and parent or guardian consent in writing, the Juvenile Officer may condition the
release upon the agreement to perform public service work to make restitution for damages.
Procedure #4.703 79
Release the juvenile to his or her parents and referral of the case to the Cook County Juvenile
Court, Screening Unit;
If the Juvenile Officer reasonably believes that there is an urgent and immediate necessity to keep
the minor in custody, the Juvenile Officer shall deliver the minor without unnecessary delay to the
court or to the Cook County Juvenile Detention Center.
Juveniles who are fifteen years of age and older may be tried in Adult Court for the offenses of
murder, aggravated criminal sexual assault, armed robbery with a firearm. When a Juvenile Officer
has a juvenile involved in one of these felonies, the Prosecutor’s Felony Review Section should be
notified.
Any other appropriate action with the consent of the minor and a parent, allowed by law.
2. The factors to be considered in determining whether to release or keep a juvenile in custody

for a delinquent act shall include:
The nature of the allegations against the juvenile;
The juvenile's record, if any;
The juvenile's family and the family's present situation;
The juvenile's education and employment status;
The availability of special resources or community services to rehabilitate the juvenile;
The juvenile's past involvement and progress in social programs;
The attitude of complainant and community toward the juvenile;
The present attitude of the juvenile and family; and
The age and circumstances of the juvenile.
ACTIVITY REPORTS
1. The supervisor of the Criminal Investigations Unit shall submit a monthly report to the Chief of
Police indicating the previous months' activity in youth services. The report shall include the number
of youths contacted during the month and the type of referral by the Juvenile officer. The report
should include:
Juvenile contacts
Station adjustments
Referral to social agencies
Referral to juvenile court

Procedure #4.703 80
Referral to adult court
Community work programs

Procedure #4.703 81
Title: INFORMANTS Procedure: 4.204
PURPOSE:
To provide for the confidentiality and management of informant activity, files and funds.
POLICY:
It is important for law enforcement agencies to recognize that the use of an informant is important to
the satisfactory completion of many investigations. Equally important however is the confidential
nature of informant activity, identity, files and funds. It is therefore the responsibility of this
Department to ensure that rigid controls are maintained when dealing with informants, and that strict
guidelines are used in the control of informant funds.
DEFINITION:
An informant is any individual who, under the direction of an officer, supplies assistance or
information regarding criminal activity, usually, with an expectation of some form of compensation.
The informant is different from other concerned citizens who do not work under the direction of the
officer or become a party to the investigation itself.
PROCEDURE:
ADMINISTRATION
1. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor is responsible for maintaining a master file of
informants. The information in these files will be secured in a locked file cabinet with limited access
to the Chief of Police, Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor and the informant’s contact officer. A
record of all informants used by this Department will be included in this master file. The Criminal
Investigations Unit supervisor is responsible for updating and ensuring that information and
documentation is current and the file is properly maintained.
2. Information in these files will contain the following:

Police Department Confidential Informant Information Record form;
Photograph
Fingerprint card
Criminal history record;
Copy of case reports where the informant provided information or assistance;
Receipts for monies received by the informant;

Procedure #4.703 82
Any correspondence relative to the informant; and
A waiver form signed by the informant.
3. When an officer develops an informant he will be required to provide all the necessary
documentation for the master file. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor will assign a
confidential informant number (C.I. #) to each informant in the master file. This informant control
number will be used in all reports concerning the informant to protect his identity. If necessary an
alias may be assigned by the Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor for later referrals or the signing
of pay receipts.
4. Officers are responsible for forwarding all reports concerning contact with their informants to
the Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor, through their chain of command to initiate a new file or to
update the master file. Maintenance of the file is the responsibility of the Criminal Investigations Unit
supervisor. All information should be properly dated and checked for accuracy and authenticity.
RESTRICTIONS
1. Informants will sometimes offer to exchange information for immunity, leniency, or their
release. These however can only be properly granted by a judge in a judicial proceeding. Neither the
Department nor any member may grant any person immunity, leniency, or their release from custody.
When an officer intends to intercede on behalf of an informant or potential informant in relation to any
legal proceedings, supervisory approval is required. Informants or potential informants will not be
made promises that prosecution will be declined or dismissed, or specific sentences received, but
advised that legal authorities will be advised of their cooperation and asked to consider it in the
pending legal matters in question.
2. Juvenile informants will not be used.
3. Two (2) members of the Department must be present when working with an informant of the
opposite sex.
4. The Department will not sanction or tolerate independent criminal activity on the part of any
informant.
5. Informants will not receive money without first signing a Department receipt.
6. Officer/Informant contacts will be of a strictly professional nature. Social or business contacts

are expressly prohibited.
PRECAUTIONS
1. Contacts with informants should be made by at least two (2) officers when possible and
practical.
2. When a lone officer must make contact with an informant, the officer will notify his supervisor
of the meeting.
3. When meeting an informant, the officer should always select the time and place.
Procedure #4.703 83
4. Officers will, at all times, maintain control of the relationship between the officer and the
informant, and the decisions on how to proceed with the investigation.
5. All contacts with informants will be documented and the report will become part of the master
file. Any information relating to violations of law that would be of interest to other agencies or units of
the Police Department will be investigated and the appropriate notification made.
6. Informants who are to participate in an undercover purchase in which he may come into
contact with Department funds, controlled substances, or anything else of potential evidentiary value
will be thoroughly searched both before and after the undercover encounter, and where possible kept
under continuous observation during the undercover operation. Officers of the same sex as the
informant will only conduct searches.
INFORMANT FUND
1. The Department's budget provides for an informant fund. These funds are strictly for
payments to informants and other investigative expenses.
2. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor is responsible for maintaining and disbursing
funds. The funds will be secured in locked cabinets accessible to only the Criminal Investigations
Unit supervisor, and the Chief of Police.
3. Personnel requesting funds will document their request to their supervisor and describe the
following:
Case number or Confidential Informant number;
Describe the reason for the request;

Total funds needed and their Intended use; and,
Personnel involved in the investigation.
4. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor must approve all requests or the Chief of Police.
The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor is authorized to disburse funds in the case of an
emergency. However, the Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor will contact the Chief of Police as
soon as possible after the emergency.
5. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor will maintain a ledger to record all transactions
from the fund. Whenever money is disbursed the following information will be recorded:
Date of transaction;
Amount of money disbursed;
Name of person signing for receipt of money;
Reason for disbursement;
Confidential informant number, if applicable; and
Balance on hand.
Procedure #4.703 84
6. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor will use the following criteria whenever funds are
paid out to an informant:
A previous history of providing accurate information;
Reliability of the informant;
Type of information provided;
Seriousness of the crime; and,
The probability of an arrest and conviction.
7. Informants must sign a Fund Receivable form whenever money is disbursed from the
informant fund. An alias may be used by the informant if assigned by the Criminal Investigations Unit
supervisor and logged on the master file. The form will then be forwarded to the Criminal
Investigations Unit supervisor to be included in the informant's master file.
8. Any funds expended from the fund and not used will be returned with an explanation for the
return.
The Criminal Investigations Unit Supervisor will submit an annual audit of the informant fund to the
Chief of Police.
CENSURING AN INFORMANT
1. In the event continued use of an informant would prove to be detrimental to the goals of the
Department or to the safety of its officers, or when an informant is found to be otherwise unreliable,
and in the opinion of the officer, should not be used, the relationship between the informant and the
Department will be terminated.
2. The officer will submit a report indicating the reasons why the informant should no longer be
utilized.
3. Upon receipt of this report the Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor will write the word
"Censure" on the cover of the informants master file and date and initial it.
4. The officer directly involved with the informant has the responsibility to notify any other officers,
units or agencies that the informant is no longer reliable.
Procedure #4.703 85
Title: “A Child is Missing” Program Procedure: 4.205
Date Issued: June 18, 2011
POLICY
It shall be the policy of the Palos Park Police Department to be a participant in the “A CHILD IS
MISSING” program, which allows officers to utilize a missing person alert system to assist in locating
vulnerable or at risk individuals.
This alert system is operated by a nationwide non-profit organization called “A CHILD IS MISSING”.
The organization’s alert system utilizes sophisticated computer mapping systems and trained
technicians to place 1,000 phone calls per minute to residents and businesses in the area where
someone has gone missing.
Nothing in this program circumvents the Reverse 911 System already in place, it is simply another
tool for your tool box. Attached is the protocol and policy for the A child is Missing Program.
Residents can Sign up to enter your cell phone, unlisted, broad=band/voice-over IP or TDD/TTY
device number. Click on “add your name” to enter your name, number, and address. This information
will only be used for emergency message alerts.
Police officers responsibilities are defined, gather complete information pertinent to the case, call the
toll free number and the database initiates an automated phone call to residents and businesses
around the area the person was last seen.
A Child Is Missing Alert System Protocol and policy
It shall be the policy of the Palos Park Police Department to participate in the A CHILD IS MISSING
PROGRAM, which allows officers to utilize a missing person alert system to assist in locating
vulnerable or at risk individuals.
Purpose
This alert system is operated by a nationwide non-profit organization called A CHILD IS MISSING.
The organization’s alert system utilizes sophisticated computer mapping systems and trained
technicians to place 1,000 phone calls per minute to residents and businesses in the area where
someone has gone missing.
The A CHILD IS MISSING alert system can be used to help locate missing children, missing elderly
9often suffering from Alzheimer’s), college students on campus and missing persons who are
mentally or physically challenged. This alert system is highly localized and can be used when an
AMBER Alert is not warranted.
Procedure #4.703 86
It is incumbent and vital that we as an organization are able to get as many land lines and cell
phone numbers registered with this organization as possible.
The numbers will be utilized for the alert system exclusively and will not be sold or given to any other
organization. The Palos Park Police Department requests your participation in this free and innovative
tool to help keep at risk members of our community safer.
Process
Telephone numbers that are called by this program include listed numbers in the selected area, but
do not include cell phone numbers, unlisted numbers, broadband/voice-over IP numbers, or TDD/TTY
devices. These numbers can be added to ensure they, too, are called in the event of an alert.
Residents can sign up to enter your cell phone, unlisted, broadband/voice-over IP or TDD/TTY device
number. Click on “add your name” to enter your name, number, and address. This information will
only be used for emergency message alerts.
Officer Responsibilities
Once the information is complete, the database initiates an automated phone call to residents and
businesses around the area the person was last seen.
Call 18887631288 or 19547631288
Identify Reporting Agency Palos Park Police Department

Officers Name and Contact number
Case Number
Name and Description of Missing Person (s)
Location, last seen, zip code, county and search area
Time and Date, Last seen
Police Department Number for citizens to contact to report sightings
Answer all Technician questions
Press Release:
While the title is “A Child is Missing Alert”, it’s not limited to just finding children. Anyone missing,
especially the elderly with dementia are included in the alerts.
Click here to register
Every 40 seconds, a child is reported missing in the U.S. That’s according to a program spreading
nationwide, which is called “A Child is Missing Alert”
“A Child is Missing Alert” begins when a person is confirmed missing by local police. The information
about the person is then entered into a database out of Fort Lauderdale, Fl..
Procedure #4.703 87
Title: COMMUNITY RELATIONS Procedure: 4.301
PURPOSE:
To establish an atmosphere where an officer may perform his duties with the acceptance,
understanding and approval of the community.
To develop and maintain positive community relations by identifying and being responsive to citizen
needs and concerns.
POLICY:
The Police Department is committed to establishing close ties with and responding to the needs and
problems of the community. While the Department's task is generally governed by law, the policies
formulated to guide the enforcement of the law must include consideration of the public will. This
responsiveness must be clearly understood at all levels by a genuine concern for the problems of
individuals or groups. The needs of the community must become an integral part of the programs
designed to carry out the mission of the Department. Community relations is a shared responsibility.
Every member of the Department is accountable for promoting good community relations.
PROCEDURE:
RESPONSIBILITIES AND OPERATION
1. The Chief of Police will have the primary responsibility for the administration of the community
relations function. The community relations function is to proactively and reactively respond to
community needs in a community relations context. The Patrol Supervisors will coordinate all
Department activities by maintaining open lines of communication with the community and by
initiating departmental programs responsive to community law enforcement needs.
2. Every member of the Department, through the general discharge of their law enforcement
duties, will strive to achieve a positive relationship with community organizations and individuals.
3. The Patrol Supervisor will complete reports, as necessary, to the Chief of Police that will
contain:
Any current concerns voiced by the community;
Potential problems that may have a bearing on law enforcement activities within the
community; and
Recommended actions to alleviate concerns and problems.
4. The Department will attempt to identify and correct internal practices, or attitudes, that may
contribute to community tensions and grievances.
Procedure #4.703 88
Title: BOMB THREATS Procedure: 4.400
PURPOSE:
To provide broad guidelines for handling bomb threats with a minimum of danger and confusion.
POLICY:
The potentially serious injuries, considerable property damage and disruption of sometimes vital
services dictates that our response be swift, but cautious. This Department will take seriously all
threats to injure citizens and damage property.
PROCEDURE:
1. When a bomb threat is received an officer and the watch commander will be Dispatched to the
location.
The watch commander will inform all personnel responding to the scene to cease radio transmissions
and sirens within 150 feet of the facility.
The watch commander will discuss the threat with only the owner, manager or supervisor in charge of
the facility or building.
The person in charge of the facility or building will be in control of the situation and make all decisions
until such time when a suspected bomb is located.
The watch commander may suggest an appropriate course of action, but will not take control until
information or evidence is uncovered indication the presence of a suspected bomb.
It will be the responsibility of the person in charge of the facility or building to have the location
searched, and to provide individuals from his facility to do the searching.
Police personnel will not assist in any searches where occupants of the facility are available to
perform this duty, except if the location is a private residence in which case the officer may
accompany a member of the family while that person searches the premises.
The watch commander may suggest that occupants familiar with the location are best suited to
search for suspicious objects. However, all searchers must be instructed not to touch or move any
suspicious object. All suspicious objects discovered should be immediately brought to the attention of
the police.
The decision to evacuate the facility or building on the strength of the bomb threat will be left to the
person in charge of the facility. Several factors should be considered.
How credible is the threat?

Procedure #4.703 89
Was a time given for the explosion to occur?
How disruptive would the evacuation be?
If the person in charge of the facility or building orders an evacuation without a bomb or suspicious
object being found, the persons leaving should be instructed not to touch anything.
If a suspected bomb is found, the watch commander will immediately take control and do the
following:
Not move or touch the suspect device in any way.
Summon additional personnel to the scene, if necessary, to establish an outer perimeter for crowd
control.
Notify the County Bomb Disposal Unit.
Evacuate all persons from the facility to a place of safety.
Establish a command post and staging area.
Request the fire department send an ambulance crew and appropriate fire apparatus to a safe
location near the facility.
Notify the Chief of Police through the chain of command.
The watch commander in charge will cooperate with any assisting agency called to the scene and will
remain on the scene until relieved, or the scene has been rendered safe.
All bomb threats will be documented on a General Offense report.

Procedure #4.703 90
Title: ALARM RESPONSE Procedure: 4.401
Revised:
PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines for a safe and effective response to burglar and holdup alarms.
To develop a deployment plan for response to alarm calls.
To provide for the review of alarm calls.
POLICY:
The Department encourages the use of burglar and holdup alarms to better assist in apprehending
criminal offenders. Officers should respond to alarm calls in a safe, realistic manner keeping in mind
the high propensity of false alarms, and the potential tactical problems involved if the alarm is
bonafide.
PROCEDURE:
Generally, two (2) units will be dispatched to a burglar alarm call. However
Consideration should be given to time of day, day of week, the number of recent false alarms at that
location and availability of personnel.
2. Responding officers shall use appropriate vehicular warning devices when responding to the
scene, but the siren should not be used within the hearing range of the reported alarm if possible.
3. All alarms will be considered holdup alarms during normal business hours. After normal
business hours they will be considered burglar alarms.
4. When arriving at the scene of a burglar alarm, the first unit will generally make a cursory check
at the front of the business and then go to the rear of the building and park so the rear and side can
be watched. If an open door or window is discovered, the officer will wait for the second unit. The
second unit arriving will park near the front of the building. The check of the exterior of the building
should be made after both units have arrived at the scene. The officer(s) should check all exterior
doors, windows, and openings for evidence of entry.
5. Generally when arriving at a residential alarm, the first unit should park as near as possible to
the residence without being conspicuous and attempt to get a view of the most logical escape route.
If an open door or window is observed, the officer will wait for the second unit. Upon arrival of the
second unit, both officers should approach the residence simultaneously to check the house.
6. After the responding units have arrived on the scene and the outside of the commercial
establishment or residence has been checked and no signs of tampering or forced entry can be
found, the owner or manager will be contacted and given the opportunity to check the interior of the
building, if no alarm company representative is enroute.
Procedure #4.703 91
If after an alarm is received by communications the alarm subscriber calls to say they caused an
accidental alarm, the communications dispatcher will so advise the responding units. Upon arrival, if
the occupants are known to the responding officer, this will suffice. If they are not known to the
responding officer, they must be able to identify themselves. The first officer on the scene may
advise communications to have the second unit disregard.
HOLD-UP ALARMS AT FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS
1. When a holdup alarm is received the dispatcher will broadcast bank alarm at, giving the name
and address of the bank. The first and second unit on the scene will be designated as the primary
and secondary unit. The Watch Commander or their designee will respond to the scene.
2. Responding officers shall use appropriate vehicular warning devices when approaching the
scene, but the siren will not be used within the hearing range of the reported alarm if possible.
3. The first unit on the scene will state their position when they announce their arrival. Other
responding units will likewise provide their locations and complete the outer perimeter, covering all
entrances and exits. Units should attempt to locate a site where they can observe the business while
keeping themselves and their vehicles out of sight. Officers should be mindful that other offenders
may be located outside and away from the business. A cursory check of the surrounding vicinity
during arrival should be made to note persons or vehicles near the business.
4. Upon securing the perimeter, the primary officer will notify the dispatcher of apparent status.
The officer will attempt to determine if a robbery is in progress by observing the exterior and interior of
the building. The dispatcher will call the financial institution to determine why the alarm was sounded.
If there is a false alarm, the manager (or official) will exit the building and talk with the officer. Officers
will maintain their positions until they are advised the alarm is false. In the event the manager or
official does not exit the building, it should be assumed that a robbery is in progress. Responding
officers will not enter the business unless directed to do so by the Watch Commander. If the
offenders are still at the scene, any apprehension efforts should be made after they have exited the
business to avoid a hostage situation. If no offenders are apparent, it may be that they have left and
locked the employees and customers in the vault or other room. No one is to go in until directed to do
so by a Watch Commander or his designee.
5. All radio traffic during the incident will be such that no mention of key procedures is made.
After a perimeter has been established by the primary and secondary units, and the watch
commander is on the scene, the dispatcher will call the financial institution and ask to speak to the
first person on the alarm response list, kept on file in the dispatch center. The dispatcher should ask
for the person by name and not identify themselves as police employees. If the first person is not at
the bank the operator should ask for the next person on the list. When contact is made with an
individual on the list the dispatcher will ask for the proper authorization number. The employee
should then answer with the proper number as listed. If the proper response is received, the
dispatcher will advise the responding units of the apparent false alarm and instruct the employee to
follow established procedures. If the proper answers are not transmitted by the bank employee, the
dispatcher will then advise the patrol units that this alarm should be considered as a robbery in
progress with the offenders still inside the building. Additional units should be dispatched as required.
6. If an actual robbery has occurred and the offender has left the bank, the bank employee will
lock the door. They will unlock the door only to uniform police personnel. No police personnel will
Procedure #4.703 92
enter the building unless under the direction of the Watch Commander. Once inside the bank, the
officers will secure the scene and broadcast appropriate information. The FBI notified as soon as
possible. Secondary units should begin searching for the offender(s) and check close areas where a
secondary getaway car may have been picked up and the involved vehicle abandoned.
7. If it is a false alarm, the Watch Commander will cancel the alarm by broadcasting “false alarm
at” giving the bank name and address. All alarms will be considered bonafide until proven otherwise.
HOLDUP ALARM AT A NON FINANCIAL INSTITUTION
1. Officers will respond in fundamentally the same manner as for financial institutions.
2. Employees of other, non-financial businesses will not use a code over the phone, but all other
procedures should be used as applicable.
Procedure #4.703 93
Title: MISSING PERSONS Procedure: 4.402
PURPOSE
To provide guidelines for taking a report of a missing person.
POLICY
All missing person reports will be investigated thoroughly and quickly. Any reports of missing children
will be handled as a priority investigation.
PROCEDURE:
MISSING PERSON – ADULT
1. A missing person report will be taken whenever the circumstances indicate that the person
missing may be endangered, missing involuntarily, disabled, a catastrophe or accident victim, or other
such circumstances that warrant police intervention and the person is a resident.
2. The officer will obtain the missing person’s name, age, description, last known location and
possible destination as soon as possible. This information will be given to the telecommunicator who
will and broadcast the information to patrol units.
3. The report should be made by a relative or legal guardian. If, however, a relative or guardian
is not immediately available, then the report may be taken from a person who is a close friend, an
employer or co-worker, or someone who has temporary custody of the missing person and a genuine
concern for the missing person’s safety.
The reporting officer will attempt to obtain a current photograph of the missing person. The
photograph will be attached to the original report.
The watch commander will ensure that

the missing person is entered into LEADS.
If the missing adult has been missing for

at least 30 days, every effort must be made to obtain dental data for entry into LEADS. An
authorization to release dental records can be obtained from the LEADS manual.
7. Investigators assigned a missing person report for follow up will contact the complainant and
keep him informed of any progress made and the current status of the case.
The watch commander on duty at the

time notification is received that a missing adult is located, found or who has returned home, is
responsible for ensuring that all LEADS and NCIC computer entries have been canceled. This
information will be included in a supplemental report.
Procedure #4.703 94
MISSING PERSON – MINORS
1. A missing person report will be taken on any person reported missing who is under the age of
eighteen, un-emancipated and a resident.
2. The officer will obtain the minor’s name, age, description, last known location and possible
destination as soon as possible. This information will be given to the telecommunicator who will
activate a tone alert and broadcast the information.
3. The parent or guardian will be asked to sign the LEADS section of the missing person report.
The officer will fully explain the purpose of this section and the parent’s responsibility to provide
transportation when the minor is found. If the parent refuses to sign the LEADS section, the officer
will indicate this in the narrative. However, any missing person report involving a minor will be
entered into LEADS.
4. The officer should obtain a recent photograph of the minor for future identification. The officer
should also inquire if the missing minor has an original set of fingerprints available. If available, both
items should be made a part of the missing person report.
5. If the missing minor has been missing for at least 30 days, every effort must be made to obtain
dental data for entry into LEADS. An authorization to release dental records can be obtained from
the LEADS manual.
6. The watch commander is responsible for ensuring that the missing minor has been entered
into LEADS.
7. Investigators assigned a missing minor report for follow up will contact the complainant and
keep him informed of any progress made and the current status of the case.
8. The watch commander on duty at the time notification is received that a missing minor is
located, found or who has returned home, is responsible for ensuring that all LEADS and NCIC
computer entries have been canceled. This information will be included in a supplemental report.
SEARCHES
1. The watch commander will respond immediately to the scene of a missing or abducted child, a
disabled or mentally impaired adult and determine the type of investigation and search that is
necessary.
2. The residence and surrounding neighborhood should be thoroughly searched by available

personnel.
3. Additional assistance can be requested, by the watch commander, from the following,
depending on the circumstances of the incident. Surrounding police departments;
On coming shift;
Fire Department personnel;
4. When the watch commander determines that the search will be detailed or lengthy, and there
is a definite need for an immediate investigation, the on duty or on call investigator will be requested
to respond to the scene. The Patrol Division Commander will also be notified.
Procedure #4.703 95
5. The investigator responding to the scene will assume responsibility for coordinating the
continued search and necessary follow up investigation, including maintaining contact with the
complainant.
Procedure #4.703 96
Title: PSYCHIATRIC REFERRALS Procedure: 4.407
PURPOSE:
To provide assistance during psychiatric emergencies and referral information for the mentally ill.
POLICY:
The role of the Department is to cause prompt and appropriate action in potentially dangerous
emergencies involving persons exhibiting serious psychiatric conditions. Prompt and prudent action
can at times prevent serious harm or fatal occurrences involving the mentally ill person and those
who happen to be present when the person is experiencing a psychotic episode. It is the policy of the
Police Department to ensure that individuals with psychiatric problems coming to the attention of this
Department receive appropriate handling and referral.
LAW:
State Law in part states that a peace officer may take a person into custody and transport him to a
mental health facility when, as a result of his personal observation, the peace officer has reasonable
grounds to believe that the person is subject to involuntary admission and in need of immediate
hospitalization to protect such person or others from physical harm;
That the transporting authority acting in good faith and without negligence in connection with the
transportation of respondents shall incur no liability, civil or criminal, by reason of such transportation;
and
A person 18 years of age or older who is subject to involuntary admission and in need of immediate
hospitalization may be admitted to a mental health facility.
PROCEDURE:
EMERGENCY INVOLUNTARY ADMISSION BY CERTIFICATION – ADULT
1. Criteria for admission of any person 18 years of age or older to a psychiatric facility is typically
a person who is mentally ill and who, because of his illness:
Can be reasonably expected to inflict serious physical harm upon himself or another in the near
future; or,
Is unable to provide for his basic physical needs to guard himself from serious harm.
2. If an individual is in need of immediate involuntary hospitalization a Petition for

Involuntary/Judicial Admission form must be completed. The petition must be completed by a
petitioner who witnessed the conduct of the mentally ill subject. The petitioner may be a peace
officer, a family member 18 years of age or older, or in some instances, a medical doctor. The
petition must contain:
The name of the person to be admitted;
Procedure #4.703 97
A detailed statement of the reason for the assertion that the respondent is subject to involuntary
admission, including a description of any acts or significant threats supporting the assertion and the
time and place of their occurrence;
The name, address and telephone number of any witness(s) who can corroborate the petitioner’s
description of the conduct;
The petitioner’s signature, address, date of petition and relationship to subject.
3. It must be determined that the person to be hospitalized is suffering from a mental illness and
who, because of that illness, is dangerous to himself or another or is unable to provide for his basic
physical needs to protect himself from serious harm. The following are some indications of mental
disorder that can be used to determine if the subject should be hospitalized:
Talks to self, hears voices, talks to imaginary people;
Believes people are generally against him;
Owns the City of Chicago, works for the FBI, CIA, etc.;
Is controlled by organized crime;
Knows the President of the U.S.;
Believes the air or water is poisoned, and;
Goes outside nude, and yells and screams.
4. In determining whether the person is dangerous or unable to care for himself the officer should
ask the parent or relative some questions, such as:
Is the person threatening to harm himself or another?
If so, when did the threat occur?
Did the person strike another, and when did it occur?
Does he threaten with a knife or gun in his possession? (An overt act is not necessary)
Does he walk outside in the cold barefoot or nude?
Is he confused to such a point that he wanders and does not know where he lives, or who his
relatives or parents are?
5. These, or similar events, must have occurred and must be current within the past few days. If
this same unusual behavior has been present for months or years, it probably is not the type of
emergency that must be handled immediately.
6. If the petition is to be signed by a Police Officer, the following steps will be taken:
The petition will be completed and signed before transporting the patient to the hospital.
Procedure #4.703 98
The Fire Department rescue unit will be used to transport the subject to a medical facility for
examination by a medical Doctor prior to any psychiatric evaluation.
If requested by the Fire Department paramedics, a Police Officer will ride with the paramedic crew in
the rescue unit with the approval of the Watch Commander.
Officers will use extreme caution when dealing with a mentally ill subject. Appropriate restraining
devices will be used when transporting a mentally ill subject. Persons suffering from a mental
disorder will not be transported to a hospital in a police squad car unless directed to do so by court
order. This will be a two-officer transport situation.
The subject may be transported to any area hospital that the Fire Department routinely deals with.
If the destination hospital does not have a psychiatric unit, the hospital emergency room staff
will contact a Mental Health Center who will send personnel to the hospital to conduct the evaluation.
The incident and subsequent Petition for Involuntary Admission will be documented on a Department
general case report.
If a family member or relative of the mentally ill subject is to sign the petition, he will be assisted by
the Officer on the scene. The steps as outlined above will be followed. The petitioner may elect to
arrange for a private ambulance to transport the subject to a hospital of his choice.
EMERGENCY ADMISSION – MINORS
1. State Law in part states that a peace officer may take a minor into custody and transport the
minor to a mental health facility when, as a result of his personal observation, the peace officer has
reasonable grounds to believe that the minor is eligible for admission under and is in a condition that
immediate hospitalization is necessary in order to protect the minor or others from physical harm.
2. If the condition is not an emergency the officer should refer the parent or guardian to contact
the Family and Mental Health Services office during normal business hours. An appointment is
necessary for the parent or guardian to complete the intake process before a counselor can see the
patient.
Procedure #4.703 99
Title: HOSTAGE/BARRICADED Procedure: 4.411

SUBJECT INCIDENT
PURPOSE:
To identify procedures for handling a hostage/barricaded subject incident.
To establish guidelines and responsibilities for responding personnel to the scene of a

hostage/barricaded subject incident.
To minimize injury to officers, suspects, and others.
To provide for the notification and assistance of additional personnel, other law enforcement
departments, and support agencies.
POLICY:
A hostage/barricaded subject poses an extreme danger not only to officers who seek to arrest him,
but to other persons as well. However, it is the policy of the Police Department to expend all
reasonable efforts, when possible, to resolve barricaded incidents peaceably. The primary objective
of police action in these incidents is the preservation of life. The safety of hostages, police personnel,
innocent bystanders, and the offender must be our first concern. A secondary objective includes the
apprehension of the offender, recovery of property and restoration of order.
DEFINITIONS:
HOSTAGE INCIDENT
A situation in which a person(s) holds another person(s) against their will by force, threat or violence,
and law enforcement officials are present at the scene attempting to obtain the release of the
hostage.
BARRICADED PERSON
A situation in which a person(s) who is armed or believed to be armed, suicidal or mentally unstable
resists being taken into custody by barricading himself in a room, building or other location.
INNER PERIMETER
The immediate area of containment as designated by the on scene supervisor. This area is initially
staffed by first responding officers until relieved by tactical response officers. Other persons will be
evacuated from this area to prevent injury or interference with the operation. Only personnel
authorized by the supervisor in charge should be allowed entry to this area.
OUTER PERIMETER
Procedure #4.703 100
A secondary control area surrounding the inner perimeter, providing a safe zone for access to the
inner perimeter. This area is staffed by officers whose main responsibility is to deny unauthorized
access to the area, traffic and crowd control.
COMMAND POST
A secure location within proximity of the outer perimeter, if possible, from which the supervisor in
charge directs the operation. Considerations in selecting the location should include access to
support services (telephone, rest room facilities, etc.), away from civilian and vehicular traffic, if
possible, a safe entry route from which other responding units and support services (ambulance, fire
apparatus, etc.) can approach safely.
STAGING AREA
A designated location on the outer perimeter to which all responding personnel will report for briefing,
assignment and equipment. This area will generally be under the command of a supervisor assigned
by the supervisor in charge of the incident.
TACTICAL RESPONSE TEAM
A unit of specially selected, trained and equipped officers will be requested to respond and provide
assistance in those incidents that would require special tactics, techniques and equipment. There is
a set team structure with designated coordinators and team leaders. Such teams are available from
the Palos Park Special Response Team SRT, Cook county Sheriff, Orland Park, or the Illinois State
Police.
PROCEDURE:
INITIAL RESPONDING OFFICER RESPONSIBILITY
1. When an officer is confronted with a hostage/barricaded subject incident he must take

immediate steps to:
Prevent injuries to himself and others by seeking cover and controlling the situation;
Evaluate the situation, gather and disseminate information, and clear the immediate area of
any bystanders or injured victims when possible;
Notify communications to request priority radio traffic and request

A supervisor responds to the scene;
Advise responding units of the safe route to enter the area and any helpful information
regarding the suspect and location;
Direct responding units to positions that will minimize the movement of the suspect and
prevent escape;
Detain all witnesses for debriefing; and,
.
1. The shift supervisor responding to the incident will be responsible for the following:
Evacuation of anyone who has been injured if possible;
Attempt to contact the barricaded suspect and arrest him without further incident.
Obtain all information from the initial responding officers regarding the suspect, weapons, location
and particulars of the incident;
Establish where the inner perimeter will be and assign uniformed officers. All personnel assigned to
or entering the inner perimeter will wear body armor;
Debrief any witnesses;
Provide all necessary information to officers on the scene, establish strict firearms control, establish
rules of engagement and inform all officers of the particulars of the incident and the elements for use
of deadly force that have been established should the incident extend to their position;
Establish and detail officers to an outer perimeter;
2. If the supervisor is unable to resolve the incident he should immediately notify the Chief of
Police that there is a need for a tactical response team standby or call-out, and do the following:
Establish a command post and chain of command; Create an incident Hisorian.
Summon additional personnel to the scene as required, (the supervisor should consider notifying
officers from surrounding communities if immediately needed, then replacing these officers with
officers called into duty early).
If necessary begin evacuation of all persons within the inner perimeter;
Establish a staging area and request all appropriate support equipment, ambulances, fire apparatus,
and additional personnel respond to that location;
Assign an officer to the staging area to brief all responding personnel and coordinate the movement
of all equipment;
Act as a news media liaison, unless otherwise directed by the chief or superior ranking officer. Only
the on scene supervisor may authorize access to the scene by the news media;
Assign investigators at the command post to intelligence type duties concerning identities of the
suspect(s), background information, and obtaining plans or sketches of the barricaded location from
the Fire Department or Department of Public Works;
Maintain contact with the barricaded subject and attempt to constantly evaluate his physical condition
and emotional state.
3. When the Chief of Police arrives at the command post, he will conduct a debriefing of the
supervisor in charge and personnel who established initial containment. The Chief of Police will have
the final decision to request assistance from the Tactical Response Team. If the Chief of Police is not
available, the on scene supervisor has the authority to request assistance from the Tactical Response
Team.
4. All personnel, regardless of their operational component within the Department, will fully and
totally cooperate with the on scene supervisor during any emergency. This coordinated effort is
necessary to provide for the safety of all concerned, to alleviate any misunderstanding, and ensure
the success of the operation.
FIREARMS DISCIPLINE
1. Firearms discipline is essential during a hostage/barricaded subject incident. No weapons fire

will be authorized without the express approval of the on scene supervisor or, the prerequisites
for self defense are met. The prerequisites are:
Weapons fire is necessary to protect one's own life, or
Weapons fire is necessary to protect the life of another.
2. All supervisors shall give close attention to the matter of firearms discipline.
Any use of chemical agents, i.e., tear gas, by other than Tactical Response officers must be
authorized by the supervisor in charge.
3. Nothing in this procedure precludes the lawful use of force, deadly or otherwise, by members
of this Department in protecting themselves or others from death or serious injury from aggressive
action by the hostage taker or barricaded subject.
NEGOTIATING TACTICS
1. Since no two hostage situations are alike there can be no standardized plan for negotiations.
Each incident should be treated individually.
2. The on scene supervisor is responsible for ensuring that contact has been initiated and
maintained with the hostage taker or barricaded subject. If necessary, this task may be relinquished
to a negotiator upon his arrival.
3. The on scene supervisor is responsible for coordinating with the Tactical supervisor the
contacting of utility companies for the timely shutdown of services.
4. Responsible negotiating tactics include, but are not limited to the following:
Buying time. As a rule the more time the captor spends with the hostage, the less likely he is to take
the hostage's life.
Obtaining information from the offender(s) that is helpful in understanding his mental and emotional
condition.
Allowing the offender(s) to ventilate anxieties.

Developing trust with the offender(s).
Assisting the offender(s) with solving problems in a realistic and non-violent manner.
Influencing the offender(s) to release the hostages and surrender peaceably.
5. Practically all demands are negotiable with certain exceptions. The following will not be
provided:
Weapons and ammunition;
Drugs or alcohol;
Additional people or an exchange of people, including police officers, for a hostage; and,
Releasing persons who are being held in legal custody.
6. Negotiable items are left to the discretion of the supervisor based on the incident at hand.
Items such as food, water, cigarettes and other physical comforts should be considered base
negotiable items and used appropriately.
RELOCATION
1. Whenever possible the supervisor in charge will not allow the offender(s) to leave the scene of
containment. All requests for vehicles or relocation will be denied.
2. In the event the offender(s) escape containment, provisions for chase and surveillance
vehicles will be initiated.
3. In the event the escape route enters another jurisdiction, the communications center will
advise those jurisdictions and request their assistance.
CONCLUSION
1. The on-scene supervisor and the Tactical Response supervisor will maintain the integrity of the
outer and inner perimeter until the hostage and offender have been removed from the scene and
investigative personnel have the opportunity to conduct a proper crime scene investigation.
AFTER-ACTION REPORT
1. The Chief of Police will assign a supervisor involved in the incident to complete an after-action
report that outlines actions taken and makes recommendations for improvements in future incidents.
Title: V.I.P. SECURITY Procedure: 4.412
PURPOSE:
To establish a procedure for providing security for V.I.P.’s.
POLICY:
The Police Department attempts to provide equal protection under the law to all people. However, we
recognize that some people, because of their political or public stature, create a protection need
greater than the average person. In those cases the Department will extend the normal steps for
security and provide security measures appropriate with that person’s title or position.
PROCEDURE:
The Chief of Police, or his designee, will supervise and coordinate any special security detail
involving a V.I.P. Security measures involve:
Coordinate the V.I.P. itinerary with the responsible security agency, either private or governmental,
and other law enforcement agencies which might be affected and whose assistance may be needed;
If necessary, make available equipment needed to provide for safety of the V.I.P. or the security
detail, i.e., soft body armor, flak vest, portable radios, marked or unmarked vehicles;
Assist in planning and surveying travel routes, and alternatives;
Make advanced inspections of the sites and facilities to be used by the V.I.P.;
Arrange for gathering local intelligence information;
Conduct a briefing with a member from each agency or department involved in the security detail and
coordinate the duties and responsibilities of all personnel;
In cooperation with the fire department make preparations for medical emergencies by providing the
necessary personnel, equipment and arrangements with the appropriate hospital facility;
Assist in providing any special communication needs, or providing a portable radio or member of the
Department with a radio, to any agency with an incompatible frequency;
Arrange and coordinate any special identification system to designate members of the security detail
not in uniform; and,
Assign as many officers as necessary to provide adequate security.

Title: SPECIAL EVENTS Procedure: 4.413
PURPOSE:
To establish planning requirements for Department operations at special events.
POLICY:
Most special events require additional personnel and resources to handle those problems normally
associated with increased traffic volume and large crowds. The Department will attempt to alleviate
those problems by proper planning and staffing for these events.
DEFINITION:
A special event may be defined as an activity such as a parade, athletic contest, or public
demonstration or celebration that results in an increase in the normal police services required for the
control of traffic, crowds, or crime.
PROCEDURE:
1. The Patrol Division Commander is responsible for the Department's coverage of a special
event. This responsibility includes the planning, coordination and supervision of personnel detailed to
the special event.
2. The Department's effectiveness in handling special events depends on contingency plans

relative to the events; therefore, a specific plan will be developed by the Patrol Division Commander.
This plan will include:
The type of special event;
Manpower required, uniformed and plain clothes;
Deployment of manpower, including times needed and fixed post assignments, if required;
Written estimates of traffic, crowd control, and crime problems expected:
Overall logistic requirements, including feeding, transporting, equipping, maintaining, and relieving
personnel assigned to the event;
Equipment needed, (barricades, radios, traffic vests, vehicles, etc.); and,
Coordination required within and outside the Department.
3. The Patrol Division Commander will contact the appropriate departments, (fire, public works,
health, etc.) and coordinate plans and exchange information regarding job functions at the event. He
will also coordinate the exchange of information with other law enforcement agencies involved in the
event.
4. The Patrol Division Commander will submit the plan to the Chief of Police before the event is
scheduled to start. The plan will be disseminated to all personnel assigned to the event to ensure
they are aware of their individual responsibilities.
5. When possible a briefing will be held for all personnel just prior to the starting of the event.
6. The Patrol Division Commander will submit an after-action report that evaluates the police
coverage of the event and any deficiencies experienced along with recommendations for
improvements in future special event coverage.
Title: SPECIAL OPERATIONS Procedure: 4.414
PURPOSE:
To outline the Department's response to special and covert operations.
POLICY:
The Police Department will employ measures to resolve special operations incidents and events that
are reasonable, effective, and consistent with the Department's resources and mission.
DEFINITION:
A special operation is any occurrence requiring police intervention that places demands on
department personnel and support resources beyond normal operational requirements.
PROCEDURE:
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
1. Officers will respond immediately to any incident requiring an emergency call for police service.
Most special operations incidents are handled by the Department until the severity of the situation is
assessed, the immediate threat is minimized and the resolution requirements are defined.
2. After the incident has been assessed the special operation may be resolved either by the
Department, by the Department with the assistance of another agency, or by an outside agency
entirely.
Special operations the Department is prepared to handle by itself are:
Bomb threats;
Undercover surveillance/stakeouts; and
Coverage of special events.
Special operations the Department will normally handle with the Assistance of another agency are:
VIP protection;
Disaster;
Civil disorder;
Civil defense emergencies;
Decoy operations;
Emergency response teams; and,
Hostage negotiations.
Special operations that will be handled by an outside agency are:
Bomb disposal; and,

Special purpose (undercover and Surveillance) vehicles.
3. Special operations that require an immediate response will be handled by the patrol shift on
duty at the time. The watch commander will be responsible for coordinating the response, the initial
assessment of the incident, and notifying the appropriate personnel or other agencies for assistance,
if necessary.
4. All requests for assistance from the Criminal Investigations Unit for deployment in special
operations to supplement other department components must be approved by the Criminal
Investigations Unit supervisor, or the Chief of Police. Requests for assistance in stakeouts, saturation
patrols, or other operations should be documented with an explanation of the special operation to be
addressed.
5. Special operations that do not require an immediate response are delegated by the Chief of
Police to the appropriate officer(s) or department component for necessary action.
6. Patrol Supervisors may utilize Criminal Investigations Officers when the patrol shift cannot
adequately handle an emergency special operation, event or incident.
7. Once an operation is undertaken, it will be the responsibility of the supervisor in charge of the
operation to coordinate all functions and components of the operation and maintain cooperation
between them.
COVERT OPERATIONS
1. When deemed appropriate, the Department will conduct covert operations in an attempt to
gather evidence leading to the arrest and prosecution of individuals involved in criminal activities.
2. Covert operations may include undercover or surveillance activities designed to infiltrate and
establish associations with those individuals suspected of criminal operations.
3. Covert operations will be coordinated and supervised by the Criminal Investigations Unit
supervisor and operated in a legitimate manner seeking advice from the Prosecutors office when
appropriate.
4. The Chief of Police will approve all undercover operations.
5. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor will brief the on-duty watch commander, if
appropriate, concerning the operation before its initiation. Patrol units should be advised to be
available for backup assistance, or to stay clear of the area, depending on the situation and
circumstances.
UNDERCOVER OPERATIONS
1. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor will be responsible for addressing the following
concerns before initiating an undercover operation:
Identification and analysis of the Suspect(s);
Provisions for initiating contact with the suspects;

A full analysis of the neighborhood surrounding the area;
Establishing false identities, if applicable, for the officer(s) assigned to the undercover position;
Maintaining confidentiality of officer's false ID;
Providing the necessary expense funds;
Procuring necessary equipment;
Establish routine and emergency communications between the undercover officer and surveillance
officers;
Determine the legal considerations of the operations and seek advice from the Prosecutor;
Develop the overall plan for the operation, including the guidelines for arresting the suspect(s);
Insure that adequate backup police personnel are available for the safety of the undercover officer;
and,
Insure that close supervision is provided throughout the operation.
2. Vehicles and equipment needed for a surveillance will be determined by the Criminal
Investigations Unit supervisor. If the vehicles currently provided by the department cannot be used,
arrangements will be made with the appropriate federal, state, or county agency.
3. The Chief of Police must approve any request to contact another agency for use of
surveillance vehicles or equipment.
SURVEILLANCE/STAKEOUT
1. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor will establish the plan of operation before initiating
a surveillance/stakeout. The plan will consider the following:
Analyze all available intelligence information pertaining to the crime and subject of the surveillance;
Identify and analyze offenders and their habits, associates, vehicles, methods of operation, and any
and all-pertinent information;
Familiarize assigned officers with targeted areas for surveillance;
Establish operational procedures, for observation, tails, and effecting the arrest;
Provide expense funds, as needed (tolls, meals, etc.);
Establish the primary and secondary means of communication;
Insure close supervision;
Provide adequate relief; and,

Determine any legal ramifications and contact the Prosecutors Office for advice.
DECOY OPERATIONS
1. Decoy operations must have prior approval of the Chief of Police.
2. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor must be on the scene to provide for close
supervision of the operation.
3. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor is responsible for addressing the following
concerns prior to initiating any decoy operation:
An analysis of victims profiles, crime M.O., location, day and time;
Provide appropriate disguises for participating officers, if required;
Provisions for sufficient back up for safety;
Develop an operational plan consistent with the activity, determining points of observations, and the
method of arrest;
Identify potential legal problems of the operation and seek advice from the Prosecutors Office;
Establish the communications channel(s) or other appropriate communications method, especially

emergency communications for fast response by back up officers;
Identify all personnel involved in the operation and assign call numbers or false identification, if
required;
Inform all on duty patrol personnel of the operation; and
Insure close supervision is provided throughout the operation.
CONDUCTING RAIDS
1. Raids should only be conducted pursuant to a warrant, but may be conducted without a
warrant upon necessity and with legally and judicially sufficient cause. A raid will only be initiated with
the approval of the Chief of Police, or his designee.
2. Before conducting any raid the following provisions will be met:

Obtain authorization from the Chief of Police;
A supervisor will be designated as raid coordinator;
Establish strategies and tactics for approaching, entering, securing, and leaving the target;
Determine the evidence and/or contraband which will be the object of the search and subsequent
seizure;
Select and secure any specialized equipment needed to carry out the raid, (battering ram, sledge
hammer, etc.);
Select and establish communication with specialized support units;

Arranging for the arrest and processing of suspect(s);
Determine the level of resistance expected and the level of force required to overcome the resistance;
Arrange for standby medical and fire equipment; and,
Provide for the completion of all required reports necessary to properly document the incident.
Title: INTELLIGENCE OPERATIONS Procedure: 4.500
Date Issued: JANUARY 01, 2002
PURPOSE:
To establish effective administrative and operational procedures for the collecting, processing, storing
and dissemination of intelligence information.
POLICY:
It is the policy of the Police Department to use all legitimate means to collect intelligence information
on organized criminal activities, subversive activities, vice activities, terrorism and civil disorder to
protect the officers of this Department and members of the community. Strict procedures must be
adopted and followed to prevent the unauthorized disclosure of intelligence information to preserve
the integrity of the investigative process and to promote the principles of due process.
PROCEDURE:
ADMINISTRATION
1. The Police Department will maintain an Intelligence section within the Criminal Investigations
Unit and under the direction of the Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor. The Intelligence section
will be responsible for the following:
Collection of criminal intelligence information;
Analysis of intelligence information;
Secure storage of intelligence information;
Dissemination of information within the Department; and,
Maintaining a liaison with other law enforcement agencies, to include federal, state, and local
departments for the exchange of intelligence information.
2. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor will safeguard the integrity of all intelligence files
and ensure that legal requirements relating to such files are followed and ensure the security of these
files. To maintain this integrity the following requirements will apply:
It is essential that whenever information is gathered from an informant his identity remains
anonymous. Procedures outlined for contacts with informants will be completely followed. The
supervisor responsible for maintaining the master files for informants will be advised when an
informant is being used for intelligence purposes.
Intelligence information collected will be limited to criminal conduct and activities that present a threat
to the community. These areas include, but are not limited to:
Organized crime activity

Terrorist activity
Subversive activity
Vice activity
Felony crimes of a serious or threatening nature
Use of personnel and equipment will be restricted to the collection of unconfirmed intelligence,
strategic intelligence, tactical intelligence, support for undercover officers and operations, maintaining
a liaison with federal, state, county and local law enforcement agencies for the exchange of
intelligence information, and to request assistance for additional manpower and special equipment
needs. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor will determine what tactics and techniques are
appropriate for the operation at hand. Contact should be made with the Prosecutors Office to ensure
the legality and integrity of the intelligence effort. Personnel, equipment, and techniques may be
used to collect the following types of intelligence:
Unconfirmed intelligence is information from various sources, often anonymous, that by itself may be
suspicious, but when combined with other information may make an inference of criminal activity.
Strategic intelligence is a situation where the problem is known and an attempt is made to correct the
problem.
Tactical intelligence is answering a request for information from patrol or other unit on a specific
subject, organization, and/or location.
All intelligence information collected will be included into the file, except that information which by its
nature is not relevant to the criminal activity involved. Examples would be:
Information suggesting a subject's political or religious preferences, association, or opinions.
The nature of a subject's sexual preferences.
Intelligence files will be reviewed annually, Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor. Intelligence
information will be purged from the files if it is no longer of investigative value. The supervisor will file
a report with the Chief of Police with the results of his review and inform the Chief of Police on all files
purged. Files will be purged as follows:
Permanent files -- files that name a particular person by name and DOB or name and address, or a
particular organization where the identification can be specifically made and there has been
confirmed criminal activity within a three year period. If no criminal activity can be confirmed the files
will be purged.
Temporary files -- a file where a subject or organization can only be described but not specifically
named. These files are to be purged at the end of one year if during that time a positive I. D cannot
be made of the person or organization. If a positive I. D. can be made within a year then the file can
be reclassified as permanent.
Working files -- a file where information is received about a subject or organization but no verification
has been made as to the accuracy of the information. These files will be purged after 30 days.
3. Intelligence information will be maintained by the Criminal Investigations Unit Supervisor.

Access to restricted or classified intelligence information will be limited to:
Chief of Police
Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor
Other sworn members of the Department engaged in related investigations, with the approval of the
Chief of Police.
4. All intelligence records and procedures will be under the control and direct supervision of the
Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor. Intelligence information will be classified as follows:
General -- distributed to all police personnel.
Restricted -- distributed to selected police personnel or other law enforcement agencies.
Classified -- distributed only to those individuals who specifically need to know.
5. Intelligence information will only be distributed to other criminal justice agencies when needed
to pursue a criminal investigation.
6. All requests for restricted and classified intelligence information must be directed to and
approved for release, by the Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor.
7. General Intelligence Bulletins released by the Criminal Investigations Unit will be clearly
marked, "CONFIDENTIAL", and their dissemination will be limited to Department personnel and local
law enforcement agencies. A clip board with Intelligence Bulletins is located in the Criminal
Investigations Unit office. This information is provided to keep officers abreast of current offenders
and criminal activity in our area. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor will periodically review
this information and purge any outdated information.
8. The dissemination of information that is in the possession of this Department is permitted on a

need to know basis. No member of the Department will confirm the existence or non-existence of any
intelligence, investigative, criminal, or any other Department record or information to any person or
agency not specifically authorized to receive such information. Those authorized to receive such
information will be limited to members of this Department or another criminal justice agency if, and
only if they have need for the information in the performance of their official duties.
9. The Criminal Investigations Unit supervisor will maintain a liaison with other law enforcement
agencies to provide access to specialized equipment needed to support the intelligence function.
Equipment needs should be determined before the initiation of any operation and may include,
audiovisual monitoring equipment, night vision equipment and the use of specially designed
surveillance vehicles. The Chief of Police must authorize the use of surveillance type equipment.
Confidential monies for the paying to informants and supporting other intelligence operations will be
provided through the Criminal Investigations Operations fund.
Special consideration will be provided in the accounting of funds to ensure the confidentiality of the
information provided.
Title: SELECTIVE TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT Procedure: 4.601
PURPOSE:
To direct police traffic enforcement activity to preselected times, locations and specific types of traffic
violations.
POLICY
Effective police traffic service requires assignment of officers at the locations and times where
hazardous or congested conditions may exist. The ultimate goal of the Department's traffic
enforcement policy is to reduce crashes and promote voluntary compliance with traffic laws.
Selective traffic enforcement is an activity of the Patrol division.
PROCEDURE:
ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBILITIES
1. The Chief of Police is responsible for the Department's selective traffic enforcement functions.
These shall include overall responsibility for analysis of traffic crashes and traffic enforcement
activities.
2. Implementation of selective enforcement techniques and procedures is the responsibility of the

patrol shift watch commanders. Selective enforcement action will be undertaken in those areas
where analysis of traffic crashes and violations indicates, or is based upon complaints or requests
from citizens. Patterns of cause and/or sudden increases in the number and severity of crashes or
violations are reason for extra enforcement activity at a given location.
3. Speed detection devices (RADAR) will normally be used in the enforcement of speeding laws.
4. All new personnel will receive training in the legal and proper operation of Department radar
equipment.
The repair and service of radar units shall be the responsibility of the Administrative Services staff.
Officers will document any malfunctions or damage to the unit and submit a department memo.
The Chief of Police will evaluate the selective traffic enforcement program annually.
OFFICER RESPONSIBILITY
1. Traffic law enforcement is a supplement to regular patrol duty.
2. Officers should be particularly alert for hazardous violations. The emphasis should be on high
volume roadways, high crash intersections and locations within the officer's beat, or where complaints
and reports indicate the need for special attention.
3. Officers shall take appropriate enforcement action whenever an enforceable violation is

detected. This shall include provable violations determined as the result of crash investigations.
4. Officers may, in minor crashes, issue warning citations for those violations as permitted by
ordinance or statute. This shall not apply when a crash results in extensive damage or personal
injury.
5. Officers are encouraged to employ tolerance when:
There is a reasonable possibility of human error in judgment of the officer or the citizen.
There is a reasonable possibility of malfunction of mechanical equipment with no knowledge or intent

of the driver.
The content of the particular law, which has been violated, is not common knowledge.
6. These tolerances shall be uniformly applied for the purpose of affording just treatment to the
public.
Title: TRAFFIC CRASH INVESTIGATION Procedure: 4.604
PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines for the Department's traffic crash reporting and investigation process.
POLICY
The Police Department carries out its crash management responsibility consistent with the nature and
severity of the crash, the most efficient use of personnel and resources, and the statutory reporting
requirements of the State.
DEFINITIONS:
TRAFFIC CRASH REPORTING

Traffic crash reporting is defined as the basic collection of information to identify and classify a traffic
crash; the time, location, persons and vehicles involved. This includes planned movements and any
contributing factors such as traffic law violations.
TRAFFIC CRASH INVESTIGATION
Traffic crash investigation is defined as the collection of information describing and identifying:
Participants and injuries,
Vehicle damage,
Roadway condition, marks, residue,
Final positions of vehicles/bodies.
Interpreting these factors with the contributing factors involved, and an attempt to satisfy the particular
elements required to produce that type of crash.
SERIOUS TRAFFIC CRASH
A serious traffic crash is defined as a crash where a death has occurred, injuries are so severe that
survival cannot be expected, or there has been a loss of limb.
PROCEDURE:
TRAFFIC CRASH REPORTING AND INVESTIGATION
1. Officers of this Department will respond to the scene and meet the reporting and investigative
responsibilities of any traffic crash that involves:
Death or injury;
Leaving the scene of a crash;

Impairment of an operator due to alcohol and/or drugs;
Hazardous materials;
Damage to public vehicles or property;
Disturbances between the parties involved;
Major traffic congestion as a result of the crash;
Damage to vehicle(s) if towing is required.
2. Officers responsible for investigating a traffic crash will perform the following minimum
activities:
Upon arrival, park the police vehicle in such a way as to provide maximum protection to the scene but
without endangering the public or officer;
Assess the scene to determine the need for other emergency services;
Request medical aid when necessary;
Note special conditions or factors that may have contributed to the crash (such as natural hazards,
visibility obstruction, inoperative traffic control device, etc.);
Record short lived evidence and protect the scene for evidence when the need for further
investigation appears evident;
Locate and interview witnesses;
Notify the shift supervisor when supervisory direction appears to be warranted;
Issue appropriate traffic citations when applicable;
Expedite the removal from the roadway of vehicles, persons, and debris; and
Complete all required forms for routine traffic crashes before their tour of duty ends unless
otherwise directed by the watch commander.
3. Officers will respond to crashes occurring on private property and investigate and report their
findings when the traffic crash involves:
Death or injury;
Damage to any vehicle in excess of $500;
Impairment of an operator due to alcohol and/or drugs;
Hazardous materials;
Damage to public vehicles or property;

Disturbances between the parties involved; and,
Hit and run crashes.
4. If the crash does not meet the criteria then a self-report is completed with the officer facilitating
the information exchange.
5. Officers are expected to take positive enforcement action whenever the crash investigation
leads them to believe that a violation has occurred. Elements not personally witnessed by the officer
must be established through the investigation. When evidence exists to satisfy all elements of a
particular violation, enforcement action should be taken. Enforcement actions will be consistent with
the Department's procedures and policies concerning traffic law enforcement.
CRASH SCENE STABILIZATION
1. An important responsibility of officers responding to any crash scene is to keep the situation
from becoming worse. This responsibility takes on added complexity when traffic is blocked or
hazardous materials are present. Officers may be called upon to perform certain special activities,
and to coordinate their activities with those of personnel from various other agencies.
2. The first officer to arrive at the scene shall be responsible for the following:
Position his vehicle to protect the scene and any persons that may be involved;
Request medical aid when necessary;
Preserve evidence;
Traffic direction and control at the crash scene; when necessary use flares, barricades, and traffic
cones for the temporary detour of traffic;
Request additional assistance if necessary,
Locate witnesses; and

Expedite the clearing of the roadway.
3. Officers responding to the scene of a crash are generally responsible for the handling of the
following hazards until properly relieved by fire and/or medical personnel:
Injuries - Officers shall summon emergency medical assistance to the scene and assist in getting
injured persons removed to medical facilities as soon as possible.
Handling Fire Hazards - If fire is a potential hazard, officers will take appropriate action to stabilize the
conditions to the best of their abilities and summon the fire department when necessary. Officers will
attempt to eliminate the possibility of ignition to the maximum extent possible. Officers should
evacuate and isolate the area as is necessary and carefully control movement within the vicinity of
the hazard, detouring traffic if necessary.
Handling Hazardous Materials - upon arrival at the scene of a traffic crash involving hazardous
materials, officers should attempt to identify the cargo on the basis of placards from a safe distance.
If hazardous materials are identified, immediately notify the fire department, according to
Department procedure.
TRAFFIC DIRECTION AT CRASH SCENES
1. Officers who must perform traffic direction and control activities at crash scenes will allow for
the safe ingress and egress of emergency vehicles and provide for a system of alternate routes for
other vehicles as necessary. The following will be used by officers to aid in protecting themselves
and the scene:
Flares;
Traffic cones or barricades;

Marked police vehicle with emergency lights activated; and
Reflective traffic safety vests.
2. In cases that involve only property damage and the vehicles are driveable, drivers should be
directed by the investigating officer to remove their vehicles from the traffic lanes as soon as possible,
unless there are extenuating circumstances.
COLLECTING OF AT SCENE INFORMATION
1. Information to be collected at the scene of the crash by the investigating officer should include
the following:
Interviews of the principals and witnesses. Officers should question drivers and witnesses separately
and individually. In the case of a minor crash, this questioning is usually done at the scene. When
crashes of a more serious nature are investigated, the officer should obtain a brief account at the
scene and follow up at a more stable location, preferably the police station. When questioning
drivers, officers should be alert for any physical or emotional impairment that may have affected the
person's driving ability.
Examining and recording vehicle damage. Officers should check vehicle equipment, controls and
systems for defects that may have contributed to the crash. If there is serious injury or death, officers
may place an investigative hold on vehicles for closer examination and evaluation of the damaged
area that may coincide with other evidence and statements as to how the crash occurred.
Examining and recording effects of the crash on the roadway. Officers should note all conditions of
the road during the investigation at the scene. Officers should check such factors as foreign
substances on the road surface; the condition of the surface; the lane markings, grade, width,
alignment and condition of the shoulder. Officers should also note any obstructions that existed at
the time of the collision. Weather conditions should also be noted.
Taking photographs, as appropriate. Photographs should be taken when necessary.
Field Sketches. Sketches should be prepared as may be necessary and appropriate for investigative
purposes and attached to the original report.
Collecting and preserving evidence. Collection and preservation of evidence is required at the crash
scene.
Exchanging of information among principals. Officers will issue the State required forms and
explain to drivers involved their responsibilities in reporting the crash as necessary and appropriate
and assist them as necessary in providing information to the other persons involved in the crash.
2. When officers come into possession of property belonging to crash victims, they will ensure it
is protected from theft and remove it to a place of safekeeping until it can be returned to the owner. If
the item cannot be returned to the owner at the scene it will be inventoried.
SPECIALIZED CRASH INVESTIGATION AND FOLLOW UP-
1. In the event the initial investigating officer needs assistance in completing a traffic crash
investigation, he will contact his immediate supervisor who will determine the appropriate action to be
taken to ensure prompt and proper completion of the crash investigation on;
All fatal crashes;
All serious personal injury crashes involving injuries likely to result in death or permanent disability,
(i.e., loss of limb, eye, severe burns).
Any other crash situation where special circumstances are present, such as potential liability to the
Village, and the watch commander determines that the services of a Reconstructionist is required.
The on-duty watch commander must authorize the assignment of a Reconstructionist to assist.
Officers requesting assistance will make every effort to preserve the crash scene for the
Reconstructionist. The Reconstructionist will be responsible for the traffic crash report, any
supplemental or investigative reports and diagrams.
5. Follow up reports are the responsibility of the Reconstructionist. Enforcement action will be
coordinated between the reporting officer and assigned Reconstructionist.
6. When necessary and appropriate, the chief of Police will approve the use of outside expert and
technical assistance, i.e., mechanics, physicians, safety inspectors, adequate justification for the
need for such assistance will be required before approval will be given.
HIT AND RUN CRASH INVESTIGATIONS
1. Every reasonable effort will be made to locate and identify the driver of the vehicle which has
left the scene of a crash.
2. A crash report will be completed on any hit and run crash.
3. The investigating officer will attempt to recover and inventory any useful evidence that will help
identify the driver and vehicle involved.
4. The investigating officer will attempt to locate and interview any witnesses that may have seen
or have knowledge of the crash.
5. When a hit and run crash occurs and there is no information on the vehicle that left the scene,
or the driver, the crash report is to be completed and forwarded by the officer.
6. In the case of a hit and run crash in which information such as a license number of the vehicle,
or the identity of the driver is known, the officer will make an attempt to contact the driver/owner and
complete the investigation. If warranted an ISPERN broadcast will be initiated.
7. If for reasons of time, manpower shortage, jurisdictional boundaries or the investigating officer
is unable to make contact with the driver/owner, the investigation will be turned over to the Criminal
Investigations Unit for follow up.
8. The investigator assigned to a hit and run crash is responsible for all supplemental reports
documenting his investigation.
9. When sufficient evidence is available to sustain prosecution, hit and run drivers are to be
charged with the specific offense of leaving the scene of a crash.
The investigator is to maintain personal communication with other parties involved in the crash and is
to advise them of the progress and status of the investigation.
REPORTING
1. The officer assigned to the crash will be in charge of the investigation (unless the crash is
assigned to a crash investigator) and responsible for the completion of the initial report.
2. The Department will use the Traffic Crash Report form provided by the State for a crash
occurring on public or private property. Local accident reports and supplemental reports approved
and authorized by the State will be used when required.
3. Each officer shall be issued, when published, a copy of Traffic Crash Report Instruction
Manual for Law Enforcement Agencies to assist them in the correct manner to complete this form.
4. The crash report form packet contains three separate forms, two (2) Motorist's Report of Motor
Vehicle Crash forms and one, (1) Traffic Crash Report form. Each package is control numbered, the
red number in the upper left hand corner, and each sheet in the package has the same number.
5. If there are more than two motorists involved in a crash, then additional unnumbered
supplemental crash report forms must be used. It is important that the officer writes, in the blank
space on the unnumbered forms, the number that corresponds with the control number on the sheets
in the original package that is being used for that particular crash.
6. Police Department Supplemental Report forms shall be used for any follow-up investigations or
when the narrative portion of the Traffic Crash Report is insufficient to complete the narrative.
7. Those crashes where a formal report is not required may be documented on a case report
card. The following information should be documented:
Name, address and phone number of both drivers and any passengers or witnesses;
License numbers of vehicles involved;

Drivers license for each driver;
Location of where crash occurred and brief description of what occurred;
Date and time;
Describe damage, if any
All traffic crashes shall be classified in conformance with The Manual on Classification of Motor
Vehicle Traffic Crash.
9. Supervisors will ensure that all reports are complete, accurate and submitted before the officer
completes his tour of duty.
REPORTING DAMAGE TO STATE AND CITY/VILLAGE PROPERTY
1. Officers investigating traffic crashes which result in damage to State or City/Village owned
property will ensure the incident is documented on a State Traffic Crash Report form. Included in the
report should be the extent of the damage and the driver's insurance information.
2. Traffic crashes which result in damage to Village owned property will be reported on a State
Traffic Crash Report form.
3. Damage to street lights, fire hydrants, and other Village owned property will be photographed
when necessary. The communications operator will notify the proper utility company or Village
Department if their services are needed. Unnecessary call out of Department of Public Works
personnel should be avoided if the problem can be handled during the next business day without
creating any adverse problems.
4. Clerical staff will make two copies of any crash report that involves Village owned property and
forward them to the accounting department.
Title: ANCILLARY MOTORIST SERVICES Procedure: 4.606
PURPOSE:
To provide general guidelines for officers to help motorists in need of routine and emergency highway
assistance.
POLICY:
It is the policy of this Department to take appropriate action to assist lost or stranded motorists,
disabled vehicles, correct hazardous situations when possible and provide general assistance to
highway users.
PROCEDURE:
GENERAL POLICE SERVICES
Protecting lives and aiding the injured, locating lost persons, keeping the peace, and providing for
other needs are basic services provided by the Department.
To satisfy these requests, the Department responds to calls for service and renders such aid or
advice as is necessitated or indicated by the situation.
Because of the danger presented by the stranded motorist both to himself and to other motorists on
the highway, the Department offers reasonable assistance to motorists who appear to be in need of
aid.
Such service as applies will be rendered during all hours of the day, but will receive particular
attention during nighttime hours, and during severe weather conditions.
5. When an officer assists a motorist, and the vehicle is disabled or towed, the officer will
transport the motorist to a place of safety. A place of safety being the police station, or a business
establishment in the Village that will be able to provide temporary shelter for the motorist to get their
own assistance and make phone calls.
MECHANICAL ASSISTANCE
Anytime an officer encounters a motorist who requires the services of a service station or tow
company the officer will:
Check with the motorist to ascertain if he has a preference for a local service station and request the
communications dispatcher to make notification.
If the motorist has no preference, or the service station cannot provide timely service, the officer will
advise the motorist that the Department has arrangements with local tow companies to provide
services.
If the motorist has no preference the officer will advise the communications dispatcher to contact a
tow service.
When an officer finds that a vehicle is left unattended upon a street or highway in violation of any of
the provisions regulating stopping, standing or parking and the vehicle constitutes a definite hazard or
obstruction to the normal movement of traffic, the officers is authorized to have the vehicle moved.
The towing of any vehicle shall conform to the requirements outlined in Department procedure 4.608.
SPECIFIC RESPONSIBILITIES
Officers are expected to be alert for motorists who appear to need assistance.
When consistent with other assignments, officers are expected to stop and offer help to motorists who
appear to be in need of help.
If an assignment prevents the officer from rendering the assistance personally, arrangements should
be made for another police unit to render the necessary service. If practical, the motorist should be
advised of this by the original officer.
Officers who assist stranded motorists should remain alert to the following possibilities:
The driver has not been authorized to use the vehicle;
The vehicle is unsafe;
The motorist is not licensed;
The motorist is unable to safely operate the vehicle; or,
The vehicle’s occupants have engaged in criminal activity.
Officers are encouraged to utilize push bars equipped on patrol vehicles to push disabled vehicles
from the roadway to the nearest safe location in accordance with procedure.
The patrol car may not be used to “jump start” a motorist’s vehicle without watch commander
approval.
Officers should:
Provide information and directions upon request;
Become familiar with the streets and highways in their area; and
Be knowledgeable of the various services and facilities available in the Village and service area.
EXCEPTIONAL MOTORIST SERVICES
If reasonable care is taken to prevent damage or injury, when necessary, officers may, at their
discretion, render the following exceptional services:
Transporting fuel to the motorist;

Changing a tire, or
Transporting the motorist to public transportation or other convenient location.
Before rendering any exceptional services, officers should consider:
Availability of commercial roadside services;
Time of day;
Accident hazard caused by the motorist;
Physical condition of the motorist, and weather conditions.
The shift’s activity and officer’s estimated “down time”.
EMERGENCY MOTORIST SERVICES
Officers will notify communications immediately of any emergency situation and take appropriate
action.
Provide basic first aid.

Obtain medical assistance if necessary.
Obtain fire assistance.
Use the fire extinguisher in the patrol car, if necessary.
Escorting civilian vehicles is extremely dangerous and is prohibited.
When possible officers should call medical assistance to the location of an emergency.
PUSH BUMPERS
The installation of push bumpers on the squads is intended to relieve the officer of the physical strain
of manually removing a disabled vehicle obstructing traffic. An added benefit is that it is not
necessary to tie up two squads to achieve that purpose.
The push bumpers are designed to protrude approximately 6” beyond the squad bumper, therefore
allowing a good turning radius. This will also serve to avoid damage to the front of the squad.
In order to accomplish their purpose the push bumpers must be used in accordance with certain
guide lines:
To be used only to remove disabled vehicles obstructing traffic;
To remove disabled vehicles to the nearest safe place not obstructing traffic (parking lot, parking area
along curb, and side streets, etc.);
Not to be used to push vehicles for a long distance;

Not to be used to attempt to push start a stalled vehicle;
Not to be used to push vehicles that have an obstruction to free movement of any tire (locked brakes,
broken wheel mounts, damage from accidents, etc.); and
Disabled vehicles are to be pushed slowly and cautiously.
Abuse of the proper use of the push bumpers could result in damage to the squad and/or disciplinary
action.
Officers will complete the Motorist Assist Release form and have it signed before pushing the vehicle.
VEHICLE LOCK OUTS
Officers will make every reasonable attempt to assist a motorist who has locked their keys in their
vehicle.
Officers will use the Department issued vehicle entry tools.
Officers will complete the Motorist Assist Release form and have it signed before attempting entry to
the vehicle.
ORDER NUMBER: 4.606(a)
SUBJECT: ANCILLARY SERVICES
EFFECTIVE DATE: 1 March 1998
AUTHORITY: Chief Joseph Miller
REVIEW DATE: 1 March 2013
REVIEWER: Supervisor Traffic Safety Unit
INDEX AS:
61.4.1. ASSISTANCE TO HIGHWAY MOTORISTS

61.4.2. CORRECTION OF HIGHWAY HAZARDS
61.4.3. TOWING OF VEHICLES PROCEDURES
61.4.4 TRAFFIC SAFETY EDUCATIONAL MATERIALS
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this order is to establish policies and procedures related to the Department's ancillary
services. These services include providing assistance to highway users, public information and
directions, identifying and reporting roadway hazards, and procedures for the removal and towing of
vehicles.
ORDER:
61.4.1. ASSISTANCE TO HIGHWAY MOTORISTS
A. Disabled Vehicles.
Disabled vehicles on the roadway present a hazard both to the stranded motorists and to other
roadway users. For this reason, field personnel will offer reasonable assistance at all times to
motorists who appear to be in need of aid.
1. Police Department vehicles will not be utilized in any manner to "jump start" a disabled vehicle.
B. Use of Push Bumpers
Certain Department vehicles are equipped with push bumpers to promote the expedient removal of
disabled vehicles that are obstructing. It is the policy of the Orland Park Police Department to utilize
these patrol vehicles equipped with push bumpers to relocate certain obstructing vehicles from the
roadway in accordance with the following guidelines:
1. Push bumpers will be used only to relocate disabled vehicles that are obstructing traffic to the
nearest safe place not obstructing traffic (parking lot, parking area along curb, and side streets, etc.);
2. Push bumpers are not to be used to push vehicles for a long distance or used to attempt to push
start a stalled vehicle;
3. Push Bumpers are not to be used to push vehicles that have an obstruction to free movement of
any tire. (Locked brakes, broken wheel mounts, damage from accidents, etc.) and,
4. Disabled vehicles are to be pushed slowly and cautiously, with the pushed vehicle gear shift in
neutral and steered/controlled by a driver.
5. Push bumper and bumper of pushed vehicle must match, any vehicle with a bumper that is too
high will not be pushed with any Department vehicle;
6. The only vehicles to be pushed will be cars and vehicles with a maximum vehicle registered weight
of 8,000 pounds or less;
7. Abuse of the proper use of the push bumpers could result in damage to the vehicles and/or
disciplinary action.
C. Information and directions.
Personnel shall freely and courteously provide information and directions when asked, and shall
remain familiar with various services and facilities available to help motorists, such as 24 hour
gasoline stations, 24 hour restaurants, local hotels, etc.
D. Transportation.
Field personnel may, with supervisory approval, transport stranded motorists to the nearest
convenient location where assistance may be obtained.
E. Mechanical Assistance and Towing Service.
1. Anytime an officer encounters a motorist who requires the services of a tow company, the officer
will all reasonable attempts to assist the motorist in placing a call from any nearby phone in the field.
In the event it is impossible or impractical for the motorist to make the call the officer will;
a. Check with the motorist to ascertain if he has a preference for a local service station and request
the communications dispatcher to make notification.
b. If the motorist has no preference, or the service station cannot provide timely service, the officer
will advise the motorist that the
c. Department has arrangements with local tow companies to provide services.
d. If the motorist has no preference the officer will advise the communications dispatcher to contact
the tow service next on the tow service rotation list.
2. When an officer finds that a vehicle is left unattended upon a street or highway in violation of any of
the provisions regulating stopping, standing or parking AND constitutes a definite hazard or
obstruction to normal movement of traffic, such officer is authorized to move such vehicle, or require
the driver to move the vehicle, to a position off the road in accordance with the provisions set forth in
General Order
62.5, Motor Vehicle Towing Procedures.

F. Protection for Stranded Motorists.
1. Stranded motorists should not be left unattended when they appear to be exposed to hazardous
situations. Due consideration shall be afforded stranded motorists for factors that contribute to
hazardous conditions such as location, time of day or night, weather, and current priority of calls for
service. When circumstances preclude remaining with a motorist's vehicle, flares should be placed to
warn traffic and provide reasonable safety until the problem can be resolved.
2. Field personnel who assist stranded motorists should remain alert for the following possibilities:
a. The vehicle in the motorists' possession has not been authorized for their use.
b. The vehicle is in an unsafe operating condition.
c. The motorist is incapable of safely operating the vehicle.
d. The vehicle's occupants have engaged in recent criminal activity.
3. Field personnel who assist stranded motorists will communicate this to the Communications Center
so an incident report number can be assigned.
4. Motorists residing within a reasonable distance may, with the approval of the officer's supervisor,
be transported to their residences.
a. If the motorist to be transported is of the opposite sex, the Communications Center is to be advised
of the beginning and ending odometer reading as well as the motorist's address
b. If assistance cannot be obtained for the motorists, they may be transported to the lobby of the
police department where a telephone is available.
5. During adverse weather conditions, Department personnel shall make an effort to transport or
arrange for transportation for persons who are stranded.
G. Emergency Motorist Services.

1. Officers will notify communications immediately of any emergency situation and take appropriate
action.
2. Provide first aid.

a. Personnel who encounter medical emergencies are expected to provide reasonable assistance
within their capabilities to preserve life or protect property. Personnel shall notify the Communications
Center to send paramedics to the scene of medical emergencies.
b. Department personnel are not permitted to escort civilian vehicles to emergency health facilities.
3. Obtain fire assistance.

4. Utilize the fire extinguisher in the patrol car, when necessary.
61.4.2 CORRECTION OF HIGHWAY HAZARDS
A. During normal patrol activities, Department personnel must remain alert for unsafe or hazardous
conditions on the roadways. Hazardous roadway conditions that may be encountered include, but are
not limited to:
1. Debris on the roadway.

2. Defects in the roadway itself.
3. Lack of, or defects in, highway safety features.
4. Lack of, improper, visually obstructed, damaged, or nonworking mechanical traffic control
devices or informational signs.
5. Lack of or defective roadway lighting systems.
6. Disabled, abandoned or parked vehicles on the roadway.
B. Upon discovering an unsafe or hazardous condition on the roadway, Department personnel shall
take appropriate action which includes, but is not limited to:
1. Notifying the appropriate agency via the Communications Center.

2. Providing traffic control as needed.
3. Protecting the scene as appropriate.
4. Immediately rectifying the situation where feasible.
61.4.3. TOWING OF VEHICLE PROCEDURES

A. A procedure governing the towing of motor vehicles by Orland Park Police Officers is found in
General
Order 61.5., Motor Vehicle Towing Procedures.
61.4.4. TRAFFIC SAFETY EDUCATIONAL MATERIALS

A. The Department distributes educational materials on traffic safety, laws and regulations, drunk
driving prevention, seat belt/child restraint information, railroad crossing safety, pedestrian safety,
bike/motorcycle safety, and traffic safety programs to the public.
The purpose of these traffic educational materials is to enhance public understanding of safety
programs, and to support traffic enforcement efforts. With the ultimate goal being voluntary
compliance with traffic laws and regulations.
B. The materials may be distributed by personnel during public appearances or the materials may be
distributed by personnel working at the front desk upon request.
1. The lobby display rack contains these materials or additional information may be obtained from the
Traffic Safety Unit.
Title: HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INCIDENT Procedure: 4.607
PURPOSE:
To provide guidelines for hazardous material control.
POLICY:
Explosives, nonflammable and combustible liquids, gases, oxidizing materials, corrosive and disease
causing agents that are stored or transported are a potential risk to both life and property. It is the
goal of the Police Department to minimize the adverse effects of these hazardous materials upon the
community.
PROCEDURE:
RESPONSIBILITY
The Fire Department will be responsible for the investigation, control, removal, and reporting of
hazardous material incidents to the appropriate state and federal agencies.
The Police Department is responsible for the investigation and reporting of traffic accidents involving
hazardous materials. The Police Department will provide other such assistance, to the Fire
Department, as may be required to ensure the continuing safety and well being of the community.
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION
This is usually accomplished directly or indirectly by the descriptive data in shipping documents,
container markings, package labels, and vehicle placards.
If this information is not readily obtainable due to an incapacitated driver or destruction of a bill of
lading or other shipping papers, immediately contact the Chemical Transportation Emergency Center
(CHEMTREC) 800-424-9300.
CHEMTREC provides technical expertise in handling hazardous material emergencies.
CHEMTREC also provides additional phone numbers for emergencies such as accidental poisoning.
FIRST OFFICER RESPONSE
Officers should not enter into the area of a spillage or leak.
Relay the following information to the Communications Center:

Type of incident (railway, highway, factory);
Basic description (explosion, fire, etc.);
Exact location;
Name of hazardous material and class;
Quantity involved.
Without risk of exposure or injury to the officer, an attempt to rescue persons in the hazard area
should be made.
Avoid inhalation of all gases, fumes, and smoke. Stand upwind of scene.
Detour all traffic around the scene. Avoid the use of flares. Traffic cones and barricades are
preferred for traffic control.
6. Stop all unauthorized personnel from entering the scene.
NOTIFICATION
The communication’s operator shall immediately notify the following when advised of a hazardous
material incident:
The Fire Department.
Additional personnel as requested by the watch commander.
Chief of Police.
EVACUATION
The evacuation of persons and protection of property should be the first priority in an effected area.
Careful thought should be given to what danger or hazard is posed to the people living or working in
the immediate area or its proximity. To determine the proper course of action, a number of factors
must be taken into account, including weather conditions, population and traffic patterns.
The decision to evacuate will be made by the ranking police and fire officials on the scene.
The evacuation area may be enlarged as conditions change and time permits.
Every effort shall be made to prevent outsiders and nonessential personnel from entering the
evacuated area until an all clear is given by the Fire Department. To the greatest extent possible, this
will be accomplished through road blocks and police patrols.
EMERGENCY FIRST AID
Segregate and detain those who have possibly been in contact with the hazardous materials until
they can be examined. Obtain names and addresses of those involved.
Remove the injured from the area of the accident with as little contact as possible. Hold them at a
transfer point.
Take measures necessary to save life, but only carry out that first aid necessary to preserve life until
medical help arrives.
If the officer comes in contact with any of the suspected dangerous material, medical assistance
should be sought immediately.
If clothing becomes contaminated seek medical assistance for proper disposal.

Title: TOWING VEHICLES Procedure: 4.608
PURPOSE:
To provide guidelines for the towing, safeguarding and disposing of vehicles.
To establish guidelines for the inventory of property from vehicles searched incident to a custodial
arrest.
POLICY:
Officers are encouraged to provide assistance to motorists when the need arises for towing services,
and institute enforcement action when they observe illegally parked vehicles, traffic obstructions and
abandoned vehicles or when towing a vehicle incident to an arrest. The towing of vehicles from
Village streets is done in accordance with applicable State statutes and Village ordinances
PROCEDURE
GENERAL GUIDELINES
1. When a vehicle left unattended upon a street or highway is found in violation of any of the
provisions regulating stopping, standing, or parking, and constitutes a definite hazard or obstruction to
normal movement of traffic, officers may remove such vehicle, or require the driver or other person in
charge of the vehicle to remove it from the roadway.
2. Officers may, with watch commander approval remove and/or impound or cause to be
removed promptly to an authorized impound yard or other place of safety, any vehicle found upon a
street or highway under the following circumstances:
A report has been made that the vehicle was stolen or taken without the owner's consent; or
The vehicle is so disabled as to constitute an obstruction to traffic and the person in charge of the
vehicle is unable to provide for its custody or prompt removal i.e., motor vehicle crashes; or
The driver of the vehicle is taken into custody by the Police Department and the vehicle would be left
unattended upon the street.
Removal of the vehicle is necessary in the interest of public safety because of fire, flood, storm, snow,
or other emergency reasons.
3. For every vehicle towed or impounded, a Motor Vehicle Impoundment and Inventory report will
be completed unless the tow was by owners request.
4 All vehicles towed or impounded shall be checked through LEADS and NCIC.
All vehicles towed without owner notification shall be entered into LEADS as towed/impounded.
Officers shall report to their immediate supervisor the name of any tow company who either
renders poor service or is incapable of providing quality service because of inadequate equipment or
personnel.
CUSTODIAL ARREST
1. Following a custodial arrest, the officer will determine if the arrestee’s vehicle is to be
impounded. If it is, the officer will:
Request permission from the watch commander.
Request that a tow truck be dispatched to the location.
Perform an inventory search of the vehicle, including the glove compartment, any unlocked
containers, and the trunk.
A Motor Vehicle Impoundment and Inventory report will be completed.
Items of value that are not a component part of the vehicle will be listed on a Property Evidence
report and placed into evidence if the owner is unable to properly secure them. Examples of valuable
items are: wallets, purses, portable stereos, money, jewelry, expensive clothing.
If contraband or evidence of a crime is found, a separate Property Evidence report will be completed
for these items.
2. When an officer makes a custodial arrest, and the vehicle is not to be towed or impounded, the
officer may have the vehicle legally parked and locked near the scene of the arrest. The arresting
officer will notify communications where the vehicle will be parked and document its location in the
incident report and on the Lock Up report.
If the driver does not wish to leave his vehicle, or if in the officer’s opinion the driver is not mentally
responsible or the vehicle cannot be safely parked off the roadway so as not to cause a hazard, the
officer will have the vehicle towed.
MOTORIST ASSIST
1. Anytime an officer encounters a motorist who requires the services of a tow company, the
officer will:
Check with the motorist to ascertain if he has a preference for a local tow company and request the
radio operator to make notification.
Advise the motorist that if their choice of a tow company cannot provide timely service, and the
vehicle presents a hazard, the Department has arrangements with local tow companies to provide
services.
The motorist shall have the opportunity to select the Tow Company desired from those authorized by
the Department to tow vehicles.
If the motorist has no preference the officer will advise the radio operator to contact the tow service
next on the list.
2. While awaiting the arrival of the tow truck, the officer will provide protection for the disabled
vehicle by either having a police unit, equipped with a push bar, push the vehicle to a safe location or,
position his vehicle, with emergency lights activated, between the disabled vehicle and other traffic.
The officer will remain in such position until a tow truck arrives or if the officer feels his presence is
not necessary, he may place safety flares behind the disabled vehicle and resume patrol.
Communications should be advised of the location and pending arrival of services for the disabled
vehicle.
If necessary and time permits, the officer will provide transportation for the motorist and passengers
to a place of safety.
WRECKED, NON-OPERATING and ABANDONED VEHICLES
1. No person shall abandon any vehicle within the Village and no person shall leave any vehicle
at any place within the Village for such a time and under such circumstances as to cause such
vehicle reasonably to appear to have been abandoned.
2. No person shall leave any partially dismantled, non-operating, wrecked, or junked vehicle on
any street or highway within the Village.
3. Any vehicle in a state of disrepair rendering the vehicle incapable of being safely driven or one
that does not have a current annual vehicle license and tag purchased for it and attached thereto
(except vehicles for sale by new and used motor vehicle dealers and vehicle repair shops); or other
vehicles that have not been removed or used for 48 consecutive hours or more, are considered to be
abandoned.
4. A police officer who observes a vehicle which is wrecked, non-operating or abandoned as

defined above will:
Make an attempt to contact the registered owner to have the vehicle moved.
Initiate an Abandoned Vehicle Information report indicating the location of the abandoned vehicle, a
full description of the vehicle including any license information or municipal sticker number, and any
owner information obtained.
5. The report will then be forwarded to the Shift supervisor or his designee, for investigation.
6. A police officer towing an abandoned vehicle will complete a Motor Vehicle Impoundment and
Inventory report.
The Chief of Police or his designee

Will be responsible for maintaining a liaison with the tow companies and processing all Motor Vehicle
Impoundment and Inventory reports. If all attempts to contact the owner fail, the vehicle will be
disposed of according to law.
RELEASING IMPOUNDED VEHICLES

1. All vehicles, which are impounded and indicated as eligible for release, may be released to
the owner or his agent upon showing proof of ownership.
2. Vehicles, which are impounded and indicated as NOT eligible for release, may not be released
without a Towed Vehicle Release Order authorized by the officer in charge of the case, or a
supervisor.
ORDER NUMBER: 4.609
SUBJECT: RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
EFFECTIVE DATE: 1 October 2003
AUTHORITY: Chief Joe Miller
REVIEW DATE: 1 March 2010
REVIEWER: Unit Supervisor; Training Development and Review
INDEX AS:
46.6.1 Respirator Selection Protocol
46.6.2 Administration of Respiratory Protection Program
46.6.3 Medical Evaluation Procedures
46.6.4 Fit Testing Protocols
46.6.5 Use of Respirator
46.6.6 Respiratory Protection Training
46.6.7 Record Keeping Requirements
46.6.8 Program Evaluation
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this General Order is to establish guidelines for the development, implementation and
maintenance of a respiratory protection program for employees of the Palos Park Police Department.
This order shall set forth specific procedures and protocols for required respirator use.
POLICY STATEMENT:
The Department will continue to make every effort to supply members with safe and effective
equipment that will enable them to provide professional police service in most situations and
environments. While it is more important than ever for officers to be committed to the safety of the
community they serve, officers must also understand the limitations of the equipment that is available
to them. The respirator equipment (APR) provided for in this program is intended to protect members
in limited and temporary conditions and as a means of escape only.
A particulate filtering mask (N-95) is also issued to all sworn personnel. Procedures governing the
use of the particulate mask are covered in the order 84.3, RESPONDING TO SUSPICIOUS
PACKAGES AND LETTER
(Biological Agents).
DEFINITIONS:
Air-purifying respirator (APR): A device designed to protect the user by employing filters or sorbents
to remove harmful substances from the air. Air-purifying respirators DO NOT supply oxygen and
MUST NOT be used in oxygen deficient atmospheres or in environments where substances
“immediately dangerous to life and health” may be encountered. Air-purifying respirators are designed
to protect the wearer for short periods ONLY.
Atmosphere-supplying respirator: a respirator that admits breathing air to the face piece only when a
negative pressure is created inside the face piece by inhalation.
Canister or Cartridge: a container with a filter, sorbent, or catalyst, or combination of these items,
which removes specific contaminants from the air passed through the container.
Employee exposure: exposure to a concentration of an airborne contaminant that would occur if the
employee were not using respiratory protection.
Escape-only respirator: a respirator intended to be used only for emergency exit.
Fit factor: a quantitative estimate of the fit of a particular respirator to a specific individual, and
typically estimates the ratio of the concentration pf a substance in ambient air to its concentration
inside the respirator when worn.
Fit test: the use of a protocol to qualitatively or quantitatively evaluate the fit of a respirator on an
individual. Immediately dangerous to life (IDLH): an atmosphere that poses an immediate threat to
life, would cause irreversible adverse health effects, or would impair an individual’s ability to escape
from a dangerous atmosphere. Licensed Health Care Professional (LHCP): includes medical doctor,
registered nurse, paramedic or EMT.
Qualitative fit test (QLFT): a pass/fail test to assess the adequacy of respirator fit that relies on the
individual’s response to a test agent.
Quantitative fit test (QNFT): an assessment of respirator fit by numerically measuring the amount of
leakage into the respirator.
Service life: the period of time that a respirator, filter or sorbent, or other respiratory equipment
provides adequate protection to the wearer.
User seal check: an action conducted by the respirator user to determine if the respirator is properly
seated to the face.
ORDER:
46.6.1 RESPIRATOR SELECTION PROTOCOL
A. The Palos Park Police Department will select and provide an appropriate respirator that is
adequate to protect the health of the employee and ensure compliance with all OSHA statutory and
regulatory requirements.
1. The Department will evaluate potential respiratory hazard(s) that officers maybe exposed to;
identify relevant factors, and base respirator selection on these factors. The following considerations
shall be taken into account;
a. Correctly matching the respirator with the reasonably foreseen potential hazard and the officer’s
assignment,
b. Consideration of the unit’s effectiveness to reduce exposure to the officer under all reasonably
foreseen conditions,
c. Choosing a device, which will allow officers to perform their duties with the least amount of physical
burden.
d. Any device selected shall be a NIOSH-certified respirator and will be used in compliance with the
conditions of its certification.
2. In efforts to select an appropriate respirator the Department will consider any available information
from other sources such as,
a. State and federal emergency management agencies,
b. State, federal and local fire service personnel,

c. Other law enforcement agencies, including the U.S. Justice Department and the Illinois State
Police.
3. Respirators for IDLH atmospheres.
a. Any APR respirator provided to personnel is intended only for escape from IDLH atmospheres.
b. Specially trained members of the Special Response Team may be issued an atmosphere-
supplying respirator.
46.6.2 ADMINISTRATION OF RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM
A. The Training, Development and Review supervisor is designated to administer the Respiratory
Protection Program.
46.6.3 MEDICAL EVALUATIN PROCEDURES.
A. Prior to being issued an APR, employees shall complete a medical evaluation questionnaire
(Appendix A). The questionnaire will be forwarded directly to the designated LHCP for review as
required by OSHA/IDOL Standard.
1. The Midwest Environmental Medicine office is designated as the LHCP for the purposes of the
Respiratory Protection Program.
2. The Department provides a periodic medical evaluation for each sworn employee through the
Midwest Environmental Medicine office in accordance with the procedures of the Physical Fitness
Program (General Order 22.3. Section 1 MEDICAL EXAMINATIONS).
a. This periodic medical evaluation, along with the review of the medical questionnaire, will be
used by the LHCP to evaluate the employee’s ability to use a respirator, before the employee is
required to use the respirator in the field.
3. If the LHCP determines a medical condition of an employee may restrict their ability to safely wear
a respirator, the LHCP will provide for the a follow-up contact with the employee.
4. After consulting with the employee, the determining physician will then communicate the findings,
regarding the employee’s ability to safely wear and use the APR, to the Chief of Police.
B. Records of medical evaluations required by this section must be completed and retained in
accordance with OSHA/IDOL Standards.
46.6.4 FIT TESTING PROTOCOLS
A. Prior to the use of any respirator in the field, employees will be fit tested with the same make,
model, style and size of respirator that will be used. The primary purpose for fit testing is to identify
the specific respirator, best suited for each individual user. Fit testing procedures will be performed in
a manner to reinforce respirator training by having wearers review proper methods of donning and
wearing this equipment.
1. The Department shall establish a record of the qualitative and/or quantitative fit test administered to
each employee issued a respirator to include;
a. The name or identification of the employee tested;
b. Type of fit test performed;
c. Specific make, model, style, and size of the respirator tested;
d. Date of the fit test; and
e. The pass/fail results for QLFTs or the fit factor and data of the test results for QNFTs.
B. Fit Testing Procedures
All fit testing procedures shall be facilitated by a specially trained individual and done in accordance
with the Fit
Testing Procedure requirements found in the OSHA/IDOL Standards (29 CFR 1910.134 App A).
C. All employees issued a respirator shall be fit tested prior to initial use in the field and annually
thereafter.
46.6.5 USE OF RESPIRATOR
A. Respirator Equipment Issued.
1. All sworn employees will be issued and personally assigned the following equipment as part of the
Department Respiratory Protection Program;
One Avon FM 12 Respirator with harness
One Avon filter canister
One carrying pouch
One User handbook
2. Use of prescription eyewear (glasses or contacts) is not recommended for use with an APR
Respirator. Personnel who wear prescription corrective eyewear, to correct their normal vision, will be
provided with monocle inserts for the issued respirator. These individuals will be provided prescription
eyeglass for the monocle through an optometrist chosen by the Department, at no cost to the
individual.
a. Personnel who require monocle inserts for corrective lenses in their respirator will make
arrangements through the program administrator for production of the inserts to their prescription.
Note: This Avon equipment is intended solely as an escape only respirator.
3. The Department is equipped with a limited supply of atmosphere-supplying respirator (SCBA)

equipment issued only to specially trained officers of the Special Response Team.
1) The Department SCBA equipment shall be stored in the Special Response Team equipment area
2) The maintenance and operational readiness of this equipment shall be the responsibility of the
Special Response Team Leader, or designee.
3) Only specially trained Special Response Team members will use this equipment.
B. Individually Assigned (Avon) Equipment Availability

1. All sworn personnel are firmly advised to have their respirator equipment immediately accessible to
them at all times.
2. Personnel shall carry respirator equipment appropriately on their person under the following
conditions;
a. When directed by the Chief of Police, or designee, or
b. When the United States Office of Homeland Security issues a warning in accordance with the
Color Coded Advisory System as follows;
1) Condition Red (Severe)

C. Respirator Storage, Maintenance, and Service Life Issues.
1. Storage of Respirator Individually assigned officers shall be responsible for the storage and
readiness of their respirator equipment at all times. Officers shall follow the storage guidelines
provided in the user handbook to assure equipment readiness and effectiveness.
2. Service Life Issues Canisters are issued in factory sealed plastic bags. The canister is to remain
sealed in the bag until needed. The normal service life of the canister sealed in the bag is ten (10)
years. Once the canister is removed from the sealed bag the service life is reduced to approximately
one (1) year)
3. Maintenance and Inspection

1. Employees shall be responsible for cleaning the respirator after each use and replacing filter
canisters when necessary.
2. Cleaning will be done in accordance with the procedures found in the handbook and discussed in
training.
D. Limitations on Respirator Use
1. The Avon FM 12 respirator shall not be used for firefighting or other oxygen deficient environments.
2. The Avon FM 12 respirator is intended primarily for uses as a means of emergency escape in an
incident involving nuclear, biological, or chemical hazards.
E Use of Respirators
1. Whenever sworn employees reasonably believe that an imminent threat of a nuclear, biological, or
chemical nature exists they should remove the respirator and canister from the carrying case, remove
the canister from the sealed bag and affix it to the respirator. They should then put on the respirator.
2. After putting the respirator on, the employee should ensure that a proper seal exists by performing
a negative pressure test as demonstrated in training.
3. Employees should then, as soon as reasonably possible, remove themselves from the environment
of the threat and not remove the respirator until they are reasonably sure that they are no longer in
the threatened environment.
4. Employees must maintain the seal of the respirator in the event they are unable to immediately
remove themselves, until the incident is resolved or they are able to escape.
46.6.6 RESPIRTORY PROTECTION TRAINING
A. The Program Administrator shall develop and implement a training program that will be attended Commented [BH1]:
by all employees issued a respirator, initially and annually thereafter or more frequently, if necessary.
1. The training program will include the following information;
a. Demonstrations and practical exercises of methods for donning and adjusting respirators.
b. Discussion of the capabilities and limitations of issued respirators.
c. Inspection/testing of issued respirators for proper fit and seal.
d. Maintenance and storage of respirators.
e. Recognizing medical signs and symptoms that may limit or prevent the effective use of a
respirator.
2. Refresher training shall be conducted on an annual basis.
46.6.7 RECORD KEEPING REQUIREMENTS

A. The Administrator will establish and retain written information regarding medical evaluations, fit
testing, and the respirator program. The record keeping practice is designed to facilitate the
involvement of employees in the program, assist the Department in the evaluation of the
effectiveness and adequacy of the program and provide a record for compliance with OSHA/IDOL
Standards.
46.6.8 PROGRAM EVALUATION

The Respiratory Protection Program will be evaluated on an annual basis to determine the
effectiveness of the program. The Program Administrator will be responsible for conducting the
evaluation and recommending modifications to the program.
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM

Palos Park Police Department
It shall be the policy of the Palos Park Police Department to provide officers with guidelines for the
use and care of full-face respirators made available to them by the department. This equipment is to
enable officers to escape from a contaminated area during a weapon of mass destruction event. This
level of protection is specifically for use outside of an identified contaminated “Hot Zone Area.”
This directive consists of the following numbered sections:
General Policy Statements

Definitions
Selection of Respirators
Administration of Respiratory Protection Program
Medical Evaluations
Fit Testing Procedures
Use of Respirators
Maintenance and Inspection
Training
Program Evaluation
Recordkeeping
I. GENERAL POLICY STATEMENTS
It is the policy of the Palos Park Police Department to provide for the protection of members in an
incident involving nuclear, biological or chemical weapons.
All sworn personnel and all civilian personnel assigned to patrol duties shall be issued an APR
respirator and filtering canister, for use in any incident where it is suspected that a nuclear, biological
or chemical weapon has been used.
All personnel will follow the procedures taught at issuance when using the respirator. In addition, the
manufacturer’s user handbook will be read by all personnel receiving the respirator as issued
equipment.
For respirators maintained for emergency use, the Respiratory Program Administrator must:
1. Certify the respirator by documenting date of inspection, name of inspector, findings,

remedial action, and a serial number or other means of identifying the inspected respirator; and
2. Provide this information on a tag or label attached to the respirator storage

compartment, kept with the respirator, or included with inspection reports stored as paper or
electronic reports.
It is the responsibility of the recipient of this equipment to maintain it in a clean and good working
order and to report, to their immediate supervisor, any problems with the equipment or personal
conditions that may affect their ability to use such equipment safely.
DEFINITIONS
Air Purifying Respirator (APR) – A respirator to be used in toxic environments where the breathable
level of oxygen is known to be sufficient. Air-purifying respirators are designed to protect the wearer
for short periods ONLY.
Assigned Protection Factor (APF) – The workplace level of respiratory protection that a respirator or
class of respirators is expected to provide to employees when the employer implements a continuing,
effective respiratory protection program.
Canister or Cartridge – A container with a filter, sorbent, or catalyst, or combination of these items,
which removes specific contaminants from the air passed through the container.
Emergency Situation – Any occurrence such as, but not limited to, equipment failure, rupture of
containers, or failure of control equipment that may or does result in an uncontrolled significant
release of an airborne contaminant.
Employee Exposure – Exposure to a concentration of an airborne contaminant that would occur if the
employee were not using respiratory protection.
End-of-Service-Life Indicator (ESLI) – A system that warns the respirator user of the approach of the
end of adequate respiratory protection, for example, that the sorbent is approaching saturation or is
no longer effective.
Escape-Only Respirator – Means a respirator intended to be used only for emergency exit.
Fit Factor – A quantitative estimate of the fit of a particular respirator to a specific individual and
typically estimates the ratio of the concentration of a substance in ambient air to its concentration
inside the respirator when worn.
Fit Test – A test to ensure that an issued respirator is the proper size for the wearer and that an air
tight seal is achieved between their face and the respirator in order to determine a correct respirator
size and fit.
Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (IDLH) – An atmosphere that poses an immediate threat to
life, would cause irreversible adverse health effects, or would impair an individual’s ability to escape
from a dangerous atmosphere.
Maximum Use Concentration (MUC) – The maximum atmospheric concentration of a hazardous

substance from which an employee can be expected to be protected when wearing a respirator, and
is determined by the assigned protection factor of the respirator or class of respirators and the
exposure limit of the hazardous substance. The MUC can be determined mathematically by
multiplying the assigned protection factor specified for a respirator by the required OSHA permissible
exposure limit, short-term exposure limit, or ceiling limit. When no OSHA exposure limit is available
for a hazardous substance, an employer must determine an MUC on the basis of relevant available
information and informed judgment.
Oxygen Deficient Atmosphere – An atmosphere with oxygen content below 19.5% by volume.
Physician or Other Licensed Health Care Professional (PLHCP) – Means an individual whose legally
permitted scope of practice (i.e., license, registration, or certification) allows him or her to
independently provide, or be delegated the responsibility to provide some or all of the health care
services required under Section V of this policy.
Program Administrator – The administrator of the Respiratory Protection Program.
Qualitative Fit Test (QLFT) – A pass/fail test to assess the adequacy of respirator fit that relies on the
individual’s response to a test agent.
Quantitative Fit Test (QNFT) – An assessment of respirator fit by numerically measuring the amount
of leakage into the respirator.
Service Life – The period of time that a respirator, filter or sorbent, or other respiratory equipment
provides adequate protection to the wearer.
User Seal Check – An action conducted by the respirator user to determine if the respirator is
properly seated to the face.
SELECTION OF RESPIRATORS
The Department selected the AVON FM-12 Air-Purifying Respirator. This respirator is also widely
used by the military for respiratory protection and with the issued canister will protect the wearer from
nuclear, biological, and chemical respiratory threats for a limited amount of time.
If air-purifying respirators are used, then the respirator must be equipped with an End-of-Service-Life
Indicator (ESLI) or a filter change schedule must be implemented. This filter change schedule must
be based on objective information and described in the respirator program.
For protection against gases and vapors, either atmosphere-supplying respirators or air-purifying
respirators must be provided. If air-purifying respirators are used, they must be equipped with filters
certified by NIOSH 42 CFR Part 84. Their use will be in accordance with NIOSH 42 CFR Part 84 and
according to the NIOSH Respirator Decision Logic Sequence and NIOSH Flow Chart.
Assigned Protection Factors (APFs)
Must use APFs listed in Table 1 (see below) to select a respirator that meets or exceeds the required
level of employee protection.
When using a combination respirator, e.g. airline respirators with an air-purifying filter, employers
must ensure that the APF is appropriate to the mode of operation in which the respirator is being
used.
Table 1 - Assigned Protection Factors5

Type of Respirator 1, 2 Quarter Half Full Helmet/ Loose-
mask mask facepiece hood fitting
facepiece
Air-Purifying Respirator 5 310 50 ………. ………….
Powered Air-Purifying Respirator ……….. 50 1,000 425/1,000 25
(PAPR)
Supplied-Air Respirator (SAR) or
Airline Respirator
Demand mode ………… 10 50 …………. …………
Continuous Flow mode ………… 50 1,000 425/1,000
25
Pressure-demand or other positive- ………… 50 1,000 ………… …………
pressure mode
Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus
(SCBA)
Demand mode ………… 10 50 50 ………….
Pressure-demand or other positive- ………… ……….. 10,000 10,000 ………….
pressure mode (e.g., open/closed
circuit)
Notes:
1Employers may select respirators assigned for use in higher workplace concentrations of a
hazardous substance for use at lower concentrations of that substance, or when required respirator
use is independent of concentration.
2The assigned protection factors in Table 1 are only effective when the employer implements a
continuing, effective respirator program as required by this section (29 CFR 1910.134), including
training, fit testing, maintenance, and use requirements.
3This APF category includes filtering facepieces, and half masks with elastomeric facepieces.
4The employer must have evidence provided by the respirator manufacturer that testing of these
respirators demonstrates performance at a level of protection of 1,000 or greater to receive an APF of

1,000. This level of performance can best be demonstrated by performing a WPF or SWPF study or
equivalent testing. Absent such testing, all other PAPRs and SARs with helmets/hoods are to be
treated as loose-fitting facepiece respirators, and receive an APF of 25.
5These APFs do not apply to respirators used solely for escape. For escape respirators used in
association with specific substances covered by 29 CFR 1910 subpart Z, employers must refer to the
appropriate substance-specific standards in that subpart. Escape respirators for other IDLH
atmospheres are specified by 29 CFR 1910.134 (d) (2) (ii).
Maximum Use Concentration (MUC)
The employer must select a respirator for employee use that maintains the employee’s exposure to
the hazardous substance, when measured outside the respirator, at or below the MUC.
Employers must not apply MUCs to conditions that are IDLH; instead, they must use respirators listed
in section V. A. 2. a. of this policy.
When the calculated MUC exceeds the IDLH level for a hazardous substance or the performance
limits of the cartridge or canister, then employers must set the maximum MUC at the lower limit.
IV. ADMINISTRATION OF RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM
The department [Insert title here] is designated to administer the Respiratory Protection Program.
MEDICAL EVALUATIONS
Using a respirator may place a physiological burden on employees that varies with the type of
respirator worn, the job, and workplace conditions in which the respirator is used, and the medical
status of the employee.
Prior to the issuing of an APR Respirator, to any employee, a medical evaluation questionnaire
(Appendix 1) will be completed by the employee. The evaluation form will contain the mandatory
OSHA questions.
Each evaluation form will be completed and turned over to the Program Administrator who will handle
the information in a confidential manner. In addition, the Program Administrator will complete a
Medical Evaluation Supplemental Information Form (See Appendix 2) for each employee. The
Program Administrator will then submit both forms to a licensed healthcare professional (LHCP) for
review, as required by OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1910.134 (e) (1) through (e) (7) and Appendix C of
same.
If the PLHCP needs to clarify any question, he/she will contact the employee directly.
If the PLHCP feels a medical condition of the employee may restrict their ability to safely wear and
use a respirator, the employee must submit to further examination.
After consulting with the employee, the physician will then be requested to communicate their findings
with the Chief of Police regarding the employee’s ability to safely wear and use the respirator.
All employees who have passed the medical evaluation must be fit-tested according to OSHA
standards and guidelines.
The medical evaluation questionnaire and PLHCP’s report will be maintained, on file, with the
Administration Department for the Village of Palos Park.
The Palos Park Police Department will, if an employee is not able to wear the respirator, per
the physician, that employee will be removed from any contaminated “Hot Zone Area” and
reassigned to a safe zone by the shift supervisor.
FIT-TESTING PROCEDURES
At the time of initial issuance and thereafter on an annual basis, a respirator fit-test shall be used
to determine the ability of each member to obtain a satisfactory fit with the issued APR, as required
by OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1410.134 (f) (1) through (f) (8) (iii) and Appendix A of same.
Fit testing will be conducted by a trained employee within the department.
Fit testing will be conducted using the qualitative method.
A written record of the fit-test will be completed (Appendix 3) and maintained by the Program
Administrator of the Respiratory Protection Program.
Any facial hair must not come between the sealing surfaces of the face piece or interfere with the
valve function. In order to meet this OSHA requirement, sideburns that extend to the sealing surface
are prohibited, as well as any mustaches which extend beyond the lip line. Beards and goatees are
prohibited as well.
USE OF RESPIRATORS
Each sworn officer, and civilian assigned to patrol duties, will be issued the following equipment:
One Avon FM-12 Respirator
One NBC & Toxic Agent Filter Canister
One Canvass bag
Use of Prescription Eyewear
Use of prescription eyeglasses is not recommended for use with an APR Respirator.
Personnel who wear prescription eyeglasses, to correct their normal vision, will be provided with
monocle inserts for the respirator that have been made to the individual’s eyewear prescription by an
optometrist of the Department’s choosing, at no cost to the individual.
Personnel who need monocle inserts for their respirators will make arrangement with the Program
Administrator for production of the inserts to their prescription.
Whenever an employee reasonably believes that an imminent threat of a nuclear, biological, or
chemical nature exists they should put on the respirator along with the canister that was provided with
it.
Canisters are to remain in their sealed bag until needed. The normal shelf life of a canister in a
sealed bag is 10 years. Once the canister has been removed from the sealed bag, the shelf life is
reduced to approximately 1 year.
After putting the respirator on, the employee should ensure that is has a proper seal by performing a
negative pressure test as demonstrated in training, as required by OSHA Regulation 29 CFR
1910.134 (g) (1) (iii) and Appendix B-1 of same, or procedures recommended by the respirator
manufacturer that the employer demonstrates are as effective as those in Appendix B-1.
If possible, employees should remove themselves from the area of the threat before taking off the
respirator.
If the employee is unable to be removed from the threat area, it is imperative that the respirator
remains intact and properly seals the face throughout the duration of the incident.
Palos Park utilizes the Color Coded Advisory System used by the US DHS below:
Condition Green (Normal) and Condition Blue (Guarded): carrying of respirators is
discretionary on the part of the employee.
Condition Yellow (Significant risk of a terrorism attack, but no specific threat): which the
United States has been operating under most of the time since September 11, 2001. The
carrying of respirators is left to the discretion of the individual.
Condition Orange (High risk of terrorist attack. A credible threat to the State of Illinois has
been identified): All personnel who have been issued a respirator will include the respirator in
the equipment the individual carries in their assigned vehicle.
Condition Red (Severe risk of terrorist attack. An incident of Weapons of Mass Destruction
has already occurred in Illinois or an attempt is imminent): All personnel who have been
issued a respirator will carry it on their person while on duty until further notice.
Department personnel may be required to carry the respirator at other times when directed
by supervisory personnel.
VIII. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

Cleaning
Employees shall be responsible for cleaning the respirator after each use and replacing the filters
when necessary.
Cleaning will be done according to the procedures set forth in the training conducted for the
Respiratory Protection Program.
Documentation
For respirators maintained for emergency use, the Respiratory Program Administrator must:
certify the respirator by documenting date of inspection, name of inspector, findings, remedial action,
and a serial number or other means of identifying the inspected respirator; and provide this
information on a tag or label attached to the respirator storage compartment, kept with the respirator,
or included with inspection reports stored as paper or electronic reports.
TRAINING
All sworn personnel, and civilian personnel assigned to patrol duties, shall be trained prior to using a
respirator.
Training shall cover the proper use of the respirators, including:
The unit’s limitations and capabilities.
Checking proper fit and seal.
Recognizing medical signs and symptoms which may limit or prevent the effective use of the
respirator.
Putting the respirator on.
Putting the canister on the respirator.
Taking off the respirator.
Storage of the respirator.
Proper care and cleaning.
Refresher training will be conducted on an annual basis and more often if the Respiratory Protection
Program Administrator deems necessary.
PROGRAM EVALUATION
The Respiratory Protection Program will be evaluated on an annual basis.
The purpose of the evaluation will be to determine the effectiveness of the program.
The Program Administrator will be responsible for conducting the evaluation and making any changes
to the program based on feedback from the evaluation.
RECORDKEEPING
Retain records of medical evaluations and fit testing results (required by OSHA Regulations 29 CFR
1910.134 and 29 CFR 1910.1020) for at least 5 years.
Retain a written copy of the current respiratory protection program and all previous respiratory
protection programs covering the previous 5 years.
Make all retained written materials available upon written request to affected employees and to the
Illinois Department of Labor (IDOL), Division of Safety and Health, for examination and copying
according to HIPAA.
NOTE: 2014 Palos Park Police shall utilize the 3M's Online Respirator Medical Evaluation Service,
OSHA Respirator Medical Examination Questionnaire
To the employer: Answers to questions in Section 1, and to question 9 in Section 2 of Part A,

do not require a medical examination.
To the employee: Can you read? (circle one) Yes No
Your employer must allow you to answer this questionnaire during normal working hours, or
at a time and place that is convenient to you. To maintain your confidentiality, your employer
or supervisor must not look at or review your answers, and your employer must tell you how
to deliver or send this questionnaire to the health care professional who will review it.
Part A. Section 1. (Mandatory) The following information must be provided by every employee who
has been selected to use any type of respirator (please print).
Today's date: __________________________________________________________
Your name: __________________________________________________________
Your age (to nearest year): ______________________________________________
Sex (circle one): Male Female
Your height: __________ ft. __________ in.
Your weight: ____________ lbs.
Your job title: __________________________________________________________
A phone number where you can be reached by the health care professional who reviews this
questionnaire (include the Area Code): ___________________________________
The best time to phone you at this number: ___________________________________
10. Has your employer told you how to contact the health care professional who will review this
questionnaire? (circle one) Yes No
11. Check the type of respirator you will use (you can check more than one category):
a. ______ N, R, or P disposable respirator (filter-mask, non- cartridge type only).
b. ______ Other type (for example, half- or full-facepiece type, powered-air purifying,
supplied-air, self-contained breathing apparatus).
12. Have you worn a respirator? (circle one) Yes No
If "yes," what type(s): ________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________
Part A. Section 2. (Mandatory) Questions 1 through 9 below must be answered by every employee
who has been selected to use any type of respirator (please circle "yes" or "no").
Do you currently smoke tobacco, or have you smoked tobacco

in the last month?…………………………………………………………………………Yes No
2. Have you ever had any of the following conditions?

a. Seizures (fits): Yes No
b. Diabetes (sugar disease): Yes No
c. Allergic reactions that interfere with your breathing: Yes No
d. Claustrophobia (fear of closed-in places): Yes No
e. Trouble smelling odors: Yes No
3. Have you ever had any of the following pulmonary or lung problems?
a. Asbestosis: Yes No
b. Asthma: Yes No
c. Chronic bronchitis: Yes No
d. Emphysema: Yes No
e. Pneumonia: Yes No
f. Tuberculosis: Yes No
g. Silicosis: Yes No
h. Pneumothorax (collapsed lung): Yes No
i. Lung cancer: Yes No
j. Broken ribs: Yes No
k. Any chest injuries or surgeries: Yes No
l. Any other lung problem that you've been told about: Yes No
4. Do you currently have any of the following symptoms of pulmonary or lung illness?
a. Shortness of breath: Yes No
b. Shortness of breath when walking fast on level ground or walking up a slight
hill or incline: ………………………………………………………………………… Yes No
c. Shortness of breath when walking with other people at an ordinary pace on
level ground: Yes No
d. Have to stop for breath when walking at your own pace on level ground: Yes No
e. Shortness of breath when washing or dressing yourself: Yes No
f. Shortness of breath that interferes with your job: Yes No
g. Coughing that produces phlegm (thick sputum): Yes No
h. Coughing that wakes you early in the morning: Yes No
i. Coughing that occurs mostly when you are lying down: Yes No
j. Coughing up blood in the last month: Yes No
k. Wheezing: Yes No
l. Wheezing that interferes with your job: Yes No
m. Chest pain when you breathe deeply: Yes No
n. Any other symptoms that you think may be related to lung problems: Yes No
Have you ever had any of the following cardiovascular or heart problems?
a. Heart attack: Yes No
b. Stroke: Yes No
c. Angina: Yes No
d. Heart failure: Yes No
e. Swelling in your legs or feet (not caused by walking): Yes No
f. Heart arrhythmia (heart beating irregularly): Yes No
g. High blood pressure: Yes No
h. Any other heart problem that you've been told about: Yes No
Have you ever had any of the following cardiovascular or heart symptoms?
a. Frequent pain or tightness in your chest: Yes No
b. Pain or tightness in your chest during physical activity: Yes No
c. Pain or tightness in your chest that interferes with your job: Yes No
d. In the past two years, have you noticed your heart skipping or missing
a beat: Yes No
e. Heartburn or indigestion that is not related to eating: Yes No
f. Any other symptoms that you think may be related to heart or
circulation problems: Yes No
Do you currently take medication for any of the following problems?

a. Breathing or lung problems: Yes No
b. Heart trouble: Yes No
c. Blood pressure: Yes No
d. Seizures (fits): Yes No
If you've used a respirator, have you ever had any of the following problems? (If you've never used a
respirator, check the following space and go to question 9:)
a. Eye irritation: Yes No

b. Skin allergies or rashes: Yes No
c. Anxiety: Yes No
d. General weakness or fatigue: Yes No
e. Any other problem that interferes with your use of a respirator: Yes No
Would you like to talk to the health care professional who will review this questionnaire about your
answers to this questionnaire? Yes No
Questions 10 to 15 below must be answered by every employee who has been selected to use either
a full-facepiece respirator or a self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA).
Have you ever lost vision in either eye (temporarily or permanently)? Yes No
Do you currently have any of the following vision problems?

a. Wear contact lenses: Yes No
b. Wear glasses: Yes No
c. Color blind: Yes No
d. Any other eye or vision problem: Yes No
Have you ever had an injury to your ears, including a broken ear drum? Yes No
Do you currently have any of the following hearing problems?

a. Difficulty hearing: Yes No
b. Wear a hearing aid: Yes No
c. Any other hearing or ear problem: Yes No
Have you ever had a back injury? Yes No
Do you currently have any of the following musculoskeletal problems?

a. Weakness in any of your arms, hands, legs, or feet: Yes No
b. Back pain: Yes No
c. Difficulty fully moving your arms and legs: Yes No
d. Pain or stiffness when you lean forward or backward at the waist: Yes No
e. Difficulty fully moving your head up or down: Yes No
f. Difficulty fully moving your head side to side: Yes No
g. Difficulty bending at your knees: Yes No
h. Difficulty squatting to the ground: Yes No
i. Climbing a flight of stairs or a ladder carrying more than 25 lbs: Yes No
j. Any other muscle or skeletal problem that interferes with using a respirator: Yes No
Part B: The following have been added to the questionnaire at the discretion of the health care
professional who will review the questionnaire.
In your present job, are you working at high altitudes (over 5,000 feet)
or in a place that has lower than normal amounts of oxygen? Yes No
If "yes," do you have feelings of dizziness, shortness of breath, pounding in your chest, or other
symptoms when you're working under these conditions? Yes No
At work or at home, have you ever been exposed to hazardous solvents, hazardous airborne
chemicals (e.g., gases, fumes, or dust), or have you come into skin contact with hazardous
chemicals? Yes No
If "yes," name the chemicals if you know them: _________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Have you ever worked with any of the materials, or under any of the
conditions, listed below?:
a. Asbestos: Yes No
b. Silica (e.g., in sandblasting): Yes No
c. Tungsten/cobalt (e.g., grinding or welding this material): Yes No
d. Beryllium: Yes No
e. Aluminum: Yes No
f. Coal (for example, mining): Yes No
g. Iron: Yes No
h. Tin: Yes No
i. Dusty environments: Yes No
j. Any other hazardous exposures: Yes No
If “yes,” describe these exposures: ___________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
List any second jobs or side business you have: __________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________
5. List your previous occupations: _______________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________
List your current and previous hobbies: _________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________
Have you been in the military services? Yes No
If "yes," were you exposed to biological or chemical agents (either in training or combat)?
Yes No
Have you ever worked on a HAZMAT team? Yes No
Other than medications for breathing and lung problems, heart trouble, blood pressure, and seizures
mentioned earlier in this questionnaire, are you taking any other medications for any reason
(including over-the-counter medications)? Yes No
If "yes," name the medications if you know them:__________________________________
Will you be using any of the following items with your respirator(s)?
a. HEPA Filters: Yes No
b. Canisters (for example, gas masks): Yes No
c. Cartridges: Yes No
How often are you expected to use the respirator(s)?

(Circle "yes" or "no" for all answers that apply to you.)
a. Escape only (no rescue): Yes No

b. Emergency rescue only: Yes No
c. Less than 5 hours per week: Yes No
d. Less than 2 hours per day: Yes No
e. 2 to 4 hours per day: Yes No
f. Over 4 hours per day: Yes No
During the period you are using the respirator(s), is your work effort:
a. Light (less than 200 kcal per hour)? Yes No

Examples of a light work effort are sitting while writing, typing, drafting, or performing light assembly
work; or standing while operating a drill press (1-3 lbs.) or controlling machines.
If "yes," how long does this period last during the average shift?
____________hrs.____________mins.
b. Moderate (200 to 350 kcal per hour)? Yes No
Examples of moderate work effort are sitting while nailing or filing; driving a truck or bus in urban
traffic; standing while drilling, nailing, performing assembly work, or transferring a moderate load
(about 35 lbs.) at trunk level; walking on a level surface about 2 mph or down a 5-degree grade about
3 mph; or pushing a wheelbarrow with a heavy load (about 100 lbs.) on a level surface.
____________hrs.____________mins.
c. Heavy (above 350 kcal per hour)? Yes No
Examples of heavy work are lifting a heavy load (about 50 lbs.) from the floor to your waist or
shoulder; working on a loading dock; shoveling; standing while bricklaying or chipping castings;
walking up an 8-degree grade about 2 mph; climbing stairs with a heavy load (about 50 lbs.).
____________hrs.____________mins.
Will you be wearing protective clothing and/or equipment (other than the respirator) when you’re
using your respirator? Yes No
If "yes," describe this protective clothing and/or equipment:
_______________________________________________________________________________
Will you be working under hot conditions (temperature exceeding 77 deg. F)? Yes No
Will you be working under humid conditions? Yes No
Describe the work you’ll be doing while you’re using your respirator(s):
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Describe any special or hazardous conditions you might encounter when you’re using your
respirator(s), i.e., confined spaces, life-threatening gases:
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Provide the following information, if you know it, for each toxic substance that you’ll be exposed to
when you’re using your respirator(s):
Name of the first toxic substance: ______________________
Estimated maximum exposure level per shift: ______________________
Duration of exposure per shift: ______________________
Name of the second toxic substance: ______________________
Name of the third toxic substance: ______________________
The name of any other toxic substances that you’ll be exposed to while using your respirator:
________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Describe any special responsibilities you’ll have while using your respirator(s) that may affect the
safety and well-being of others (for example: rescue, security):
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Adopted __________
SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION FORM
Employee: __________________________________Date: _______________
Respirator Information:
Type of units: __________ Weight of units: __________
Duration of use: __________
Expected physical work effort:
Additional protective clothing and equipment work:
Temperature and humidity extreme to be encountered:
Note: Include a copy of the written respiratory protection program and OSHA 1910.134
Prepared by: ________________________________________________________________
PLHCP that report was given to: ________________________________________________

Conducted at and by the Orland Park Police Department
RESPIRATOR FIT TEST RECORD
A. Employee Name: __________________________ Date: ______________
ID No. ____________________________________
B. Employer Name: _________________________________________________
Location/Address: ______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
C. Respirator Selected:
Make: _________________________________________
Model: _________________________________________
Style: _________________________________________
Size: _________________________________________
Fit Checks:
Negative Pressure 9 Pass 9 Fail 9 Not Done
Positive Pressure 9 Pass 9 Fail 9 Not Done
Fit Testing
9 Quantitative 9 Qualitative
Fit Factor ______________ 9 Pass 9 Fail
Comments: ____________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Employee acknowledgement of test results:
Employee Signature: _______________________________ Date: ____________

Test Conducted By: ________________________________ Date: ____________
Title: IN-CAR AUDIOVISUAL Procedure: 4.610
RECORDING SYSTEM
PURPOSE:
To establish a uniform method of operating in-car audiovisual recording systems and storing the
audiovisual tapes used with the recording system. The in-car audiovisual recording systems will also
serve to document an objective audiovisual account of events as they occur.
POLICY:
It is the policy of the Police Department to use the in-car audiovisual recording systems whenever it is
practical to record audio and/or video accounts of events as they occur. Such events include, but are
not limited to traffic stops, routine patrol activities and field sobriety tests. The in-car audiovisual
recording system will be used to help protect officers against false allegations of misconduct and
provide accurate and complete records of events as they occur.
PROCEDURES:
OPERATING PROCEDURES
1. The night shift Watch Commander will be responsible for installing a fresh tape into the in-car
audiovisual recording systems. This procedure will be performed every day to ensure a uniform
method of rotating videotapes. The only exception to this procedure is when the unit containing the
in-car audiovisual system is out of service.
2. Once a tape is installed into the in-car audiovisual recording system, the officer operating the
system will turn the recording system on and check it for proper operation. Officers operating the
system will ensure the proper care and maintenance of the recording system. Any malfunctions of
the recording system should be reported to the Watch Commander who will determine if the
malfunction is of a technical nature requiring the service of a qualified technician.
3. When the in-car audiovisual recording system is powered on, it will automatically activate when
the police unit’s emergency equipment is operating in the “rotating” position.
4. Officers will record all traffic stops, field sobriety tests, pursuits, arrests that take place on the
street and accident scenes (where practical). Officers should also strive to record other
circumstances and events as they occur.
5. Use of the wireless microphone to provide an audio record of an event is optional.
6. Officers will not cease audio and/or video recording until an incident is complete.
7. Officers who use the in-car audiovisual recording system during an incident shall note the use
of the recording system in any reports generated by the incident.
AUDIOVISUAL TAPES AS EVIDENCE

1. Tapes that contain information on incidents such as arrests, physical or verbal altercations,
pursuits, assaults or any other incident that the officer feels will be helpful to an investigation or
establish objective facts regarding an incident will be treated as evidence. The officer will notify his
supervisor who will complete the “In-Car Audiovisual Recording System Log Book” as mentioned
above. The officer will enter the tape into evidence as mentioned above.
2. Upon termination of court or administrative proceedings, tapes entered into evidence will be
erased and placed back into service.
3. All tapes generated by the In-Car Audiovisual Recording System remain the property of the
Police Department.
USE OF TAPES FOR TRAINING
1. Recorded tapes that contain material that would be useful for training can be used for that
purpose with the permission of the Chief of Police.
2. Supervisors may review recorded tapes of officers for the purposes of evaluating performance
and/or compliance with department policies and procedures.
3. A record of training in the use of the In-Car Audiovisual Recording System will be kept by the
Training Officer.
ORDER NUMBER:4.661
SUBJECT: TRAFFIC DIRECTION AND CONTROL
EFFECTIVE DATE: May 1, 2002
REVIEW DATE: March 7, 2007, January 4, 2010
REVIEWER: Chief of Police
________________________________________________________________
INDEX AS:
61.3.2. TRAFFIC DIRECTION AND CONTROL PROCEDURES
61.3.3. MOTOR VEHICLE ESCORTS
61.3.4. ROAD BLOCK POLICY
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this order is to identify liaison and data- sharing responsibilities with various traffic
engineering authorities, and to establish policies and procedures related to the Department's traffic
direction and control efforts.
DEFINITIONS:
1. Uniformed police officers have the primary responsibility for the direction and control of traffic at
motor vehicle crash scenes. Officers should set up perimeter traffic control points to:
a. Allow for the ingress - egress of police, fire and rescue equipment.
b. Halt or divert approaching traffic away from or around the crash scene.
c. Provide for a system of alternate routes to move traffic around the crash.
2. Officers should notify the Telecommunications Center of the action being taken so that they may in
turn notify other jurisdictions that may be affected.
3. When it becomes necessary to close or restrict the flow of traffic, the following means of control
may be used:
a. Flares may be used except where hazardous materials are involved.
b. Use of barricades may be appropriate when an entire roadway or intersection must be closed.
61-3 TRAFFIC DIRECTION AND CONTROL Page 3 of 7

c. Traffic cones are excellent for diverting traffic from one lane to the next and are often more
appropriate than flares d. On a temporary closure, a marked police vehicle with activated emergency
lights may be used.
B. Uniform Hand Signals For Manual Traffic Direction
All Department personnel assigned or authorized to direct traffic should use the following uniform
signals and gestures to perform manual traffic direction.
1. Stopping traffic by hand.

To stop traffic, the officer should first extend his arm and index finger toward and look directly at the
person to be stopped until that person is aware or it can be reasonably assumed that he is aware of
the officer's gesture. The pointing hand is then raised at the wrist so that the palm is toward the
person to be stopped, and the palm is held in this position until the person is observed to stop. To
stop traffic from both directions on a two-way street, the procedure is then repeated for traffic coming
from the other direction while continuing to maintain the raised arm and palm toward the traffic
previously stopped.
2. Starting traffic by hand.

To start traffic, the officer should first stand with shoulder and side toward the traffic to be started,
extend his arm and index finger toward and look directly at the person to be started until that person
is aware or it can be reasonably assumed that he is aware of the officer's gesture. With palm up, the
pointing arm is swung from the elbow only, through a vertical semicircle until the hand is adjacent to
the chin. If necessary this gesture is repeated until traffic begins to move. To start traffic from both
directions on a two-way street, the procedure is then repeated for traffic coming from the other
direction.
3. Right turning.
Drivers making right turns usually effect their turns without the necessity of being directed by the
officer. When directing a right turn becomes necessary, the officer should proceed as follows:
a. If the driver is approaching from the officer's right side, the extended right arm and index finger and
gaze are first directed toward the driver, followed by swinging the extended arm and index finger in
the direction of the driver's intended turn.
b. If the driver is approaching from the officer's left side, the same procedure may be followed utilizing
the left arm extended.
4. Left turning.
Left turning drivers should not be directed to effect their movement until the officer has stopped
oncoming traffic. The officer's right side and arm should be toward the oncoming traffic, and the left
side and arm should be toward the left turning driver. After stopping the oncoming traffic by using the
right arm and hand, the right hand should remain in the halt gesture. The extended left arm and index
finger and the officer's gaze is directed toward the driver who intends to effect a left turn. When the
left turning driver's attention has been gained, the extended left arm and index finger are swung to
point in the direction the driver intends to go.
5. Use of flashlight.
A flashlight can be used to halt traffic. To stop traffic, slowly swing the beam of light across the path of
oncoming traffic. The beam from the flashlight strikes the pavement as an elongated spot of light.
After the driver has stopped, arm signals may be given in the usual manner with the vehicle
headlights providing illumination. Orange flashlight cones may be utilized to enhance visibility.
6. Illustrations.
Examples of the procedures identified above are illustrated on Attachment A.
C. Whistle Commands
Officers who choose to utilize a whistle will do so only to get the attention of a driver or pedestrian
and to direct their movements. The whistle should not be used continuously as it will lose its effect.
1. One long blast on a whistle will indicate a stop signal.

2. Two short blasts will indicate a signal to start.
3. Several short blasts may be used to get the attention of a driver or pedestrian who does not
immediately respond to a given signal.
4. Whistle commands will be utilized in conjunction with hand and arm signals, keeping in mind that
individuals such as the hearing impaired or preoccupied individuals may not always hear or
understand said whistle commands.
D. Fire Scene
At the scene of a fire, the police shall direct and support the fire rescue operations. This responsibility
shall include:
1. Consulting with the ranking fire official in charge of the scene to determine their needs.
2. Providing protection for the fire scene and for fire and rescue equipment.
3. Setting up perimeter traffic control points to allow for the ingress-egress of fire and rescue
equipment and personnel authorized to be at the scene.
a. Such personnel shall include all persons who can identify themselves as firemen, either regular or
paid-on-call by badge, identification card, or possession of regularly used fire equipment such as a
helmet and coat.
b. It shall be the responsibility of supervisor officers of the Fire Department to correct any problems
resulting from the above persons blocking fire lanes or retarding the efficiency of persons at the
scene.
E. During Periods of Adverse Road and Weather Conditions.

The Department will continue to maintain a close working relationship with those agencies that share
responsibility for coping with adverse road and weather conditions affecting traffic safety and will
continue to cooperate with them in developing and carrying out mutual assistance policies,
procedures and programs to service the public as effectively as possible when such adverse
conditions exist.
1. Upon discovering an adverse road or weather condition, agency personnel shall notify appropriate
agencies and persons for the purpose of correcting the condition.
2. Agency personnel will provide traffic direction and control services and scene protection services in
the vicinity of adverse road and weather conditions, as needed.
F. Manual Operation of Traffic Control Signals

Police officers are neither trained nor equipped to make traffic signal repairs or adjust the timing
cycles. Traffic signals will not be manually controlled without the approval of a supervisor.
1. Officers may place signals on four way flash in emergency situations to temporarily alleviate a
traffic control problem. When this becomes necessary, the officer will notify a field supervisor and, if
necessary, request that proper notification be made for service or repair.
G. Temporary Traffic Control Devices

1. Temporary traffic control devices include moveable barriers, portable signs, traffic cones, and
other similar apparatus intended for the limited use to assist in the safe and efficient movement of
vehicular or pedestrian traffic.
a. When portable barricades or signs are required, they will be delivered and removed by the Village
Palos Park Police Department, unless exigent circumstances require immediate action by police
department personnel all officers have traffic cones available for use when needed. These devices
will be placed and removed by Department personnel when special traffic needs are identified.
2. These temporary traffic control devices may be used for, but not limited to, the following
circumstances:
a. Sustained power outages which render traffic control signals inoperative.Major intersection traffic
signals are all equipped with flip down stop signs which may be utilized in the event of a signal
malfunction or power outage. Sign lock keys will be on police vehicle key rings. Field supervisors will
authorize an officer(s) to place the sign into the open position and lock them. Immediately after
signals are restored to working order, the signs will be placed in the closed position and locked.
b. Special events.
c. Traffic crashes.
d. Other situations when supervisory personnel deem it to be necessary.
H. High-visibility Clothing
The Department provides high visibility reflective vests (ANSI 107-2004 or ANSI 207-2006) to all
personnel who may be assigned to perform manual traffic direction and control functions. Personnel
shall wear their high visibility reflective vests in addition to the full uniform whenever performing traffic
direction, investigating crashes, and handling lane closures, obstructed roadways, and disaster within
the right-of way of any roadway.
1. It is each field employees responsibility, to have available to them the high visibility reflective vest
during on-duty hours.
a. A (ANSI 107-2004 or ANSI 207-2006) raincoat or high visibility reversible jacket will suffice as
reflective clothing in inclement weather.
61.3.3. VEHICLE ESCORTS

A. Emergency Escorts.
1. The escorting of other vehicles using flashing red lights and siren is an extremely dangerous
practice and should be avoided.
a. Officers will not escort other emergency vehicles using the flashing red lights and siren unless it is
absolutely necessary to guide them to their destination.
b. Extreme caution must be exercised, especially when crossing intersections and speed limits should
not be exceeded.
c. Officers will not follow ambulances, fire apparatus, or other emergency vehicles so closely as to
constitute a hazard.
2. In case of serious illness or injury, an ambulance shall be called. Sick or injured persons shall
normally not be transported in Police Department vehicles.
B. Non-Emergency Escorts
1. All requests for non-emergency escorts shall be referred to the Patrol Division Commander or
the shift commander. Funeral escorts and escorts for public officials and dignitaries may be approved
if circumstances and manpower allow.
2. Non-emergency escorts and escorts on non- emergency vehicles may warrant the use of flashing
red lights; however, all traffic regulations must be obeyed so as not to expose the officer and the
Department to civil liability if a crash should result.
3. Oversized, overweight vehicles and permit moves over State roads will comply with 625 ILCS 5/15-
301. When movement is made over County roads they will have county permits.
61.3.4. ROAD BLOCKS POLICY

A. Road blocks shall not be established or removed unless authorized by the Chief of Police or his
designee.
B. Road blocks may be used for:
1. Road Side Safety Checks (i.e. DUI enforcement).
a. Safety checks shall only be conducted pursuant to a written plan developed by the Traffic Safety
Supervisor and approved by the Chief of Police, or designee.
2. Department vehicles may be used as road blocks at crash scenes, using all emergency lights on
the vehicle and placed in such a manner as to be noticed by other traffic.
3. During natural disasters or fires, Department vehicles may be used temporarily for road blocks,
using all emergency lights on the vehicle, until more permanent warning devices and/or barricades
are put in place.
4. Road blocks may also be utilized on parade routes. The motoring public must have prior notice of
planned route and any detour route that is planned.
Title: TRAFFIC INCIDENT MANAGEMENT Procedure: 4.612
IN HAZARDOUS MATERIAL AND
DISEASE CONTROL SPILLS
IN INCIDENT MANAGEMENT
Authority: Joseph F. Miller
Review Date: 07 March 07, 04 January 10

Reviewer: Chief of Police
PURPOSE:
Hazardous materials spills provide unique challenges to traffic incident clearance. Response
personnel face the challenges posed in a typical traffic incident while dealing with chemical hazards,
environmental impacts to the surrounding community, and the additional safety requirements needed
to work with hazardous materials
POLICY:
Although stopping motorists on the highway for traffic violations or other purposes is often considered
a routine function of patrol officers, it is one that has been demonstrated to be potentially dangerous
for both officers and motorists even during apparently "routine" situations. For violators it is frequently
an emotionally traumatic experience. Therefore, it is the policy of this department that motor vehicle
stops shall be performed professionally and courteously, and with a view towards educating the
public about proper driving procedures while consistently recognizing and taking the necessary steps
to minimize the dangers involved in this activity for the officer, the motorist and other users of the
highway.
PROCEDURE:
OFFICER/VIOLATOR CONTACT
1. Officers shall perform vehicle stops only when they have a legal reason to do so.
Once an initial decision has been made to stop a motorist, the officer shall select an area that
provides reasonable safety.
3. When a location has been selected for the stop, the officer shall notify the communications
center of its nature providing unit location, vehicle license number and the number of occupants. At
the officer's discretion or dispatcher's request, additional information may be exchanged.
4. At the desired location, the officer should signal the operator to stop at the far right side of the
roadway or at the safest shoulder by activating the overhead emergency lights and siren as
necessary.
On multi-lane roads, the officer may facilitate movement to the right shoulder by gradually changing
lanes behind the violator until the right side of the roadway is reached.
Should the violator stop abruptly in the wrong lane or location, the officer should instruct
him to move by using the appropriate hand signals or by using the vehicle's public address system.
5. Once properly stopped, the officer should position the police vehicle about one to one and one
half-car length behind the violator's vehicle and at an off set, with the front approximately 2 feet to the
traffic side of the violator's vehicle.
At night, the spotlight should not be used to direct the violator but may be used to illuminate the
vehicle's interior once stopped. The patrol vehicle should use its low beams if high beams would
blind oncoming motorists.
6. When exiting the patrol vehicle, the officer should be particularly alert to suspicious
movements or actions of the vehicle operator or passengers.
7. Approaching from the driver's side, the officer should be observant of the passenger
compartment and stop at a point to the rear of the trailing edge of the left front door in order to
communicate with the driver. Where circumstances dictate, particularly where traffic is close enough
to create a potential problem, the officer may choose to approach the violator's vehicle from the
passenger side and stop at the trailing edge of the front door.
When the violator's vehicle has occupants in the rear seat, the officer should approach to a point near
the leading edge of the driver door, being particularly observant of the occupant’s movements and
choosing a path that will not allow the occupants to thrust the door open against the officer.
In two-officer police vehicles, the passenger officer shall be responsible for radio communications,
note taking and relaying messages to the communications center. He will also act as an observer
and cover for his fellow officer.
8. Non-uniformed officers operating unmarked patrol vehicles with concealed emergency lights
and siren shall not normally make vehicle stops for traffic violations. In situations where failure to act
would create unreasonable risks of injury, death or significant property damage, such personnel shall
contact the communications center to request a marked patrol unit to make the stop and may,
depending upon the urgency of the situation, activate emergency lights and siren to make a traffic
stop.
9. Non-uniformed officers operating vehicles not equipped with emergency lights or siren shall
not make motor vehicle stops unless there is imminent danger of loss of life should they fail to act. In
other less urgent cases that demand attention, officers shall contact the communications center,
request that a marked patrol vehicle perform the stop, and assist in directing the marked unit to the
subject vehicle's location.
10. Once the officer has stopped the violator and communications are taking place, officer/violator
relations begin. The officer should:
Be alert at all times;
Present a professional image, physically and emotionally;
Base enforcement action on violator's driving behavior;
Greet the violator in a courteous manner;
Ask the violator for a driver's license, proof of insurance and any other appropriate documents;
Inform the driver of the violation and type of enforcement action intended;
Complete the forms for the enforcement action taken; and,
Explain the citation to the violator.
11. When issuing citations, conducting roadside sobriety tests or conversing with the violator, the
officer and other parties shall be positioned to the side of the road, clear of the motor vehicles.
Whenever possible the officer and violator should avoid standing in front of, between or behind the
stopped vehicles.
12. During the stop, the officer should instruct the violator to remain in his motor vehicle while the
officer writes the citation or conducts other business. Violators shall not be permitted to sit in patrol
vehicles while citations are being prepared or other police business is being conducted unless the
officer is investigating a traffic crash.
13. When preparing citations, in the patrol vehicle, the officer should position paperwork and
related material in a manner that allows him to maintain observation over actions of the violator and
other occupants.
14. Officers will provide motorists with information explaining his rights and responsibilities
concerning his arrest or citing for a traffic violation.
15. Officers should advise violators of the location, date, time of their court appearance, and
whether their appearance is mandatory.
16. Offenses not requiring a mandatory court appearance or that qualify for court diversion may be
prepaid according to current Court bond rules. Officers shall advise violators of this operation and the
locations and restrictions on prepayment.
17. Violators shall be advised of their various bonding options by the officer.
MAKING HIGH-RISK VEHICLE STOPS
1. When planning to stop the suspect vehicle, the officer shall notify the communications center,
describe the nature or reason for the stop, provide information on the vehicle, license number and
number of occupants; and request appropriate assistance to make the stop.
2. An officer should not individually initiate high-risk vehicle stops unless back-up units will not be
available in an appropriate amount of time or the urgency of the situation demands immediate action.
3. After selecting an appropriate location and with adequate support units in position, the officer
should signal the suspect to stop.
4. Officers should position their vehicles approximately 30 feet behind the suspect vehicle, in
positions that will maximize opportunities for cover and in a manner that will illuminate the interior of
the vehicle to the occupants' disadvantage.
5. Once the suspect vehicle has stopped, officers should assume positions of cover.
6. The primary officer initiating the stop, or the officer with the best observation point, should
issue verbal commands to vehicle occupants through the vehicle's public address system, if
available. Generally only the primary officer shall issue commands.
7. The primary officer shall first identify himself and then notify the occupants of the vehicle that
they are under arrest and that all instructions are to be followed without hesitation or suspicious
movements.
8. The operator of the suspect vehicle should be ordered to follow all commands, such as: lower
his window; remove the ignition keys with his left hand; drop them on the ground; open the door
from the outside; step out of the vehicle; turn completely around; face away from the officers; walk
backward until commanded to stop and lay face down on the ground with hands stretched far to the
sides. All other occupants should be similarly commanded until all are in position to be handcuffed
and searched.
9. With appropriate cover, officers should then approach the suspect vehicle to inspect the
passenger compartment and trunk.
STOPPING OVERSIZE AND OVERWEIGHT VEHICLES
1. Select a location for the stop that provides enough room for the vehicle and sufficient stability
to support the vehicle's weight, and allow the operator sufficient time and distance to make the stop.
2. Approach the cab from the rear, using the driver's outside mirror to observe the driver and
activity in the cab.
3. Never climb onto the vehicle to make contact with the operator. Maintain a position to the rear
of the driver's door and ask him to exit the vehicle, when necessary.
EXEMPTIONS/SPECIAL PROCESSING REQUIREMENTS
1. State Statutes affords individuals exemption from arrest under specified circumstances.
2. The following have temporary immunity, except for cases of treason, a felony or a breach of
the peace:
Members of the United States Electoral College, during their Attendance at an election and in going
to and returning from;
Senators and representatives during sessions of the General Assembly, and in going to and coming
from;
Members of the military reserve forces and the National Guard during their attendance at official
meetings, and in going to and coming from; and,
Judges, attorneys, clerks, sheriffs, and other court officers shall be privileged from arrest while
attending court and while going to or returning from.
3. Officers having contact with persons claiming exemptions based on the above should
attempt to verify that person's exemption through personal identification.
4. Nothing in this procedure or in the law precludes an officer from obtaining a warrant or issuing
a citation at a later time for the person released.
DIPLOMATIC IMMUNITY
1. Diplomatic immunity is not a right that a foreign official has because of his position, but a
privilege given by the President of the United States.
2. Diplomatic officers, their families and servants who are not nationals or permanent residents of
the United States are protected by unlimited immunity from arrest, detention or prosecution, with
respect to any civil or criminal offense.
3. Persons making such a claim must possess photo identity cards (not diplomatic passports)
issued by the State Department and the United Nations.
4. Consuls, vice consuls, deputy consuls and some of their staff hold immunity while specifically
engaged in diplomatic work. This immunity depends upon the activity of the person at that particular
moment.
5. Officers having contact with a foreign official are empowered to temporarily detain any person
claiming diplomatic immunity while official status is verified by the U.S. State Department. All foreign
mission members and dependents are accountable for traffic violations. Stopping a foreign mission
member or dependent, and issuing a traffic citation, does not constitute an arrest or detention, and is
permissible. Normal procedures should be followed in the intervention of a traffic violation, even if
immunity ultimately bars prosecution or a serious offense. Levels of immunity vary depending on the
individual.
6. The United States Department of State, Office of Foreign Missions can provide detailed driver
and vehicle information. They can advise an officer on the scene on handling, documenting, and
reporting an incident involving individuals that may have a level of immunity. The officer shall
document all information pertaining to the incident. The following phone numbers can be used to
obtain information:
Use 202-647-4570/1404/1405 (Duty hours 8-5 Eastern Time Monday - Friday) to verify if an
individual is a foreign mission member with immunity.
Use 202-895-3521 for handling, documenting and reporting procedures.
Use 202-647-7277 for all after hours questions.
JUVENILES

If a cash bond is needed, the officer should allow the youth to make every effort to secure funds.
If all efforts fail and the bond cannot be made, then on the approval of the watch commander, an I-
Bond will be issued. The juvenile should not be detained for more than two (2) hours while arranging
for bond.
custody.
NONRESIDENTS
1. The State is a member of the Nonresident Violator Compact (NRVC). These States allow
drivers to sign the traffic citation, for minor violations, instead of posting the required bond. This
allows a motorist to accept a traffic citation and proceed without delay, and does not burden the
officer with a lengthy bonding process.
2. Drivers from all other States shall be required to deposit bond for all traffic violations pursuant
to Supreme Court bond rules.
Title: TRAFFIC VIOLATOR CONTACT Procedure: 4.613
PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines for stopping and approaching motorists in a manner that promotes the safety
of the officer and the motorist.
Provide guidelines for the interaction between motorist and officer.
To establish procedures when stopping traffic violators.
To outline special processing requirements.
POLICY:
Although stopping motorists on the highway for traffic violations or other purposes is often considered
a routine function of patrol officers, it is one that has been demonstrated to be potentially dangerous
for both officers and motorists even during apparently "routine" situations. For violators it is frequently
an emotionally traumatic experience. Therefore, it is the policy of this department that motor vehicle
stops shall be performed professionally and courteously, and with a view towards educating the
public about proper driving procedures while consistently recognizing and taking the necessary steps
to minimize the dangers involved in this activity for the officer, the motorist and other users of the
highway.
PROCEDURE:
OFFICER/VIOLATOR CONTACT
1. Officers shall perform vehicle stops only when they have a legal reason to do so.
Once an initial decision has been made to stop a motorist, the officer shall select an area that
provides reasonable safety.
3. When a location has been selected for the stop, the officer shall notify the communications
center of its nature providing unit location, vehicle license number and the number of occupants. At
the officer's discretion or dispatcher's request, additional information may be exchanged.
4. At the desired location, the officer should signal the operator to stop at the far right side of the
roadway or at the safest shoulder by activating the overhead emergency lights and siren as
necessary.
On multi-lane roads, the officer may facilitate movement to the right shoulder by gradually changing
lanes behind the violator until the right side of the roadway is reached.
Should the violator stop abruptly in the wrong lane or location, the officer should instruct him
to move by using the appropriate hand signals or by using the vehicle's public address system.
5. Once properly stopped, the officer should position the police vehicle about one to one and
one half-car length behind the violator's vehicle and at an off set, with the front approximately 2 feet to
the traffic side of the violator's vehicle.
At night, the spotlight should not be used to direct the violator but may be used to illuminate the
vehicle's interior once stopped. The patrol vehicle should use its low beams if high beams would
blind oncoming motorists.
6. When exiting the patrol vehicle, the officer should be particularly alert to suspicious
movements or actions of the vehicle operator or passengers.
7. Approaching from the driver's side, the officer should be observant of the passenger
compartment and stop at a point to the rear of the trailing edge of the left front door in order to
communicate with the driver.
Where circumstances dictate, particularly where traffic is close enough to create a potential problem,
the officer may choose to approach the violator's vehicle from the passenger side and stop at the
trailing edge of the front door.
When the violator's vehicle has occupants in the rear seat, the officer should approach to a point near
the leading edge of the driver door, being particularly observant of the occupant’s movements and
choosing a path that will not allow the occupants to thrust the door open against the officer.
In two-officer police vehicles, the passenger officer shall be responsible for radio communications,
note taking and relaying messages to the communications center. He will also act as an observer
and cover for his fellow officer.
8. Non-uniformed officers operating unmarked patrol vehicles with concealed emergency lights
and siren shall not normally make vehicle stops for traffic violations. In situations where failure to act
would create unreasonable risks of injury, death or significant property damage, such personnel shall
contact the communications center to request a marked patrol unit to make the stop and may,
depending upon the urgency of the situation, activate emergency lights and siren to make a traffic
stop.
9. Non-uniformed officers operating vehicles not equipped with emergency lights or siren shall
not make motor vehicle stops unless there is imminent danger of loss of life should they fail to act. In
other less urgent cases that demand attention, officers shall contact the communications center,
request that a marked patrol vehicle perform the stop, and assist in directing the marked unit to the
subject vehicle's location.
10. Once the officer has stopped the violator and communications are taking place, officer/violator
relations begin. The officer should:
Be alert at all times;
Present a professional image, physically and emotionally;
Base enforcement action on violator's driving behavior;
Greet the violator in a courteous manner;
Ask the violator for a driver's license, proof of insurance and any other appropriate documents;
Inform the driver of the violation and type of enforcement action intended;
Complete the forms for the enforcement action taken; and,
Explain the citation to the violator.
11. When issuing citations, conducting roadside sobriety tests or conversing with the violator, the
officer and other parties shall be positioned to the side of the road, clear of the motor vehicles.
Whenever possible the officer and violator should avoid standing in front of, between or behind the
stopped vehicles.
12. During the stop, the officer should instruct the violator to remain in his motor vehicle while the
officer writes the citation or conducts other business. Violators shall not be permitted to sit in patrol
vehicles while citations are being prepared or other police business is being conducted unless the
officer is investigating a traffic crash.
13. When preparing citations, in the patrol vehicle, the officer should position paperwork and
related material in a manner that allows him to maintain observation over actions of the violator and
other occupants.
14. Officers will provide motorists with information explaining his rights and responsibilities
concerning his arrest or citing for a traffic violation.
15. Officers should advise violators of the location, date, time of their court appearance, and
whether their appearance is mandatory.
16. Offenses not requiring a mandatory court appearance or that qualify for court diversion may be
prepaid according to current Court bond rules. Officers shall advise violators of this operation and the
locations and restrictions on prepayment.
17. Violators shall be advised of their various bonding options by the officer.
MAKING HIGH-RISK VEHICLE STOPS
1. When planning to stop the suspect vehicle, the officer shall notify the communications center,
describe the nature or reason for the stop, provide information on the vehicle, license number and
number of occupants; and request appropriate assistance to make the stop.
2. An officer should not individually initiate high-risk vehicle stops unless back-up units will not be
available in an appropriate amount of time or the urgency of the situation demands immediate action.
3. After selecting an appropriate location and with adequate support units in position, the officer
should signal the suspect to stop.
4. Officers should position their vehicles approximately 30 feet behind the suspect vehicle, in
positions that will maximize opportunities for cover and in a manner that will illuminate the interior of
the vehicle to the occupants' disadvantage.
5. Once the suspect vehicle has stopped, officers should assume positions of cover.
6. The primary officer initiating the stop, or the officer with the best observation point, should
issue verbal commands to vehicle occupants through the vehicle's public address system, if
available. Generally only the primary officer shall issue commands.
7. The primary officer shall first identify himself and then notify the occupants of the vehicle that
they are under arrest and that all instructions are to be followed without hesitation or suspicious
movements.
8. The operator of the suspect vehicle should be ordered to follow all commands, such as: lower
his window; remove the ignition keys with his left hand; drop them on the ground; open the door
from the outside; step out of the vehicle; turn completely around; face away from the officers; walk
backward until commanded to stop and lay face down on the ground with hands stretched far to the
sides. All other occupants should be similarly commanded until all are in position to be handcuffed
and searched.
9. With appropriate cover, officers should then approach the suspect vehicle to inspect the
passenger compartment and trunk.
STOPPING OVERSIZE AND OVERWEIGHT VEHICLES
1. Select a location for the stop that provides enough room for the vehicle and sufficient stability
to support the vehicle's weight, and allow the operator sufficient time and distance to make the stop.
2. Approach the cab from the rear, using the driver's outside mirror to observe the driver and
activity in the cab.
3. Never climb onto the vehicle to make contact with the operator. Maintain a position to the rear
of the driver's door and ask him to exit the vehicle, when necessary.
EXEMPTIONS/SPECIAL PROCESSING REQUIREMENTS
1. State Statutes affords individuals exemption from arrest under specified circumstances.
2. The following have temporary immunity, except for cases of treason, a felony or a breach of
the peace:
Members of the United States Electoral College, during their Attendance at an election and in going
to and returning from;
Senators and representatives during sessions of the General Assembly, and in going to and coming
from;
Members of the military reserve forces and the National Guard during their attendance at official
meetings, and in going to and coming from; and,
Judges, attorneys, clerks, sheriffs, and other court officers shall be privileged from arrest while
attending court and while going to or returning from.
3. Officers having contact with persons claiming exemptions based on the above should
attempt to verify that person's exemption through personal identification.
4. Nothing in this procedure or in the law precludes an officer from obtaining a warrant or issuing
a citation at a later time for the person released.
DIPLOMATIC IMMUNITY
1. Diplomatic immunity is not a right that a foreign official has because of his position, but a
privilege given by the President of the United States.
2. Diplomatic officers, their families and servants who are not nationals or permanent residents of
the United States are protected by unlimited immunity from arrest, detention or prosecution, with
respect to any civil or criminal offense.
3. Persons making such a claim must possess photo identity cards (not diplomatic passports)
issued by the State Department and the United Nations.
4. Consuls, vice consuls, deputy consuls and some of their staff hold immunity while specifically
engaged in diplomatic work. This immunity depends upon the activity of the person at that particular
moment.
5. Officers having contact with a foreign official are empowered to temporarily detain any person
claiming diplomatic immunity while official status is verified by the U.S. State Department. All foreign
mission members and dependents are accountable for traffic violations. Stopping a foreign mission
member or dependent, and issuing a traffic citation, does not constitute an arrest or detention, and is
permissible. Normal procedures should be followed in the intervention of a traffic violation, even if
immunity ultimately bars prosecution or a serious offense. Levels of immunity vary depending on the
individual.
6. The United States Department of State, Office of Foreign Missions can provide detailed driver
and vehicle information. They can advise an officer on the scene on handling, documenting, and
reporting an incident involving individuals that may have a level of immunity. The officer shall
document all information pertaining to the incident. The following phone numbers can be used to
obtain information:
Use 202-647-4570/1404/1405 (Duty hours 8-5 Eastern Time Monday - Friday) to verify if an
individual is a foreign mission member with immunity.
Use 202-895-3521 for handling, documenting and reporting procedures.
Use 202-647-7277 for all after hours questions.
JUVENILES

If a cash bond is needed, the officer should allow the youth to make every effort to secure funds.
If all efforts fail and the bond cannot be made, then on the approval of the watch commander, an I-
Bond will be issued. The juvenile should not be detained for more than two (2) hours while arranging
for bond.
custody.
NONRESIDENTS
1. The State is a member of the Nonresident Violator Compact (NRVC). These States allow
drivers to sign the traffic citation, for minor violations, instead of posting the required bond. This
allows a motorist to accept a traffic citation and proceed without delay, and does not burden the
officer with a lengthy bonding process.
2. Drivers from all other States shall be required to deposit bond for all traffic violations pursuant
to Supreme Court bond rules.
Title: D.U.I TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT Procedure: 4.614
PURPOSE:
To establish procedures for handling persons charged with driving while under the influence of
alcohol or drugs.
To establish guidelines for conducting a DUI countermeasure program designed to reduce

alcohol/drug related crashes.
POLICY:
The Police Department is dedicated to decreasing the incidence of traffic crashes and injuries caused
by the intoxicated motorist. Officers are expected to be alert for signs of alcohol and/or drug
impairment in contacts with motorists. Countermeasures including programs involving education,
enforcement, adjudication, treatment and public support are essential to be successful in reducing the
DUI problem.
PROCEDURE:
REASONABLE SUSPICION / PROBABLE CAUSE / ARREST

1. The officer's observations in the initial stages of contact with the offender if dispatched to an
incident and in establishing reasonable suspicion for a traffic stop and probable cause for the arrest
are critical.
2. When establishing probable cause for arrest, officers should:

Approach the driver with caution;
Identify the driver and request his drivers license and proof of insurance;
Interview the driver, establish that he/she was or is in control of the vehicle;
Note any observations that add to your suspicion of intoxication, (odor of alcoholic beverage, slurred
speech, etc.). Ask the driver if he has been drinking.
If intoxication is suspected, select a suitable, safe site to administer appropriate field sobriety tests to
assess impairment.
If the driver fails the tests and the officer believes the elements for DUI are present the officer should
effect an arrest by advising the driver that he is under arrest for DUI and transport the driver to the
station for processing; and,
Advise the Communications Center of the arrest and, if necessary, request a certified breath analysis
operator.
IMPOUNDING (TOWING) THE VEHICLE

1. Upon arrest for a DUI violation the arrestee's vehicle will be impounded with the watch
commander’s approval.
COMPLAINT PROCESSING
1. Complete the DUI citation as soon as possible after the initial arrest. The driver should be
issued the citations(s) and read the Warning to Motorist in its entirety before any request for tests of
his breath, blood or urine.
PROBABLE CAUSE CITATION:
Issuance of this citation is necessary to establish your probable cause for the stop. (i.e.: erratic
driving, no lights, etc.)
ALCOHOL PER SE CITATION:
Issuance of this citation reflects your belief that the subject is under the influence of alcohol or
drugs that must be defined by further testing.
INFLUENCE CITATION FOR ALCOHOL:
Issuance of this citation indicates that as a result of testing it is determined that the subject is
under the influence of alcohol. This information is obtained as a result of:
Breath analysis
Blood test
Urine test
Or combination of the above
INFLUENCE CITATION FOR DRUGS:
Issuance of this citation reflects your belief that the subject is under the influence of some
substance, but all alcohol tests indicate a negative result, and/or there is a presence of suspect drugs
INFLUENCE CITATION FOR DRUG AND ALCOHOL COMBINATION:
Issuance of this citation reflects that the subject is under the influence of alcohol, but is impaired
beyond the indicated score on the breath test or;
The results of the blood or urine tests indicate the presence of narcotic substance.
DRUGS PER SE CITATION:
Issuance of this citation indicates that the State of Illinois Crime Lab result of testing Blood and or
urine samples by the, shows A positive presence of narcotic substance.
IMPLIED CONSENT:
CONDUCTING THE TESTS
BREATH TEST
1. The breath test will be conducted by a licensed breath analysis operator in accordance with
Department of Public Health rules.
2. The Department will use a breath test instrument that is certified and has been approved by
the Department of Public Health.
3. If the Department's breath test instrument is inoperable, a supervisor may authorize the use of
a breath test instrument of another police department. The arrestee will be transported to the other
department and whenever possible the breath analysis operator from the Police Department will
conduct the test, if qualified on that breath test instrument.
4. The test operator will record all required information concerning the test in the Breath Test
logbook and on the intoxilyzer receipt.
BLOOD TEST
1. Two blood samples will be collected by a physician licensed to practice medicine, a registered
nurse or other qualified person in accordance with Department of Public Health rules.
2. Officers will utilize a Department of Public Health approved facility when it is required to take a
blood sample.
3. The arrestee should be transported to the Emergency Room where hospital staff are familiar
with the requirements for the drawing of blood for DUI cases.
4. Special kits, provided by the State, are available at the hospital for the drawing of blood.
5. The arresting officer is responsible to see that the DUI blood form is completed as required,
and all samples are properly labeled. Both the form and labels are provided in the kit. The officer
should make a copy of the DUI blood form for our records.
6. Blood samples should be properly packaged, inventoried, and secured into evidence locker
until transferred to the crime lab. The officer will complete a Police Department Property Evidence
Receipt and a State Police Evidence Receipt.
7. When submitting blood to the crime lab, for analysis of alcohol content, the State Police
Evidence Receipt must be submitted at the same time.
URINE TEST
1. Urine samples will be collected under the same environmental conditions as blood samples in
accordance with Department of Public Health rules.
2. Police Department personnel may witness the collection of urine samples if requested to do
so by hospital personnel.
3. Officers will use a Department of Public Health approved facility for collecting samples of urine.
The facility staff will use the same kit provided by the State for blood samples.
4. A person of the same sex as the offender must be present when the urine sample is collected.
Another employee of the Police Department may be appointed by the arresting officer as his/her
representative for this purpose. If a Department employee is not available, hospital personnel may be
requested.
5. Both samples must be properly labeled as required for blood samples.
6. Urine samples will be properly packaged, inventoried and placed in the evidence locker for
transfer to the appropriate lab for analysis. Samples should be sent to the lab within 24 hours, if
possible.
7. Urine samples should be analyzed for the presence of drugs by the same lab that provides this
service for blood samples.
REFUSAL TO SUBMIT TO BREATH, BLOOD OR URINE TESTS
1. The arresting officer shall not offer any advice to the arrestee in regards to taking or not taking
any test.
2. The Law Enforcement Sworn Report will be completed by the arresting officer if the subject
refuses to submit to the test.
3. The Law Enforcement Sworn Report shall be completed and copies served to the subject.
4. Forms dictated by State statute should be completed.
ZERO TOLERANCE ENFORCEMENT:
Any individual under the age of 21, is in violation of the law if his blood alcohol level reflects
any reading except .00
PRELIMINARY BREATH TESTS
Use of the portable breath-testing device, provided by the department may be used to
establish probable cause for D.U.I. cases. This unit has been certified by the State of Illinois for use in
such cases.
D.U.I. COUNTERMEASURES
1. The Department recognizes that drivers impaired by alcohol and other intoxicants represent a
serious threat to the safety of others. Because of the seriousness of this problem the Department
maintains a D.U.I. enforcement program that includes provisions for public education, enforcement,
and roadside safety checks. The Police Department's D.U.I. Countermeasures Program is
focused on the arrest of alcohol and/or drug related traffic offense violations by providing special
training to patrol personnel to assist their efforts in identifying and apprehending offenders.
2. The identification of persons suspected of driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs is an
important component of the patrol function. Training will be provided to maintain a proficiency in the
identification, apprehension and processing of alcohol/drug impaired motorists. Training courses
provided will include:
Breath Test Instrument Operation
Field Sobriety Testing: HGN
Testifying in a D.U.I. Trial
D.U.I. Enforcement
3. Officers should be familiar with those areas of their beat frequently traveled by DUI impaired
drivers, and with the locations of DUI related traffic crashes.
4. Supervisors should direct patrol officers to those locations that require selective traffic
enforcement for D.U.I., as workload and personnel permit.
Title: TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT Procedure: 4.615
PURPOSE:
To establish general guidelines for the Department's traffic law enforcement program.
POLICY:
The primary purpose of traffic law enforcement is to reduce crashes through active police patrol and
violator contacts. Patrol visibility, consistency of effort, education, engineering and public support will
facilitate the safe and expeditious movement of vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
PROCEDURE:
ENFORCEMENT RESPONSIBILITY
1. All members of the Department have a responsibility to provide for a fair and reasonable
approach to traffic law enforcement, and enforce the same laws in the same manner.
2. Enforcement policies cannot and should not supplant officer judgment. Officer discretion on
the proper enforcement action to be taken is based on a combination of the officer's training,
experience, and common sense. The intent of this procedure is to set forth-general guidelines for
uniform enforcement action for routine traffic situations. It is not the intent of this procedure to limit
discretion, but to encourage each officer to use his/her training and experience to the fullest extent.
GUIDELINES FOR ROUTINE TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT
EXCEEDING POSTED SPEED LIMIT.

Legally there is no defense for exceeding the posted limit or for driving faster than conditions safely
permit. However, drivers stopped for speed violations may indicate certain factors unknown to the
officer before the stop that may have contributed to the violation.
Officers should exercise discretion when deciding if a verbal warning, written warning or a citation is
appropriate. Consideration should be given to such factors as weather conditions, traffic volume,
pedestrian traffic and location, while always being mindful that excessive speed correlates directly
with high incidents of crashes.
2. HAZARDOUS VIOLATIONS
Hazardous violations are defined as those violations that pose a direct hazard to the safe and
efficient flow of traffic. In addition, these violations contribute substantially to crashes. For the
purpose of this procedure hazardous violations fall into the following categories:
Unsafe Behavior - driver actions are direct violation related to moving violations i.e., violating
traffic control devices, signs and other crash related violations.
Unsafe Condition - vehicles that are improperly equipped, i.e., no headlights, worn tires,
overweight trucks and any other violation that renders a vehicle unsafe.
Officers are to take immediate enforcement action based on sound judgment upon viewing or
detecting hazardous violations.
VIOLATIONS BY PUBLIC OR COMMERCIAL CARRIERS
Public/Commercial carriers who violate traffic laws will be treated in the same manner as the general
public. Uniform enforcement policies and procedures outlined in those traffic related procedures are
applicable.
3. NEWLY ENACTED TRAFFIC LAWS

When new traffic laws are enacted, the Chief of Police will review them to determine the level and
schedule of enforcement action to be taken by Department personnel. At his discretion, the Chief of
Police may authorize warning tickets as the Department's primary enforcement action until the
provisions of the new laws are better known to the public.
4. D.U.I. VIOLATIONS
Refer to the Department D.U.I. Enforcement procedure.
5. MULTIPLE VIOLATIONS
When multiple violations are committed by a single individual and arise from a continuous activity, the
enforcement action adopted will be predicated on the most serious offense committed.
In all cases of multiple violations, the enforcement action taken will be sufficient to support a
comprehensive and complete case for the prosecution.
6. NON-HAZARDOUS VIOLATION
Enforcement efforts for non-hazardous traffic violations will be guided by officer discretion. Officers
are reminded that voluntary compliance is the goal of enforcement actions for minor violations.
TYPES OF ENFORCEMENT ACTION
1. Officer discretion is important to an effective traffic law enforcement program. Emphasis

should be placed on the principles of selective enforcement with resources directed toward specific
areas and violations deemed important to the Department's traffic enforcement program.
2. Enforcement action shall be carried out by all Department personnel in a fair, impartial and
courteous manner. The officer's actions should demonstrate a positive and professional demeanor at
all times.
3. Sworn officers shall take the appropriate enforcement action for each violation of the law
reported or observed. Enforcement actions will be accomplished using one of the following methods:
VERBAL WARNING -A verbal warning is appropriate when the violator commits an act that may be
due to ignorance of a local ordinance, the Vehicle Code or in the case of a condition of which the
driver may not be aware.
WRITTEN WARNING - A written warning may be appropriate for a minor infraction where crash
experience is minimal. For example, passing a stop sign at a speed slower than walking when other
traffic is not affected.
CITATION - The citation should be issued to violators who jeopardize the safe movement of
pedestrian or vehicular traffic. This includes operating unsafe or improperly equipped vehicles, and
serious license and registration violations.
CUSTODIAL ARREST - Officers will effect the arrest of any person in violation of traffic laws of a
serious nature. Officers shall use sound legal principles and comply with the provisions established
in the Vehicle Code.
JUVENILES - If a juvenile is arrested for a jailable Vehicle Code violation the parent/guardian will be
notified as soon as possible.
2. Juvenile traffic violators will be issued "I" bonds if they are unable to post bond as set by
statute.
3. Officers will advise juveniles that a parent/guardian must accompany them if they go to court.
SUSPENDED/REVOKED OR NO VALID DRIVER'S LICENSE
1. If the officer has received verification that the driver’s license has been suspended or revoked,
he should effect custodial arrest of the driver, and assume responsibility for the subject and his
property. The driver's vehicle may be parked at the scene or towed with supervisory approval.
2. If the officer is unable to determine the status of the driver's license he should issue any
appropriate citations. If it is determined later that the driver's license is suspended or revoked, he
should file the additional charges in court, contact the driver and ask him to voluntarily come into the
station for new charges, or seek a warrant.
TRAFFIC PATROL VISIBILITY/OBSERVATIONS
1. The most effective deterrent to traffic law violations is visible patrol in a marked vehicle. Traffic
law enforcement activities should be directed toward education and prevention rather than
apprehension.
2. Officers shall drive patrol vehicles in accordance with existing laws and in such a manner as to
demonstrate exemplary driving behavior.
3. In those areas where stationary observation is necessary to maximize the effectiveness of a

selective enforcement effort, officers shall park in a conspicuous location and in such a manner that
traffic flow is not impeded.
4. Covert traffic enforcement units will be concealed from view of the roadway being observed.
The concealment is to the extent that the observer is not visible to persons using ordinary powers of
observations.
5. Unmarked vehicles will not normally be used for traffic enforcement activities. Any use of
unmarked vehicles for traffic enforcement requires supervisory approval. Unmarked vehicles may be
used for routine patrol in the same manner as marked cars if special enforcement needs exist.
Officers are discouraged from enforcing minor traffic violations while in unmarked vehicles.
Unmarked vehicles must be equipped with emergency lights and siren.
SPEED ENFORCEMENT/RADAR
1. The use of speed measuring devices can be an effective means of reducing speed related
traffic violations. Supervisors will assign the use of radar equipment and determine the location for
enforcement.
2. Radar will be assigned to high or potentially high crash locations where speed is a factor;
where speed violations are prevalent; in school zones; in response to citizen complaints; and, when
conducting traffic volume and speed studies.
3. Department radar equipment shall be manufactured to meet National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration specifications.
4. Officer's operating radar equipment will:
Inspect the radar unit for visible damage;
Check the unit's internal calibration according to manufacturer’s guidelines;
Check the unit's L.E.D. diodes for proper function; and
By use of the tuning fork, check the unit for accuracy.
5. Officers using radar equipment are responsible for reporting to their supervisor any
malfunctions, problems, or damage to the radar equipment and will forward all requests for service or
repairs through their supervisor to the Administrative Services Commander.
6. Department radar units will be inspected and certified annually. If a unit has been damaged or
malfunctions it will be repaired and recertified. The Administrative Services Commander will be
responsible for maintaining records of all repairs and certification reports.
7. The Department will maintain a training program for patrol officers in radar operations.
REPORTING INCOMPETENT DRIVERS
1. Routine enforcement, crash reporting and investigation activities frequently lead to the
discovery of drivers who have a physical or mental condition which might prevent the person from
operating a motor vehicle in a safe and reasonable manner.
2. Officers detecting a person who appears to be incompetent, physically or mentally disabled, or

suffers from disease or other conditions that prevent him from exercising reasonable and ordinary
care over a motor vehicle, will request a reexamination by the Secretary of State.
3. When requesting a reexamination the officer must be specific and relate the circumstances
that provide the basis for the request by completing and submitting to the Secretary of State the
Driver Condition or Behavior Report - Re-examination Request.
PEDESTRIAN AND BICYCLE ENFORCEMENT
1. Officers will take appropriate enforcement action when and where pedestrian and bicycle
violations are observed.
2. The enforcement action will be commensurate with the pedestrian and bicycle crash
experience, and at times and places as determined through analysis of crash reports.
3. The enforcement of traffic laws pertaining to pedestrians and bicyclists requires broad
discretion from individual officers. To provide guidance in this discretion the following procedures are
established:
Before any substantial increase in the enforcement of pedestrian or bicycle traffic, sufficient publicity
and community awareness programs will be implemented.
Officers shall concentrate their efforts on pedestrian and bicycle violations in those areas where
crashes have been frequent and severe.
In those areas where traffic flow is minimal and crashes involving pedestrians and bicycles are low,
officers should exercise discretion in the application of the law.
4. The Crime Prevention Unit shall be responsible for the implementation of bicycle and
pedestrian safety programs. These programs should be directed toward those age groups with the
highest percentage of involvement with bicycle/pedestrian crashes.
PARKING ENFORCEMENT
1. All existing parking regulations will be enforced with reasonableness and impartiality in all
areas of the Village.
2. Street parking is restricted in various areas to ensure fair access to parking and to expedite the
flow of traffic during peak hours.
3. Special restrictions apply to weather emergencies and the type of vehicle class.
4. Officers shall enforce parking violations with discretion, taking into account the seriousness of
the violation.
5. Special attention should be given to the following areas:

Handicapped parking violations;
Fire hydrant-parking violations;
Business areas during peak hours;
Primary snow route violations; and Fire lanes.

6. When vehicles are parked in such a manner as to require their immediate removal, officers
shall attempt to locate the owner. If unsuccessful, the vehicle shall be towed according to
Department procedures.
7. Permission may be granted to illegally park certain vehicles in some situations. The Patrol
Division commander or the Chief of Police must approve all major requests for illegal parking in these
special circumstances. The watch commander can approve minor deviations from parking
enforcement.
8. Parking regulations may be enforced in private parking areas, provided there has been a
contractual agreement as provided by ordinance in accordance with the Vehicle Code.
OFF-ROAD VEHICLE ENFORCEMENT
1. Officers shall be alert to off-road vehicles (snowmobiles, dirt bikes, and mini-bikes) which are
being used in the City/Village illegally, particularly when their use results in citizen complaints of
excessive noise, trespassing and property damage.
2. Officers shall take appropriate action for violations committed by operators of off-road vehicles.
3. Officers shall enforce all applicable laws pertaining to the operation and registration of off-road
vehicles.
4. Special attention should be made to the following:
Removal of unlicensed vehicles from streets and highways;
Violations of off-road vehicle registration laws;
Misuse of public and private property;
Citizen complaints of noise, trespass and property damage; and
Juvenile offenders.
Title: ROADBLOCKS Procedure: 4.616
PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines on the use of roadblocks in emergency situations.
POLICY:
The Police Department may use roadblocks for checking drivers and their vehicles, controlling traffic
for public ceremonies and parades, and detouring traffic from accident or disaster scenes.
Roadblocks are sometimes necessary to apprehend persons fleeing from the scene of a serious
crime or attempting to evade arrest. The Police Department will use emergency roadblocks as a last
resort to apprehend dangerous criminals, and only when the proper conditions have been satisfied to
ensure the safety of the officers and public affected.
DEFINITION:
A roadblock is defined as a restriction or obstruction used or intended for the purpose of preventing
free passage of motor vehicles on a roadway in order to effect the apprehension of a suspect.
PROCEDURE:
EMERGENCY ROADBLOCKS
1. Roadblocks are authorized only with the expressed approval of a supervisor.
2. The decision to place a roadblock will be made considering several factors. These include, but
are not limited to:
Number of officers available;
Seriousness of the crime;
Sufficient information available on subjects and vehicle;
Elapsed time of the criminal act;
Danger to the officer and public; and
That a roadblock constitutes a use of force.
3. When the need for a roadblock arises, a supervisor will evaluate the available information and
determine whether a roadblock is warranted and can safely be implemented.
4. A supervisor must authorize, plan, implement and directly supervise roadblock operations.
5. Roadblock locations shall be chosen so that the safety of officers will be maximized. There
must be a clear view of the roadblock so vehicles will be able to stop. Roadblocks will be avoided on
curves, hills or where the approaching vehicles are unable to clearly see that a roadblock is present.
6. Officers will not remain inside a vehicle used for blocking the roadway.
7. Adequate warning to approaching vehicles is a necessity, unless the only vehicle reasonably
expected as the first to approach the roadblock is that of an offender against whom deadly force is
authorized, and there is insufficient time to warn the offender prior to his arrival.
8. If the suspect vehicle is being pursued by the police a warning must be provided to pursuing
vehicles of the roadblock and the positions of officers manning the roadblock.
9. The following blocking techniques will be utilized:
GENERAL
The general position of the parked patrol vehicle is at a 45-degree angle to the traffic flow. This is
useful when conditions do not permit bringing vehicles to a complete stop and allows the officer to
check the passing vehicles because of their slowed speed. No person will be allowed to remain in a
vehicle used to block the roadway.
TWO-LANE ROADWAYS
On a two-lane road, to stop traffic traveling in only one direction, the vehicle will be parked at a 45-
degree angle to the flow of traffic, partially on the roadway, blocking the lane used by the traffic to be
stopped. The normal speed, stopping distance and element of surprise will be considered when
placing warning signs for the roadblock. In darkness the signs will be illuminated.
A stop sign should be placed at the roadblock point. At night red lights or flares may also be
necessary. There should be sufficient illumination from a light source so the police officer will be
readily recognizable to the traffic. Once a vehicle has stopped, it should be approached in the
manner normally used when approaching a violator's vehicle.
While the first officer is checking the vehicle, a second officer should take a position allowing him to
cover the entire area. If a third officer is available, he should take a position of natural cover out of
the firing line of the other officers.
Light traffic may be stopped in both directions using this blocking system. Heavy traffic will require
this blocking procedure on both sides of the road. The blocks should be close enough to one another
to be within sight and to provide assistance as necessary.
MULTI-LANE ROADWAYS
The blockade of one side of the multi-lane roadway is basically the same as that for the two-lane
roadway. Additional warning signs will be necessary and if traffic speeds are high, placement must
be further ahead. Flares and signs should be used to funnel traffic down to one or two lanes.
10. Only marked police vehicles will be used in roadblocks. Privately owned vehicles will not be
used to set up a roadblock.
11. Moving roadblocks will not be used without watch commander approval.
12. Safety of the officers and all civilians will be the primary concern in utilizing the roadblock.
13. Supervisor's will fully inform officers manning the roadblock about the nature and seriousness
of the crime, the description of the vehicle and the wanted person, a description of any weapons
involved, and if possible any previous record of the suspect.
14. Officers manning a roadblock will be in full uniform including the traffic safety vest.
15. Roadblocks will be well lighted by means of emergency lights, spotlights, fusees, and other
available lighting equipment. Special care must be taken to not blind drivers of vehicles as they
approach the roadblock.
The emergency roadblock will be conducted in conjunction with the authority granted by statute and
case law, and the enforcement of state and local laws will be exercised in good faith.
NON-EMERGENCY ROADBLOCKS
1. Roadblocks for parades, public ceremonies, the random checking of drivers or other non-
emergency situation requires prior approval from the Chief of Police or his designee.
2. Supervisors will submit a plan detailing the time, location, equipment, blocking technique,
purpose, and manpower required for establishing the roadblock.
3. Non-emergency roadblocks will be implemented and supervised by a supervisor.
4. Procedures used for non-emergency roadblocks will follow those applicable guidelines for
emergency roadblocks.
Supervisors will submit to the Chief of Police the results, and detail any incidents that occur during
roadblock operations other than for parades or public ceremonies.
6. The non-emergency roadblock will be conducted in conjunction with the authority granted by
statute and case law, and the enforcement of state and local laws will be exercised in good faith.
Title: ROADSIDE SAFETY CHECKS Procedure: 4.617
PURPOSE:
To promote the safety of persons using public roadways and to provide a continuing deterrent for
those who violate statutes contained in the Vehicle Code and Municipal Code with particular
emphasis on the following:
Driving under the influence of alcohol/drugs.
Occupant protection (seatbelts/child restraint).
Mandatory insurance act.
No valid, suspended or revoked driver's license.
Unsafe equipment (lighting, tires, brakes, etc.).
POLICY:
It shall be the policy of this department that roadside safety checks be performed professionally and
courteously, and with a view towards educating the public about proper driving procedures.
PROCEDURE:
AUTHORITY AND TACTICS

1. The roadside safety check will be conducted in conjunction with the authority granted by
statute and case law, and the enforcement of state and local laws will be exercised in good faith.
2. Any tactic used by police officers in a roadside safety check will be in accordance with the
following considerations and priorities:
Enhancement of officer and motorist safety.
Avoidance of undue inconvenience to the public.
The deterrent effect created by the roadside safety check.
DETAIL REQUIREMENTS
1. The Chief of Police or his designee will assign a supervisor to serve as the Checkpoint
Commander who will conduct a pre-detail briefing immediately prior to the setup and activation of a
checkpoint.
2. The checkpoint site selection will fulfill the following minimum requirements:
Sufficient visibility to oncoming motorists to ensure officer and motorist safety.
Ample space for police and subject vehicles in screening area.

Reduced opportunity for motorists to avoid or escape from the checkpoint.
Sufficient advance warning devices will be in place before activation of the checkpoint to ensure
officer and motorist safety.
Uniformed officers and marked police vehicles will be in sufficient quantity and visibility to clearly
indicate the presence of legal authority.
CHECKPOINT PROCEDURES
1. The checkpoint commander will be responsible for:
Establishing target violations;
Deploying personnel;
Obtaining necessary equipment; and,
Preparing an activity summary and submitting it to the Patrol Division Commander.
2. The selection sequence of vehicles to be stopped will be uniformly applied as prescribed. This
sequence may only be altered by the checkpoint commander who will document the reason for the
alteration.
3. Assigned officers will not have the authority to change the operational plan. Officer discretion
will only be applied as designated by the checkpoint commander.
4. The checkpoint commander will be present on scene to guide operations. Should it become
necessary to leave the scene, an acting supervisor will be appointed.
5. The checking process must be thorough while causing a minimal delay to motorists. So long
as the available mobile data terminals are functioning properly, driver's licenses and registration will
be routinely checked for validity.
6. Officers will be particularly vigilant for any signs of motorist impairment. If an officer detects a
violation or acquires probable cause to believe an offense has been committed, appropriate
enforcement action will be taken.
7. The courteous treatment of motorists by officers will be a high priority.
ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS
1. Roadway traffic will be closely monitored to avoid excessive congestion.
2. Any police agency that assists in the checkpoint operation will be expected to abide by this
procedure.
3. Roadside safety checks should be highly publicized to enhance the general deterrent effect of
such activities.
Title: EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION WITH PEOPLE WHO ARE DEAF OR HARD OF HEARING
Procedure: 4.618
Date Issued: August 20, 2010
PURPOSE:
It is the policy of this law enforcement agency, the Palos Park Police Department, to ensure that a
consistently high level of service is provided to all community members, including those who are deaf
or hard of hearing. This Agency has specific legal obligations under the Americans with Disabilities
Act and the Rehabilitation Act. To carry out these policies and legal obligations, the Agency instructs
its officers and employees (hereinafter, "officers" 1) as follows:
• People who identify themselves as deaf or hard of hearing are entitled to a level of service
equivalent to that provided hearing persons.
• The Agency will make every effort to ensure that its officers and employees communicate
effectively with people who have identified themselves as deaf or hard of hearing.
• Effective communication with a person who is deaf or hard of hearing involved in an incident --
whether as a victim, witness, suspect, or arrestee -- is essential in ascertaining what actually
occurred, the urgency of the matter, and type of situation.
• Various types of communication aids - known as "auxiliary aids and services" - are used to
communicate with people who are deaf or hard of hearing. These include use of gestures or visual
aids to supplement oral communication; an exchange of written notes; use of a computer or
typewriter; use of assistive listening devices (to amplify sound for persons who are hard of hearing);
or use of qualified oral or sign language interpreters.
• The type of aid that will be required for effective communication will depend on the individual's
usual method of communication, and the nature, importance, and duration of the communication at
issue.
• In many circumstances, oral communication supplemented by gestures and visual aids, an

exchange of written notes, use of a computer or typewriter, or use of an assistive listening device may
be effective. In other circumstances, qualified sign language or oral interpreters are needed to
communicate effectively with persons who are deaf or hard of hearing. The more lengthy, complex,
and important the communication, the more likely it is that a qualified interpreter will be required for
effective communication with a person whose primary means of communication is sign language or
speech reading. For example:
If there has been an incident and the officer is conducting witness interviews, a qualified sign
language interpreter may be required to communicate effectively with someone whose primary
means of communication is sign language.
If a person is asking an officer for directions to a location, gestures and an exchange of
written notes will likely be sufficient to communicate effectively and a sign language interpreter is
often not required.
To serve each individual effectively, primary consideration should be given to the

communication aid or service that works best for that person. Officers must ask persons who are deaf
or hard of hearing what type of auxiliary aid or service they need. Officers must defer to those
expressed choices, unless there is another equally effective way of communicating, given the
circumstances, length, complexity, and importance of the communication, as well as the
communication skills of the person who is deaf or hard of hearing.
The Agency is not required to provide a particular auxiliary aid or service if doing so would
fundamentally alter the nature of the law enforcement activity in question, or if it would cause an
undue administrative or financial burden. Only the Agency head or his or her designee may make this
determination. For example:
If the Agency has limited financial resources and providing a particular auxiliary aid would cost
a large sum of money, the Agency head may determine that it would be an undue financial burden
(note: the Agency's budget as a whole must be considered). In this situation, the most effective
means of communication that does not involve an undue burden must be used.
The input of people who are deaf or hard of hearing who are involved in incidents is just as
important to the law enforcement process as the input of others. Officers must not draw conclusions
about incidents unless they fully understand -- and are understood by -- all those involved, including
persons who are deaf or hard of hearing.
People who are deaf or hard of hearing must never be charged for the cost of an auxiliary aid
or service needed for effective communication.
ON-CALL INTERPRETIVE SERVICES
The Agency will maintain a list of sign language and oral interpreting services that are
available (on-call 24 hours per day) and willing to provide qualified interpreters as needed. Each of
these services will be chosen after having been screened for the quality and skill of its interpreters, its
reliability, and other factors such as cost. The Agency will update this list annually.
A qualified sign language or oral interpreter is one who is able to interpret effectively,
accurately, and impartially, both receptively and expressively, using any necessary specialized
vocabulary. Accordingly, an interpreter must be able to sign to the deaf individual (or interpret orally to
the person who does not use sign language) what is being said by the hearing person and to voice to
the hearing person what is being signed or said by the deaf individual. The interpreter must be able to
interpret in the language the deaf person uses (e.g., American Sign Language or Signed English) and
must be familiar with law enforcement terms and phrases. Because a qualified interpreter must be
able to interpret impartially, a family member, child, or friend of the individual who is deaf may not be
qualified to render the necessary interpretation because of factors such as professional, emotional, or
personal involvement, or considerations of confidentiality. Additionally, although a "qualified"
interpreter may be certified, a certified interpreter is not necessarily "qualified," if he or she is not a
good communications match for the deaf person (e.g., where the deaf person uses Signed English
and the interpreter uses American Sign Language) or the situation (e.g., where the interpreter is
unfamiliar with law enforcement vocabulary). Certification is not required in order for an interpreter to
be "qualified."
TTY AND RELAY SERVICES

• In situations when a non-disabled person would have access to a telephone, officers must
provide persons who are deaf or hard of hearing the opportunity to place calls using a text telephone
(TTY, also known as a telecommunications device for deaf people, or TDD). Officers must also
accept telephone calls placed by persons who are deaf or hard of hearing through the
Telecommunications Relay Service.
TECHNIQUES FOR OFFICERS TO COMMUNICATE EFFECTIVELY
• Officers must review and have a working knowledge of Guide for Law Enforcement Officers
When In Contact With People Who Are Deaf or Hard of Hearing. This document reviews how officers
should communicate effectively in the types of situations officers will encounter. These situations
include: - Issuing a non-criminal or motor vehicle citation. –
• Communicating with a person who initiates contact with an officer.

• Interviewing a victim or critical witness to an incident.
• Questioning a person who is a suspect in a crime.
• Making an arrest or taking a person into custody.
• Issuing Miranda Warnings to a person under arrest or in custody.
• Interrogating a person under arrest or in custody.
TYPES OF AUXILIARY AIDS AND SERVICES

Officers must utilize the following auxiliary aids, when available, to communicate effectively:
• Use of gestures
• Use of visual aids
• Exchange of written notes
• Use of computers or typewriters
• Use of assistive listening devices
• Use of teletypewriters (TTY's)
• Use of qualified oral or sign language interpreters
Communicating with People Who Are Deaf or Hard of

Hearing ADA Guide for Palos Park Police Officers
As a law enforcement officer, you can expect to come into contact

with people who are deaf or hard of hearing. It is estimated that
up to nine percent of the population has some degree of hearing
loss, and this percentage will increase as the population ages.
Under the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), people who are
deaf or hard of hearing are entitled to the same services law
enforcement provides to anyone else. They may not be excluded
or segregated from services, be denied services, or otherwise be A driver who is deaf writes
treated differently than other people. Law enforcement agencies on a pad of paper to
must make efforts to ensure that their personnel communicate communicate with an
effectively with people whose disability affects hearing. This officer.
applies to both sworn and civilian personnel.
Your agency has adopted a specific policy regarding communicating with people who are deaf or
hard of hearing. It is important to become familiar with this policy.
Requirements for Effective Communication

The ADA requires that . . .
• Law enforcement agencies must provide the communication aids and services needed to
communicate effectively with people who are deaf or hard of hearing, except when a particular aid or
service would result in an undue burden or a fundamental change in the nature of the law
enforcement services being provided.
• Agencies must give primary consideration to providing the aid or service requested by the person
with the hearing disability.
• Agencies cannot charge the person for the communication aids or services provided.
• Agencies do not have to provide personally prescribed devices such as hearing aids.
• When interpreters are needed, agencies must provide interpreters who can interpret effectively,
accurately, and impartially.
• Only the head of the agency or his or her designee can make the determination that a particular aid
or service would cause an undue burden or a fundamental change in the nature of the law
enforcement services being provided.
Communicating with People Who are Deaf or Hard of Hearing

Officers may find a variety of communication aids and services useful in different situations.
• Speech supplemented by gestures and visual aids can be used in some cases.
• A pad and pencil, a word processor, or a typewriter can be used to exchange written notes.
• A teletypewriter (TTY, also known as a TDD) can be used to exchange written messages over the
telephone.
• An assistive listening system or device to amplify sound can be used when speaking with a person
who is hard of hearing.
• A sign language interpreter can be used when speaking with a person who knows sign language.
• An oral interpreter can be used when speaking with a person who has been trained to speech read
(read lips). Note: Do not assume that speech reading will be effective in most situations. On average,
only about one third of spoken words can be understood by speech reading.
The type of situation, as well as the individual’s abilities, will determine which aid or service is needed
to communicate effectively.
Practical Suggestions for Communicating Effectively

• Before speaking, get the person’s attention with a wave of the hand or a gentle tap on the shoulder.
• Face the person and do not turn away while speaking.
• Try to converse in a well-lit area.
• Do not cover your mouth or chew gum.
• If a person is wearing a hearing aid, do not assume the individual can hear you.
• Minimize background noise and other distractions whenever possible.
• When you are communicating orally, speak slowly and distinctly. Use gestures and facial
expressions to reinforce what you are saying.
• Use visual aids when possible, such as pointing to printed information on a citation or other
document.
• Remember that only about one third of spoken words can be understood by speech reading.
• When communicating by writing notes, keep in mind that some individuals who use sign language
may lack good English reading and writing skills.
• If someone with a hearing disability cannot understand you, write a note to ask him or her what
communication aid or service is needed.
• If a sign language interpreter is requested, be sure to ask which language the person uses.
American Sign Language (ASL) and Signed English are the most common.
• When you are interviewing a witness or a suspect or engaging in any complex conversation with a
person whose primary language is sign language, a qualified interpreter is usually needed to ensure
effective communication.
• When using an interpreter, look at and speak directly to the deaf person, not to the interpreter.
• Talk at your normal rate, or slightly slower if you normally speak very fast.
• Only one person should speak at a time.
• Use short sentences and simple words.
• Do not use family members or children as interpreters. They may lack the vocabulary or the
impartiality needed to interpret effectively.
Generally, interpreter services are not required for simple transactions – such as checking a license
or giving directions to a location – or for urgent situations – such as responding to a violent crime in
progress.
Palos Park Police Department contact information for obtaining an interpreter, an assistive listening
device, or other communication aid or service SWCD 708 448 6180
Title: Wearable Mini Cameras Procedure: 4.619
Portable Audio/Video Device
Date Issued: June 18, 2011
POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the Palos Park Police to provide officers with a method to record and
document law enforcement activity through the use of on officer audio/video equipment designed to
record officer involved incidents as they are occurring.
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this directive is to set standards for the use and management of department approved
on officer audio video equipment.
The Palos Park Police Department has initiated a pilot program utilizing a wearable recording system
to meet the following objectives
To enhance officer safety

To document statements and events as they are occurring
To enhance an officer’s ability to document and review statements and actions for reporting purposes
To preserve video information
To serve as a tool for officer training
To enhance public trust
PROCEDURE:
Officers wearing the wearable cameras must notify their supervisors that they have one, turn over
video for review by supervisors, and submit recordings of evidentiary value. When the wearable
camera is being used, it should always be operating in critical situations like, fights, altercations,
serious car accidents, in progress calls, etc…
In essence, officers wearing department issued cameras should activate the cameras on every call.
OPTIONS/DIFFERENCES: IN CAR CAMERA VS WEARABLE CAMERA
Illinois law currently allows you to use the sound/video interaction on all traffic enforcement stops.
When you are on a call and/or going into a home or business, the Sound portion of the wearable
camera must be turned off
You can use the wearable camera sound and video on a traffic stop; you cannot record the sound
during a call for service. The video can be on; the sound must be turned off.
Police interactions are increasingly recorded, not only on cell phones, but by officers.
Cameras have been on the dashboards of patrol units for years. This innovation places the cameras
on police officers themselves. The cameras ensure accurate police reports and allow immediate
viewing, to help in evidence collection, crime scene setting and real time scene footage.
Cameras used: SCORPION MICRO DV
***Any videos of arrests containing serious/violent natures or incidents/call that have the
potential to end in litigation shall be saved onto a dvd/cd disc for a period of two years***
Title: CONCEALED FIREARMS CARRY
EFFECTIVE DATE: October 30, 2014
REVIEW DATE: March 1, 2019
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to provide Palos Park Police Department employees with a uniform set
of guidelines to govern their actions as it pertains to the Firearm Concealed Carry Act (430 ILCS 66/
et seq.).
CONCEALED CARRY
A. Pursuant to the Firearm Concealed Carry Act (430 ILCS 66/ et seq.), private citizens, under certain
conditions, with the required training and with specified restrictions, will be allowed to carry a
concealed or partially concealed firearm within the State of Illinois.
Concealed Firearms Carry

1. The Chief of Police or his designee shall have final approval on any objection.
If the objection is approved by the Chief of Police or his designee, a committee member shall forward
the objection and applicant's arrest record, and any additional information to the Concealed Carry
Licensing
Review Board through the website.

F. According to 430 ILCS 66/45, with the exception of willful and wanton misconduct, a law
enforcement agency cannot be held liable for any damages in any civil action arising from alleged
wrongful or improper granting, denying, renewing, revoking, suspending, or failing to grant, deny,
renew, revoke, or suspend a license under the Firearm Concealed Carry Act.
LAW ENFORCEMENT OBJECTION CRITERIA

A. Section 15 of the Firearm Concealed Carry Act (430 ILCS 66/ et seq.) authorizes law enforcement
agencies to object to a license application for a Concealed Carry License.
1. The following criteria shall be used as the basis of the objection under the Act:
a. Based upon a reasonable suspicion, the applicant is a danger to himself or herself or others, or a
threat to public safety or
b. If a license applicant has 5 or more arrests for any reason that have been entered into the Criminal
History Records Information (CHRI) System, within the 7 years preceding the date of application for a
license or
c. Has 3 or more arrests within the 7 years preceding the date of application for a license for any
combination of gang-related offenses,
1) For purposes of this subsection, "gang-related offense" is an offense described in Section 12-
A. Custodial Arrest with a Valid Concealed Carry License and a Firearm
1. If an individual, having a valid Concealed Carry License and carrying a firearm, is placed into
custody for an offense that is NOT in violation of the Firearm Concealed Carry Act (430 ILCS 66/ et
seq.) or 720 ILCS 5/24-1, Unlawful Use of Weapons or any other applicable statute where a firearm is
an element of the crime (i.e. Aggravated Assault) the following procedures shall be adhered to:
a. The firearm(s) will be placed into custody by the arresting officer.
b. A LEADS inquiry of the firearms shall be made.
c. The firearm(s) will be transported to the department under the following circumstances:
1) The firearm(s) cannot be turned over to another individual, at the request of the owner, with a
valid Concealed Carry License at the scene, or
2) The firearm(s) cannot be turned over to another individual, at the request of the owner, with a valid
Firearm Owner's Identification Card (FOID card) and in accordance with 720 ILCS 5/24-1(a)10
(broken down in a non-functioning state; or are not immediately accessible; or are unloaded and
enclosed in a case, firearm carrying box, shipping box, or other), or 3) The firearm(s) are not capable
of being stored safely on scene, or
4) The request of the owner.
d. Gun cases are available for firearm(s) transport to the Department and are located in the patrol
supervisor vehicles.
e. The transporting officer shall transport the arrestee into the sally port.
f. The arrestee’s firearms shall be placed in the lockbox located in the sally port prior to the arrestee
being brought into lock-up.
g. After securing the firearm(s), the arrestee will be escorted into lock-up and processed accordingly.
h. The Detention Aide shall be notified of the firearm(s) held for safekeeping in the bond out room
lockbox.
i. The transporting officer shall exit the lock-up and remove the arrestee’s firearm(s) from the lockbox.
j. The transporting officer will walk the firearm(s) around to the lock box located adjacent to the lock-
up.
k. The transporting officer shall secure all applicable firearm(s) inside the lock box before returning to
lock-up.
l. The transporting officer shall hand the lockbox key over to the Detention Aide.
m. If the arrestee bonds, the Detention Aide shall do the following:
1) Provide the arrestee with all his property held within the lock-up area.
2) Explain to the arrestee that his firearm(s) are located in a lock box located inside the bond out
room.
3) Advise the arrestee once he has bonded that he may not return to the department while
possessing a firearm(s).
4) Escort the arrestee into the bond out room.
5) Hand the arrestee the lock box key and immediately return to the lock-up.
6) Prior to re-entry into the bond out room for any reason, ensure that the arrestee has left.
If an individual is carrying a firearm and is placed into custody for an offense that IS in violation of the
Firearm Concealed Carry Act (430 ILCS 66/ et seq.), Unlawful Use of Weapons (720 ILCS 5/24-1), or
any other applicable statute where a firearm is an element of the crime (i.e. Aggravated Assault), the
arresting officer shall place the firearm(s) into Evidence Recovery and Property Section as outlined in
Assist to Fire Department
In the event that a fire protection district is requesting the department’s assistance with securing a
firearm(s) from an individual requiring medical attention, the assisting officer shall place the firearm(s)
into Evidence Recovery and Property Section
PROPERTY ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATIONS under the following circumstances:

a. The firearm(s) cannot be turned over to another individual with a valid Concealed Carry License at
the scene, with the owner’s request.
b. The firearm(s) cannot be turned over to another individual, at the request of the owner, with a valid
Firearm Owner's Identification Card (FOID card) and in accordance with 720 ILCS 5/24-1(a)10
(broken down in a non-functioning state; or are not immediately accessible; or are unloaded and
enclosed in a case, firearm carrying box, shipping box, or other), or
c. The firearm(s) are not capable of being stored safely on scene (i.e. at the home of the person
requiring medical attention), or
d. The request of the owner.
Concealed Firearms Carry
2. An inquiry of the validity of the Concealed Carry License shall be made.
3. Any firearm held for safekeeping shall be checked through LEADS prior to entry into ERPS.
4. A general case report shall be written outlining the facts surrounding the assistance to the fire
department and the need to have the firearm(s) placed into ERPS.
a. The name of the person any firearm is turned over to shall be placed in the applicable written
report.
C. Transportation
1. Only sworn personnel shall provide transportation to valid Concealed Carry License holders who
are in possession of a concealed firearm.
b. An officer has the right to ask and secure the firearm(s) of any valid Concealed Carry License
holder prior to providing approved transportation in a department vehicle.
c. If the Concealed Carry License holder refuses to relinquish any firearm(s) prior to transportation in
a department vehicle, the transporting officer may refuse to provide a ride.
Title: Operations Audio Procedure: 4.620(a)
Recording Equipment
Date Issued: July 1, 2013
PURPOSE:
To provide guidelines for the use of mobile audio recording equipment. (Sony ICD PX333 Digital
Voice Recorder)
This procedure applies to sworn officers. Mobile video/ audio recording equipment has been
demonstrated to be of value in the prosecution of traffic violations and related offenses, in evaluation
of officer performance as well as in training.
In order to maximize the utility of this equipment in these related areas, officers shall follow the
procedures for mobile audio/video recording equipment use as set forth in this policy.
Program Objectives:
This agency adopted the use of in-car video/audio recording systems (4.610) in order to accomplish
several objectives, including:
Accurate documentation of events, actions, conditions, and statements made during arrests and
critical incidents, so as to enhance officer reports, collection of evidence and testimony in court.
The enhancement of this agency’s ability to review probable cause for arrest, arrest procedures,
officer and suspect interaction and evidence for investigative purposes, as well as for officer
evaluation and training.
We now seek to enhance Policy 4:610 with an audio recording system for patrol officers.
Operation Procedure:
This agency will issue and use audio recording systems for patrol officers, with the devices assigned
to each full time sworn officer. Additional devices will be available as needed.
Officers will be trained in the use of the equipment prior to use.
Prior to each shift, officers will determine whether the audio recording equipment is working properly.
Any problems with the equipment will immediately be reported to a supervisor.
Audio recording equipment will be activated manually and used during non-enforcement activities; to
capture, memorialized and record statement, witness/victim interviews as an additional investigative
tool.
Officers will ensure that the equipment is operating in order to ensure critical interview are
memorialized.
The audio recorder should be activated in order to provide narration with the audio recording. When
possible, officers should also use the audio recorder to document:
The recording would prove useful in later judicial proceeding.

The circumstances at crime and accident scenes or other events as a tool to capture critical
statements and interviews.
Officers will not alter audio recording media.
All recordings will be properly identified and labeled prior to being submitted as evidence or being
submitted for storage.
Officers will inform a supervisor of any recording sequences that may be of value for evidentiary
purposes. Officers will note in incident, arrest and related reports when audio recordings were made
during the incident in question.
Officers are encouraged to review their own audio recording periodically for training purposes. The
audio system is a key note taking source and review tool when writing reports.
Control and Management:
Any audio recordings containing information that may be of value for case prosecution or in any
criminal or civil proceeding shall be handled and safeguarded as other forms of evidence.
This recording will:
Be subject to the same security restrictions and chain of evidence safeguards as detailed in this
agency’s evidence control procedure.
Not be released to another criminal justice agency for trial or other reasons without having a duplicate
copy made and returned to safe storage.
Not be release to other than bona fide criminal justice agencies without prior approval of the Chief of
Police.
Recording should be stored in the PPPD case file for a minimum of 90 days.
All recording should be marked in a manner that allows efficient identification and retrieval.
Recordings will be marked with the offense number or subject’s name.
Supervisors will ensure that damaged or nonfunctional audio recording equipment is promptly
reported to the Chief of Police.
The device that will be issued and used by the Palos Park Police Department is the Sony ICD PX333
Digital Voice Recorder.
SUBJECT: INTERACTION WITH THE MENTALLY ILL
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this order is to provide guidance and procedures for department members to use
when interacting with people who are suspected to be mentally ill and/or in need of mental health
treatment.
POLICY:
Police officers are often called upon to respond to incidents involving persons who are known to be or
suspected of suffering from a mental illness. The degree of police involvement or intervention
depends on the condition of the particular individual as well as the circumstances surrounding the
encounter. In non-emergency situations police intervention may be required to help calm a person in
crisis, provide information, and whenever appropriate, link the person with mental health
professionals or organizations for treatment. In emergency situations, it is necessary for the benefit
and safety of the individual and the community to take the person into custody in order to insure that
their mental stability is properly evaluated.
Nothing in this policy is intended to increase, modify, or in any way affect the current legal standards
nor shall any deviation from these guidelines be considered a breach of any legal standard.
DEFINITIONS:
Delusion: False beliefs that are deeply entrenched and clearly not based in reality and are not
consistent with cultural beliefs or the person’s level of intelligence and life experiences. Persons cling
to these beliefs even after they are shown to be false.
Dementia: Two or more symptoms involving progressive impairment of brain function including, but
not limited to, language, memory, visual spatial perception, emotional behavior, and cognitive skills.
Developmental Disability (405 ILCS 5/1-106): A disability which is attributable to: (a) mental
retardation, cerebral palsy, epilepsy or autism; or to (b) any other condition which results in
impairment similar to that caused by mental retardation and which requires services similar to those
required by mentally retarded persons. Such disability must originate before the age of 18 years, be
expected to continue indefinitely, and constitute a substantial handicap.
Hallucination: Auditory, olfactory, visual, or tactile false perceptions or unreal apparitions. They do not
correspond to the stimuli that are present and have no basis in reality. Hallucinations in one culture
are not in another (they may be considered visions or conversations with a higher being).
Good Faith Exception (405 ILCS 5/6-103(a) and (d)): The Illinois Compiled Statutes provides that all
persons acting in good faith and without negligence in connection with the preparation of applications,
petitions, certificates or other documents for the apprehension, transportation, examination,
treatment, habilitation, detention or discharge of an individual under the provisions of this act incur no
liability, civil or criminal, by reason of such acts. An act of omission or commission by a peace officer
acting in good faith rendering emergency assistance or otherwise enforcing the compiled statutes
does not impose civil liability on the peace officer or his or her supervisor or employer unless the act
is a result of willful or wanton misconduct.
Involuntary Admission Authority (405 ILCS 5/3-600). A person 18 years of age or older who is
subject to involuntary admission on an inpatient basis and in need of immediate hospitalization may
be admitted to a mental health facility.
Involuntary Admission; Petition (405 ILCS 5/3-601): When a person is asserted to be subject to
involuntary admission and in such a condition that immediate hospitalization is necessary for the
protection of such person or others from physical harm, any person 18 years of age or older may
present a Petition to the facility director of a mental health facility in the county where the respondent
resides or is present. The Petition may be prepared by the facility director of the facility.
The Petition shall include all of the following:

1. A detailed statement of the reason for the assertion that the respondent is subject to involuntary
admission, including the signs and symptoms of a mental illness and a description of any acts,
threats, or other behavior or pattern of behavior supporting the assertion and the time and place of
their occurrence.
2. The name and address of the spouse, parent, guardian, substitute decision maker, if any, and
close relative, or if none, the name and address of any known friend of the respondent whom the
petitioner has reason to believe may know or have any of the other names and addresses. If the
Petitioner is unable to supply any such names and addresses, the petitioner shall state that diligent
inquiry was made to learn this information and specify the steps taken.
3 The petitioner's relationship to the respondent and a statement as to whether the petitioner has
legal or financial interest in the matter or is involved in litigation with the respondent. If the petitioner
has a legal or financial interest in the matter or is involved in litigation with the respondent, a
statement of why the petitioner believes it would not be practicable or possible for someone else to be
the petitioner.
4. The names, addresses, and phone numbers of the witnesses by which the facts asserted may be
proved.
Mental Health Crisis: A situation where a person’s normal coping mechanisms have become
overwhelmed causing that person to pose an immediate and significant risk to himself/herself or
others.
Mental Health Facility (405 ILCS 5/1-114): Any private hospital, institution, or facility or section thereof
operated by the state or political subdivision thereof for the treatment of persons with mental illness
and includes all hospitals, institutions, clinics, evaluation facilities, and mental health centers which
provide treatment for such persons.
Mental Illness (405 ILCS 5/1-129): A mental or emotional disorder that substantially impairs a
person’s thought, perception of reality, emotional process, judgment, behavior, or ability to cope with
the ordinary demands of life, but does not include a developmental disability, dementia or Alzheimer’s
disease absent psychosis, a substance abuse disorder, or an abnormality manifested only by
repeated criminal or otherwise anti-social conduct.
Mental Retardation (405 ILCS 5/1-115): Significantly sub-average general intellectual functioning
which exists concurrently with impairment in adaptive behavior and which originates before the age
of18 years.
Peace Officers; Petitions (405 ILCS 5/3-606): A peace officer may take a person into custody and
transport him/her to a mental health facility when the peace officer has reasonable grounds to believe
that the person is subject to involuntary admission and in need of immediate hospitalization to protect
such person or others from physical harm. Upon arrival at the facility, the peace officer may complete
the petition under Section 3-601. If the petition is not completed by the peace officer transporting the
person, the transporting officer’s name, badge number, and employer shall be included in the petition
as a potential witness as provided in Section 3-601 of this chapter.
Persons Subject to Involuntary Admission (405 ILCS 5/1-119): A person with mental illness and who,
because of his/her illness, is reasonably expected to inflict serious physical harm upon oneself or
another in the near future which may include threatening behavior or conduct that places another
individual in reasonable expectation of being harmed; or a person who, because of his/her illness, is
unable to provide for his/her basic physical needs so as to guard oneself from serious physical harm
without the assistance of family or outside help.
Psychosis: A loss of contact with reality typically includes delusions and hallucinations.
A. Mental illness is quite often difficult to define in a given individual. Department members are not
expected to make judgments of mental or emotional disturbance, but rather to recognize behavior
that is potentially destructive and/or dangerous to oneself or others. The following guidelines, which
can be used on the street as well as during interviews and interrogations, are generalized signs and
symptoms of behavior that may suggest the presence of a mental illness. Department members
should not rule out other potential causes including, but not limited to, reactions to narcotics, alcohol,
or temporary emotional disturbances that are motivated by situations. Department members should
evaluate the following related symptomatic behavior in the total context of the situation when making
judgments about the individual’s mental state and need for intervention, absent the commission of a
crime.
B. Mentally ill persons may show signs of strong and unrelenting fear of persons, places, or things.
The fear of people or crowds, for example, may make the individual extremely reclusive or aggressive
without apparent provocation.
C. Individuals who demonstrate extremely inappropriate behavior for a given context may be ill. For
example, motorists who vent their frustration in a traffic jam by physically attacking another motorist
may be emotionally unstable.
D. Emotionally ill persons may be easily frustrated in new or unforeseen circumstances and may
demonstrate inappropriate or aggressive behavior in dealing with the situation.
E. In addition to the above, a mentally ill person may exhibit one or more of the following
characteristics:
1. Abnormal memory loss related to such common facts as name, home address, etc., although these
may be signs of other physical ailments such as injury or Alzheimer’s disease.
2. Delusions, the belief in thoughts or ideas that is false, such as delusions of grandeur (“I am
Christ.”) or paranoid delusions (“Everyone is out to get me.”).
3. Hallucinations of any of the five senses (hearing voices commanding the person to act, feeling
one’s skin crawl, smelling strange odors, etc.).
4. The belief that one suffers from extraordinary physical maladies that are not possible, such as a
person who is convinced that his/her heart has stopped beating for extended periods of time.
5. Obsession with recurrent and uncontrolled thoughts, ideas, and images. Extreme confusion, fright,
or depression.
F. Mental illness can also be evident when individuals display sudden changes in lifestyle which
include, but are not limited to, an unwillingness to live up to commonly accepted rules and
responsibilities, sudden and drastic mood swings, serious lack of judgment regarding money, job,
family, and property, or marked and extreme departures in dress and sexual behavior.
G. Other causes of abnormal behavior may include some of the characteristic behavior of the
mentally ill but should not be confused with mental illness. There are important differences between
individuals suffering from developmental disabilities and those who suffer from mental illness. These
include the following:
1. Subnormal intellectual capacity and deficiencies in a person’s ability to deal effectively with social
conventions and interaction. The mentally retarded may display behaviors that are rational but are
similar to younger persons who are not retarded. By contrast, the mentally ill may not be impaired
intellectually and may act in many instances as rational, functional members of society. Their
behavior generally fluctuates between the normal and the irrational. The mentally retarded individual
does not demonstrate this type of behavioral fluctuation. Mental retardation is evident during a
person’s early years and is a permanent condition for life, whereas mental illness may develop during
any period of an individual’s life. The mentally retarded individual does not engage in violent behavior
without the types of provocations that may initiate violence among the non-retarded person.
2. Persons suffering from Cerebral Palsy exhibit motor dysfunctions that may be confused with some
characteristics of either the mentally retarded or the mentally ill. These include awkwardness in
walking, involuntary, and uncontrollable movements or seizures, and problems in speed and
communication.
3. Autistic persons often engage in compulsive behavior or repetitive and peculiar body movements.
They may also display unusual reactions to objects or people they see around them, appear
insensitive to pain, and may be hyperactive, passive, or susceptible to tantrums. Such persons may
also appear retarded in some areas, but highly capable or gifted in others.
DETERMINING DANGER
A. Not all mentally ill persons are dangerous while some may represent danger only under certain
circumstances or conditions. Officers may use several indicators to determine whether an apparently
mentally ill person represents an immediate or potential danger to himself/herself, the officer, or
others.
These include the following:
1. The availability of any weapons to the suspect
2. Statements by the person that suggest to the officer that the individual is prepared to commit a
violent or dangerous act. Such comments may range from subtle innuendos to direct threats that
when taken in conjunction with other information paints a more complete picture of the potential for
violence.
3. A personal history of violence towards themselves or others in previous circumstances that is

similar or related. The officers, family, friends, or neighbors may have helpful information on the
history of disturbed person. All efforts should be made to obtain as much background information on
the person.
4. Failure of the disturbed individual to act prior to arrival of the officer does not guarantee there is no
danger, but it does tend to diminish the potential for danger.
5. The amount of control that the person demonstrates is significant, particularly the amount of
physical control over emotions or rage, anger, fright, or agitation. Signs of a lack of control include
extreme agitation, inability to sit still or communicate effectively, wide eyes, and rambling thoughts
and speech. Clutching one’s self or other objects to maintain control, begging to be left alone, or
offering frantic assurances that one is all right may also suggest that the individual is close to losing
control.
6. The volatility of the environment is a particularly relevant factor that officers must evaluate.
Agitators that may affect the person or a particular combustible environment that may incite violence
should be taken into account.
Guidelines for Contacts on the Street/Interviews and Interrogations
When an officer determines that an individual may be mentally ill and poses a potential threat to
oneself, the officer, or others, the officer shall remember that his/her personal safety and that of
others is paramount and all necessary measures shall be employed to resolve any conflict safely
utilizing the appropriate force to resolve the issue. The following represents proven techniques that
will assist the officers in handling potentially mentally ill individuals:
1. Request a backup officer especially in cases where the individual may need to be taken into
custody.
When possible, a supervisor should respond to assist the primary officer.
2. Take steps to calm the situation. Where possible, eliminate emergency lights and sirens, disperse
crowds, and assume a quiet non-threatening manner when approaching or conversing with the
individual. If violent or destructive acts have not occurred, avoid physical contact and take time to
assess the situation.
3. Move slowly and do not excite the person. Provide reassurance that the police are there to help
and that he/she will be provided with appropriate care.
4. Communicate with the individual in an attempt to determine what is bothering him/her. Relate your
concern for how the person is feeling and allow the person to express his/her feelings. Do not dispute
delusions or pretend to see or hear hallucinations; simply communicate empathy about how they are
affecting the person.
5. When possible, gather information about the person from acquaintances or family members to
better assess the situation at hand
6. Do not threaten the individual with arrest or in any other manner as this will create additional fright,
stress, and potential aggression.
7. Avoid topics that may agitate the person and guide the conversation by asking simple questions to
determine if the person is oriented (name, address, telephone number, time of day, day of the week,
date, etc.).
8. Always, attempt to be truthful with a mentally ill individual. If the subject becomes aware of a
deception, he/she may wish to withdraw from the contact in distrust and become hypersensitive or
retaliate in anger.
D. When administering the Miranda warnings for criminal offenses, officers should make every
effort to determine the extent to which the individual’s illness impairs their ability to comprehend and
give informed consent. Medications taken to treat mental illnesses may also impair comprehension
and ability to give informed consent.
E. When officers doubt an individual’s capacity to understand their rights, they shall ask the individual
to explain each of the Miranda warnings in their own words and make a record of the individual’s
explanations. If the officer believes that the individual does not have an understanding of their rights,
questioning of the individual related to the criminal investigation should cease.
Title: Operations Audio Procedure: 4.621
Recording Equipment
Date Issued: July 1, 2013
PURPOSE:
To provide guidelines for the use of mobile audio recording equipment. (Sony ICD PX333 Digital
Voice Recorder)
This procedure applies to sworn officers. Mobile video/ audio recording equipment has been
demonstrated to be of value in the prosecution of traffic violations and related offenses, in evaluation
of officer performance as well as in training.
In order to maximize the utility of this equipment in these related areas, officers shall follow the
procedures for mobile audio/video recording equipment use as set forth in this policy.
Program Objectives:
This agency adopted the use of in-car video/audio recording systems (4.610) in order to accomplish
several objectives, including:
Accurate documentation of events, actions, conditions, and statements made during arrests and
critical incidents, so as to enhance officer reports, collection of evidence and testimony in court.
The enhancement of this agency’s ability to review probable cause for arrest, arrest procedures,
officer and suspect interaction and evidence for investigative purposes, as well as for officer
evaluation and training.
We now seek to enhance Policy 4:610 with an audio recording system for patrol officers.
Operation Procedure:
This agency will issue and use audio recording systems for patrol officers, with the devices assigned
to each full time sworn officer. Additional devices will be available as needed.
Officers will be trained in the use of the equipment prior to use.

Prior to each shift, officers will determine whether the audio recording equipment is working properly.
Any problems with the equipment will immediately be reported to a supervisor.
Audio recording equipment will be activated manually and used during non-enforcement activities; to
capture, memorialized and record statement, witness/victim interviews as an additional investigative
tool.
Officers will ensure that the equipment is operating in order to ensure critical interview are
memorialized.
The audio recorder should be activated in order to provide narration with the audio recording.
When possible, officers should also use the audio recorder to document:
The recording would prove useful in later judicial proceeding.
The circumstances at crime and accident scenes or other events as a tool to capture critical
statements and interviews.
Officers will not alter audio recording media.
All recordings will be properly identified and labeled prior to being submitted as evidence or being
submitted for storage.
Officers will inform a supervisor of any recording sequences that may be of value for evidentiary
purposes. Officers will note in incident, arrest and related reports when audio recordings were made
during the incident in question.
Officers are encouraged to review their own audio recording periodically for training purposes. The
audio system is a key note taking source and review tool when writing reports.
Control and Management:
Any audio recordings containing information that may be of value for case prosecution or in any
criminal or civil proceeding shall be handled and safeguarded as other forms of evidence.
This recording will:
Be subject to the same security restrictions and chain of evidence safeguards as detailed in this
agency’s evidence control procedure.
Not be released to another criminal justice agency for trial or other reasons without having a duplicate
copy made and returned to safe storage.
Not be release to other than bona fide criminal justice agencies without prior approval of the Chief of
Police.
Recording should be stored in the PPPD case file for a minimum of 90 days.
All recording should be marked in a manner that allows efficient identification and retrieval.
Recordings will be marked with the offense number or subject’s name.
Supervisors will ensure that damaged or nonfunctional audio recording equipment is promptly
reported to the Chief of Police.
The device that will be issued and used by the Palos Park Police Department is the Sony ICD PX333
Digital Voice Recorder.
ORDER NUMBER: 4.700
SUBJECT: INSPECTIONAL SERVICES
EFFECTIVE DATE: May 1, 2002
REVIEW DATE: March 7, 2007, January 4, 2010
REVIEWER: Chief of Police
INDEX AS:
53.1.1 LINE INSPECTIONS
53.1.2 BI-ANNUAL VEHICLE INSPECTIONS
53.1.3 FACILITY INSPECTIONS

PURPOSE:
The purpose of this order is to establish procedures for conducting line inspections within all
components of the Department. The purpose of a line inspection is to identify deficiencies within the
organizational components, facilities, property, equipment, activities, and personnel and to provide for
measures to correct these deficiencies.
Identifying and correcting deficiencies in the earliest stage ensures the highest level of service
possible to the community of Palos Park.
DEFINITION:
Line Inspection: An inspection conducted by personnel in control of the persons, facilities,
procedures, or other elements being inspected. Line inspection may be carried out by any supervisor
within the chain of command and is often conducted by supervisory personnel who may also be
responsible for ensuring that any substandard conditions revealed in the inspection are corrected.
ORDER:
53.1.1 Line Inspections

A. Supervisory personnel in all components of the Palos Park Police Department are charged with the
responsibility of conducting regular line inspections so that the conditions, situations, and actions that
contribute to the success or failure of police operations are exposed by a careful review. All line
inspections are intended to examine the actual performance and operation of all components for
comparison to the Department’s formal expectations with actual performance. Inspection activities of
the Department are expected to accomplish the following:
1. An evaluation of the quality of the Department’s overall operations.

2. Ensure the Department’s goals and objectives are being pursued.
3. Identification of the need for additional resources.
4. Assure that control is maintained throughout the Department.
B. Informal Inspections
Informal inspections shall be conducted in a fair, impartial and objective manner according to the
following Guidelines
2. These inspections shall include the examination of personal appearance and Department
equipment issued to personnel, including, but not limited to, weapons and radios.
3. All supervisory staff shall randomly check vehicles for cleanliness and damage. Equipment
assigned to vehicles will be accounted for and check for proper working order.
4. Inspecting supervisors shall, through observation and questioning, determine their subordinates
level of knowledge of Department orders and directives, and compliance with same.
C. Formal Inspections
Formal inspections shall be conducted in a fair, impartial and objective manner with full knowledge of
all personnel concerned. Formal inspections may include, but not be limited to:
1. 1. Complete personal equipment inspections on a periodic basis as directed by the Chief of Police.
2. The examination of Department materials or hand-outs that have been previously issued, such as
training materials, manuals, and select General and Special Orders.
3. Bi-annual vehicle inspections as directed in Section 2 of this directive.
D. Documentation
Formal inspections shall be documented in writing on an Inspection Report. The inspecting supervisor
will submit a written report of any deficiency identified during the formal inspection process to the next
ranking supervisor in the chain of command.
1. Any serious deficiencies identified during formal or informal inspections shall be documented in
writing and forwarded to the appropriate Division Commander.
E. Re-inspection Procedure
The following re-inspection procedure will be utilized when a deficiency is identified either through
informal or formal inspection.
1. The affected employee shall be notified by the inspecting supervisor that a re-inspection of the
deficiency will be held within 72 hours to ensure that the deficiency is corrected.
2. If the supervisor finds, upon re-inspection, that the deficiency is not corrected a written reprimand
will be issued to the employee and a copy placed in their permanent record.
53.1.2 BI-Weekly
It is the policy of the Palos Park Police Department to establish guidelines and procedure for the
inspection of Palos Park Police Department vehicles to insure that the vehicles and equipment
contained therein are maintained in good operating condition at all times.
B. General Information
1. Command personnel and supervisors will be responsible for conducting vehicle inspections for
their assigned personnel.
2. Inspections will be conducted on a bi-annual basis during the first week of January, and June of
each year.
3. The Palos Park Police Department Vehicle Inspection Sheet (Trip sheet) will be utilized for all
inspections.
4. Each category on the Vehicle Inspection Sheet will be inspected and marked accordingly on the
Vehicle Inspection Sheet.
5. Damage to a vehicle or equipment will be photographed and submitted to Administration with the
Vehicle Inspection Sheet, identifying the damage, the location of the damage, and if the damage is
new or old.
Damage will be identified as follows:
1) R/F - Right front.

2) R/R - Right rear.
3) L/F - Left front.
4) L/R - Left rear.
6. The Vehicle Inspection Sheet will be a three part, carbon form. The top sheet (original) will be sent
to Administration for review. The form will contain any corrective measures to be taken by the
assigned officers. The second and third sheets (copies) will be sent to the vehicle’s assigned officers,
with any/all corrective measures they must take. There also will be a check date given by the
inspecting supervisor, when the vehicle will be re-inspected for corrections.
The Shift Supervisor and Vehicle Maintenance Officer will be responsible for inspecting vehicles.
SUBJECT: ELECTRONIC RECORDING OF HOMICIDE INTERROGATIONS
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this order is to establish guidelines and procedures for the electronic recording of
custodial homicide interrogations.
POLICY:
It is the policy of the Palos Park Police Department to electronically record homicide interrogations as
outlined in 725 ILCS 5/103-2.1 and 705 ILCS 405/5-401.5.
DEFINITIONS:
Custodial Interrogation: Any interrogation during which:
A. A reasonable person in the subject’s position would consider himself or herself to be in custody,
and
B. During which a question is asked that is reasonably likely to elicit an incriminating response (See
725 ILCS 5/103-2.1).
Place of Detention: A building or a police station that is a place of operation for a municipal police
department or county sheriff department or other law enforcement agency, not a courthouse, that is
owned or operated by a law enforcement agency at which persons are or may be held in detention in
connection with criminal charges against those persons (See 725 ILCS 5/103-2.1 and 705 ILCS
405/5-401.5).
Electronic Recording: Defined as the use of motion picture, audiocassette tapes and/or VHS (Video
Home System) videotapes and/or DVD (Digital Video/Versatile Disc) non-rewriteable disc, used in
conjunction with motion picture,
VHS, DVD and/or tape recording devices, to record homicide suspect custodial interrogations.
ELECTRONIC RECORDING REQUIREMENTS

A. Custodial interrogations must be electronically recorded and preserved per 725 ILCS 5/103-2.1 in
the following incidents:
1. First Degree Murder;

2. Intentional Homicide of an Unborn Child;
3. Second Degree Murder;
4. Voluntary Manslaughter of an Unborn Child;
5. Involuntary Manslaughter and Reckless Homicide;
6. Involuntary Manslaughter and Reckless Homicide of an Unborn Child;
7. Drug-Induced Homicide; and
8. Aggravated driving under the influence of alcohol, other drug or drugs, intoxicating compound or
compounds, or any combination thereof in violation of 625 ILCS 5/11-501(d)(1)(F).
B. The recording requirement also applies to persons under age 17 at the time of the crime under
investigation, if he/she is charged in a criminal or juvenile court proceeding for an act that, if
committed by an adult, would be brought under one of the listed incidents above, per 705 ILCS 405/5-
401.5.
C. Any juvenile under the age of 13 years interviewed as a suspect for one of the above listed
incidents must have an attorney present.
D. No consent to electronically record is required during interrogations of suspects in the above listed
incidents as the recording is mandated by Illinois State Statute.
E. Any electronic recording of an interrogation involving a criminal incident other than those listed
above will require the consent of the person being interrogated.
F. Any oral, written, or sign language statement of an accused (adult or juvenile) made as a result of
a custodial interrogation at a police station or other place of detention shall be presumed to be
inadmissible as evidence against the accused in any criminal proceeding brought under any offense
listed.
1. An electronic recording is made of the custodial interrogation; and

2. The recording is substantially accurate and not intentionally altered (See 725 ILCS 5/103-2.1(b)
and 705 ILCS 405/5-401.5 (b)).
ELECTRONIC RECORDING RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Investigations Division Commander, or his designee, will ensure that interview rooms
designated for electronically recorded interrogations are properly equipped to comply with Illinois
State statute.
B. The Investigations Division Commander, or his designee, will ensure personnel have been trained
in the set-up, operation, and monitoring of recording equipment.
ELECTRONIC RECORDING PROCEDURES

A. Recording Protocol
1. A trained police employee will operate and monitor the recording equipment throughout the
interrogation.
2. Only one interrogation may be recorded on each tape or disc. This requirement does not apply to a
computer hard drive system.
B. Tape Control
1. Tapes and discs of interrogations are considered evidence. A copy will be made of any original to
be submitted to the State’s Attorney’s Office.
2. Original tapes and discs will be tagged and submitted to the Evidence and Recovered Property
Section
3. All recordings shall be confidential and exempt from public inspection and copying, as provided
under Section 7 of the Freedom of Information Act (5 ILCS 140), and the information shall not be
transmitted to anyone except as needed to comply with this Section (See 725 ILCS 5/103-2.1(g)).
4. Every electronic recording required per this Order and State Statute must be preserved until such
time as the defendant’s conviction for any offense relating to the statement is final and all direct and
habeas corpus appeals are exhausted, or the prosecution of such offenses is barred by law (See 725
ILCS 5/103-2.1(c)).
Title: INTERNAL AFFAIRS Procedure: 4.701
Revised:
PURPOSE:
To provide guidelines and procedures for prompt investigation and just disposition of complaints
against Police Department personnel.
To establish an internal affairs component and define the basic functions necessary to ensure the
integrity of the Department.
POLICY:
It is the policy of the Police Department to investigate all complaints against Department personnel,
regardless of the source of such complaints. Investigation of these complaints through standardized
procedures will demonstrate the Department's desire to provide honest, efficient police service and
will inspire public confidence in its personnel. A regulated program of complaint review will also
ensure the fair and impartial treatment of all Department personnel who become subject to the
internal affairs procedure.
DEFINITION:
A citizen complaint is defined as that action taken by a citizen to bring to the attention of the
Department any police action or inaction that the citizen considers to be contrary to the law, proper
procedure, good order, or in some other manner prejudicial to the citizen, the Department, or to the
community as a whole.
PROCEDURE:
AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITY

1. The Chief of Police is responsible for the Internal Affairs function.
2. The internal affairs function is established to provide a regulated process of complaint review
and to:
Establish an investigative process;
Ensure fair and impartial treatment of accused members;
Maintain justice;
Adhere to legal statutes; and
Maintain the integrity of the Department.

3. Activities of the internal affairs function include, but are not limited to:
Recording, registering, and controlling the investigation of complaints against Department personnel;
Supervising and controlling the investigation of alleged or suspected misconduct within the
Department; and
Maintaining the confidentiality of the internal affairs investigation and records.
4. While the internal affairs function is the responsibility of the Chief of Police, a first line
supervisor will not look to a higher authority to initiate an investigation when the complaint is within
the scope of his own authority and responsibility, except when complex investigations deem such
assistance necessary.
5. Each supervisor will assume the duties and obligations of his position or rank during the
investigation of a complaint against a member of this Department.
6. The type and nature of a complaint will determine whether it can be handled and resolved at
the line supervisor level or referred to the Chief of Police for assignment.
7. Not all complaints can be automatically categorized. Supervisors are required to exercise
good judgment and common sense when they are made aware of a complaint. The following types of
complaints are examples of those, which are categorized as formal and informal. Both forms of
complaints require documentation and automatic referral to the Chief of Police. The Chief of Police
will, after reviewing the entire incident, determine the category and delegate for investigation.
FORMAL (Normally investigated by Internal Affairs Function)

Brutality;
Misuse/abuse of force;
Breach of civil rights; and
Criminal misconduct.
INFORMAL (Normally investigated by the immediate supervisor)

Poor demeanor displayed by employee; and
Improper action or failure to take action.
8. A supervisor may, for a period not to exceed the member's regular or remaining tour of duty,
temporarily relieve from duty, a member because the member is unfit for duty. (Unfit for duty may
include: any physical or mental condition which might, in the judgment of the supervisor, render the
member incapable of adequately performing duties, or performing in such a way as to embarrass or
discredit the Department, or jeopardize the safety of any person or property, or misconduct.)
9. Supervisors will conduct a preliminary investigation whenever receiving a complaint from a

citizen concerning misconduct by a member of the Department. Results of the preliminary
investigation will be sent directly to the Chief of Police. The report will outline the allegations, identify
principals and witnesses, and provide information developed during the preliminary investigation.
10. When an employee is notified he has become the subject of an internal affairs investigation,
the person in charge of the investigation will issue the employee a written statement of the allegations
and the employee's rights and responsibilities relative to the investigation.
11. Any matter that arises under the Uniform Peace Officers Disciplinary Act will be processed
according to the Department's Rules of Conduct, policies and procedures.
12. The Chief of Police will maintain a record of all complaints against the Department or its
members. The complaints, records and results of the investigation will be maintained in a secure
area to protect the confidentiality of all documents associated with the investigation.
13. Information on registering complaints with the Department will be made available to the public.
Procedures for filing a complaint against the Department or a member are available through the
Office of the Chief of Police.
COMPLAINT PROCESSING
1. All complaints made against the Department or its members will be investigated. In person
complaints will, in all possible cases, be taken by the on duty supervisor. Complaints may be made in
several ways:
In person by the citizen, directly to a police department supervisor;
Through a third person; and
By referral from some official or unofficial agency.
2. When a citizen requests to file a complaint in person the supervisor on duty will do the
following:
Discuss the incident with the citizen. If after discussing the incident with the supervisor, the citizen
still desires to file a complaint, a Citizen Complaint Form will be provided.
Provide the complainant with a Citizen Complaint Form and request the citizen to complete the form
in his handwriting and sign the form. The form may be taken home by the complainant and
completed later. In this case the supervisor will instruct the complainant to mail the form directly to
the Chief of Police and to mark the envelope "Confidential".
After the complainant has completed the form the supervisor should review the contents for legibility.
If acceptable the supervisor will sign the form and give a copy to the complainant and inform the
citizen that his complaint will be investigated.
The supervisor will then make any relevant comments on the back of the original form regarding the
complainant’s physical and mental condition. Evidence indicating that the complainant is under the
influence of an intoxicant or drug is suffering from a mental disorder or any evidence of traits or
conditions bearing upon his credibility should be noted. The supervisor should also note the
complainant's physical condition, specifically any visible marks or injuries on the complaint.
When appropriate, and if possible, the supervisor will conduct a preliminary investigation.
The original copy of the complaint will be placed in a sealed envelope and forwarded to the Chief of
Police before the supervisor ends his tour of duty.
COMPLAINT ASSIGNMENT AND INVESTIGATIONS
1. The Chief of Police will assign a control number to the complaint and assign another member
of the Department if more appropriate, to follow up and investigate the complaint.
2. Any member of the Department assigned to investigate a complaint will conduct a thorough
and impartial investigation. Such investigation will include the taking of written statements, when
deemed necessary, from all involved persons, the gathering and preservation of evidence, and the
recording of all information pertinent to the investigation.
3. When conducting an internal affairs investigation concerning possible violations of criminal law,
the investigating member will contact the Prosecutor’s Office to seek legal advice as well as
assistance in case preparation. If necessary, a liaison will be established with the Special
Prosecutions Division of the Prosecutors Office.
4. The member assigned to the investigation will keep the complainant informed of the status of
the investigation, within certain limits. The complainant should be informed of the investigative
process and time table involved. All statements regarding guilt or innocence are to be addressed by
the Chief of Police. The investigating member should not offer an opinion concerning the outcome of
the investigation to the complainant.
5. Personnel assigned to investigate complaints will complete their investigation within thirty (30)
days of the assignment date with status reports to the Chief of Police every seven (7) days.
Extensions may be granted by the Chief of Police to the thirty- (30) day limit, but only in those cases
involving extenuating circumstances.
6. The investigating member will only report the results of his investigation and findings to the
Chief of Police. The Chief of Police may advise the officer’s supervisor of the findings. All
investigations will be concluded with a recommendation by the investigating member. Complaints
and disciplinary investigations can result in any of the following types of closures:
SUSTAINED
Allegation is supported by sufficient evidence
PARTIALLY SUSTAINED
Sufficient evidence exists to support part of the allegations made in the complaint.
NOT SUSTAINED
Insufficient evidence to prove or disprove the allegations.
EXONERATED
Incident did occur but the actions taken were lawful and proper.
PROPER CONDUCT - the action of the department or the officer was consistent with agency
policy and applicable law.
POLICY FAILURE - although the action of the agency or the officer was consistent with
agency policy, the complainant was wronged.
UNFOUNDED
Allegation is not factual; did not happen.
SUSTAINED OTHER
Sustaining of violation or misconduct other than the allegations of the original complaint.
7. An employee under investigation cannot be compelled to submit to a polygraph, voice stress

analysis, or any other instrument designed to detect deception. However, an employee under
investigation may voluntarily submit to such an examination after being made aware that such actions
are strictly voluntary and refusal to submit does not imply any guilt or admission of the violation.
8. Any member or employee who is the subject of an internal affairs investigation may be
required to provide or submit to any or all of the following, if materially related to the investigation:
Medical or psychiatric examinations;

Lineups;
Chemical tests;
Photographs;
Respond completely and truthfully to all questions; and
Search of Village property including lockers.
9. All records pertaining to internal affairs investigations will be kept in a secure area by the
individual conducting the investigation.
Title: LINE OF DUTY DEATH Procedure: 4.702
Revised:
PURPOSE:
The purpose of this procedure is to direct the Police Department to provide proper support and
emotional care for a deceased officer’s family following a line-of-duty death.
POLICY:
It shall be the responsibility of the Police Department to provide liaison assistance to the immediate
survivors of an officer who dies in the line-of-duty, whether feloniously or accidentally, while an active
member of the department, to include the clarification and comprehensive study of survivor benefits,
and to provide tangible and intangible emotional support during this traumatic period of readjustment
for the surviving family. It should be remembered that the funeral arrangements are to be decided by
the FAMILY, with their wishes taking precedence over the Department’s.
Coordination of events following the line-of-duty death of a police officer is an extremely important
and complex responsibility. Professionalism and compassion must be exhibited at all times as an
obligation to the officer’s survivors and to the law enforcement community. To provide the best
possible services and support for the officer’s family, specific tasks may be assigned by the Chief of
Police to selected members of the Department. The titles of these selected members are: Notification
Officer, Hospital Liaison Officer, Family Liaison Officer, Department Liaison Officer, and Benefits
Coordinator.
DEFINITIONS:
LINE-OF-DUTY-DEATH
Any action, felonious or accidental, which claims the life of a Police officer who was performing work
related functions either while on or off duty.
SURVIVORS
Immediate family members of the deceased officer: spouse, children, parents, siblings, fiancee,
and/or significant others.
BENEFICIARY
Those designated by the officer as recipients of specific death benefits.
BENEFITS
Financial payments made to the family to ensure financial stability following the loss of a loved one.
OFFICER
A sworn member of the Police Department.
PROCEDURE:
NOTIFICATION
The name of the deceased or injured officer must never be released to the media before immediate
survivors living in the area are notified.
2. The Chief of Police will be notified, through the chain of command, immediately whenever a
member of the Department suffers serious injury or death.
3. If there is knowledge of a medical problem with an immediate survivor, medical personnel

should be available at the residence to coincide with the notification.
4. The officer designated to make notification shall be titled the Notification Officer. The Chief of
Police or the Notification Officer shall make notification in person. Notification will always be
made in person and never alone.
5. Keep in mind, however, that notification should not be delayed until certain people can gather.
The on-duty watch commander shall be responsible for making notification. If the opportunity to get
the family to the hospital before the demise of the officer presents itself, DON’T wait for the
appropriate delegation to gather.
7. Most Police Officer’s families will know something is wrong when they see you. Ask to be
admitted to the house. NEVER make a notification on the doorstep. Inform family members slowly
and clearly of the information available. Make sure the officer’s name is used during the notification.
8. If the officer has already died, relay that information. NEVER give the family a false sense of
hope. Use words like “died” and “dead” rather than “gone away” or “passed away”.
NOTE: Reactions of the family may include hysteria, anger, fainting, physical violence,
shock, etc.
9. If the family wants to go to the hospital, they should be transported by department vehicle. It is
highly recommended that the family NOT drive themselves to the hospital. Should there be serious
resistance and the family insists on driving, have an officer accompany them in the car.
10. If young children are at home and the survivors wish to leave them at home, the Notification
Officer should arrange baby-sitting needs. This may involve obtaining the assistance of co-workers’
families, transportation of the children to a relative’s home or other arrangements.
11. Prior to departing for the hospital, the Notification Officer should notify hospital staff and the
Hospital Liaison Officer that a member(s) of the family is en route.
12. The deceased or severely injured officer’s parents should be afforded the courtesy of a
personal notification if possible.
13. If immediate survivors live outside the south suburban County area, the Notification Officer will
direct the police dispatcher to send a teletype message to the agency in that area and request that
personal notification be made.
14. The Chief of Police or a high-ranking member of the Department should respond to the
hospital or home to meet with the family, as soon as possible.
15. If there is an on-duty death, the external monitoring of police frequencies may be extensive.
Communications regarding notifications should be restricted to the telephone whenever possible. If
the media has somehow obtained the officer’s name, they should be advised to withhold the
information, pending notification of next of kin.
ASSISTANCE FOR AFFECTED OFFICERS
1. Officers who were on the scene or who arrived moments after an officer was seriously injured
or killed should be relieved as quickly as possible.
2. Police witnesses and other personnel who may have been emotionally affected by the serious
injury or death of another officer shall be required to contact a Department designated specialist for
counseling and evaluation.
ASSISTING THE FAMILY AT THE HOSPITAL
1. The first officer, other than the Chief of Police or his representative, to arrive at the hospital
becomes the Hospital Liaison Officer. This officer will remain the Hospital Liaison Officer until
relieved or reassigned by the Chief of Police or his representative. The Hospital Liaison Officer is
responsible for coordinating the activities of hospital personnel, the officer’s family, police officers, the
media and others. These responsibilities include:
Arrange with hospital personnel to provide an appropriate waiting facility for the family, the Chief of
Police or his representative, the Notification Officer, and only those others requested by the
immediate survivors.
Arrange a separate area for fellow officers and friends to assemble.
Ensure that medical personnel relay pertinent information regarding the officer’s condition to the
family on a timely basis and before such information is released to others. These medical personnel
should make the family aware of hospital policy about visitation with the injured officer and/or
visitation with the body following the demise, and explain why an autopsy is needed.
Arrange transportation for the family back to their home.
2. If it is possible for the family to visit the officer before death, they most certainly should be
afforded the opportunity. Too often, public safety officials discourage and sometimes bar the
family from visiting with the injured/deceased officer. IT IS THE FAMILY’S RIGHT to visit their loved
one. The Hospital Liaison Officer should “prepare” the family for what they might see in the
emergency room and accompany the family into the room if they so request.
3. Arrangements should be made for all medical bills relating to the services rendered to the
deceased officer to be sent to the Department for payment. The family should NOT receive any of
these bills at their home address.
4. Do not be overly protective of the family.

SUPPORT FOR THE FAMILY DURING THE WAKE AND FUNERAL
1. The Chief of Police or his designee will meet with the officer’s family to determine their wishes
regarding departmental participation in the preparation of the funeral or services. All possible
assistance will be rendered.
2. With the approval of the family, the Chief of Police will assign a Family Liaison Officer and a
Benefits Coordinator.
3. The selection of a Family Liaison Officer is a critical assignment. An attempt should be made
to select someone who enjoyed a close relationship with the family and the deceased officer. The
officer should not be so emotionally involved that he/she would become ineffective. The Family
Liaison Officer must know that THIS IS NOT A DECISION-MAKING POSITION. THIS IS A ROLE
OF “FACILITATOR” BETWEEN THE FAMILY AND THE POLICE DEPARTMENT. The liaison
officer will:
Ensure that the NEEDS OF THE FAMILY come before the wishes of the Department.
Meet with the family and explain what his/her responsibilities will be during this time.
Assist the family with funeral arrangements and make them aware of what the Department can offer if
they decide to have an honors funeral. If they choose to have an honors funeral, brief them on the
procedure.
Be issued a pager and cellular telephone immediately so there is an immediate line of communication
with the Department and family.
Apprise the family of information concerning the death and the continuing investigation.
Provide as much assistance as possible, including overseeing travel and lodging

arrangements for out of town family members, arranging for food for the family, meeting child care
and transportation needs, etc.
See that the surviving parents are afforded recognition and will have proper placement arranged
for them during the funeral and funeral procession.
Notify Concerns of Police Survivors (C.O.P.S.). Members are available to provide emotional support
to surviving families. See appendix A.
Be constantly available to the family.
Handle the news media throughout the ordeal. If the family decides to accept an interview, the
officer should attend to “screen” questions presented to the family so as not to jeopardize subsequent
legal proceedings.
Ensure that the home is prepared for the influx of visitors and that ample food is available. Baby-
sitting needs for all family members should be met. Have someone screen telephone calls and make
sure someone is always at the home.
Make the family aware of alternative churches with seating capacities large enough to accommodate
attendance at the funeral. However, any alternative churches will need to know that the family
minister will officiate at the service. REMEMBER THAT THE DEPARTMENT SHOULD ONLY
MAKE THE FAMILY AWARE OF THE ALTERNATIVES. IT’S THE FAMILY’S CHOICE.
If the family desires a burial in uniform, select an officer to obtain a uniform and all accouterments
(except weapon) and deliver them to the funeral home.
Arrange for the delivery of the officer’s personal belongings to the family.
Assign an officer to remain at the family home during the wake and funeral.
Arrange for routine residence checks of the survivor’s home for 6-8 weeks following the funeral. This
is necessary since the survivors will be spending much time away from the home dealing with legal
matters.
The family should have access to other survivors or support groups. Members of Concerns of Police
Survivors (C.O.P.S.) make themselves available to meet with the family.
PROVIDING INFORMATION AND ASSISTANCE ON BENEFITS
The Chief of Police will appoint an officer to assume the role of Benefits Coordinator. This officer
should be knowledgeable as to Federal, State and other benefits available to the family of a Police
Officer killed in the Line-of-Duty.
This officer shall be responsible for:

Gathering information on all benefits available to the officer’s family.
The Benefits Coordinator should be responsible for filing all appropriate forms and paperwork and
following through with the family to ensure that these benefits are being received.
2. The Benefits Coordinator should visit with the family within a few days following the funeral to
discuss the benefits available to them. A written list of the benefits available to the family, listing
named beneficiaries, contacts at various benefits offices, and when they can expect to receive the
benefit should be given to the family. The Benefits Coordinator should visit the family again within a
month following the death since the initial contact is clouded by the family’s emotional numbness
during that first benefit meeting. The officer will periodically check with the family to make sure they
are receiving or have received the benefits to which they are entitled.
If there are surviving children from a former marriage, the guardian of those children should also
receive a list of benefits available to the children.
Special attention should be given to the problems with possible revocation of health benefits to the
surviving family. The majority of health benefit providers allow a 30-day grace period before
canceling or imposing monthly payments upon survivors.
CONTINUED SUPPORT FOR THE FAMILY
1. Members of the Department must remain sensitive to the needs of the survivors long after the
officer’s death. Realize that grief is a process and that everyone handles grief differently. The grief
process has no timetable and many survivors may experience a complicated grief process.
2. Members of the Department are encouraged to keep in touch with the family. Close friends,
co-workers and Department officials should arrange to visit with the family at their home from time to
time so long as the family expresses a desire to have these contacts continue.
When plaques/memorabilia are

Given to the surviving spouse, consider making the same available to the surviving parents. They
have lost a child that can never be replaced.
3. The Chief of Police should observe the officer’s date of death with a short note to the family.
4. Holidays may be especially difficult for the family, particularly if small children are involved.
Increased contact with the survivors and additional support is important at these times.
5. The Department should maintain support as long as the family feels the need for the support.
In time, the family will let you know when they are ready to move on with their lives without assistance
from the Department.
6. If criminal violations surround the death, the Family Liaison Officer will:
Inform the family of all new developments prior to press release;
Keep the family apprised of legal and parole proceedings;
Encourage the family to attend the trial, and accompany them whenever possible; and
Arrange for the investigators to meet with the family at the earliest opportunity following the trial to
answer all their questions.
Title: HONORS FUNERAL PROTOCOL Procedure: 4.703
Date issued: MAY 01, 2002
Revised:
PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines and procedures for conducting an honors funeral for a deceased member of
the Department.
POLICY:
An honors funeral involves participation of the Police Department in honoring the officer’s service to
the Village. It is the policy of the Department to conduct and participate in an honors funeral if so
requested by the deceased officer’s family. This request may be granted regardless of whether the
officer at the time of death was an active sworn or pensioned member.
PROCEDURE:
REQUEST FOR AN HONORS FUNERAL
1. Upon the death of an active sworn or pensioned member:
The Chief of Police or his designee will consult the officer’s family concerning an honors funeral. The
procedure and Department participation will be explained to the family.
Upon the family’s request for an honors funeral, the Chief of Police or his designee and the Family
Liaison Officer will plan the funeral with the family, and will supervise the Department members who
participate.
GENERAL FUNERAL PROCEDURES
1. All Department members will maintain the highest standard of personal appearance. Uniforms
and equipment MUST be in excellent condition. The assigned supervisor will conduct a line
inspection of all involved personnel and equipment to ensure that Department standards are met.
2. The uniform for sworn members will be the Department dress uniform.
3. Department members who serve as pallbearers will wear white cotton gloves.
4. A black sash will be worn across the badge.
5. Neighboring jurisdictions will be requested to assist with traffic control for vehicle processions if
warranted.
6. The Chief of Police or his designee will direct that a message be sent to neighboring
jurisdictions advising of the death of a Department member, visitation and funeral arrangements, and
any requests for marked vehicles to be included in the procession.
WAKE AND VISITATION
1. Department members who attend the wake as part of the honors detail will report to a pre-
designated assembly point away from the place of services for inspection and briefing.
2. Upon entering the building, Department members will remove their uniform hats, place them
under their left arm, hat brim forward, and form a single line in preparation for filing past the casket.
3. The assigned supervisor will approach the casket, render a salute to the casket and then exit
the funeral parlor. Each officer in line will do the same when it is their turn to approach the
casket. If you are in plain clothes or not wearing a hat, you do not salute.
FUNERAL SERVICES - FUNERAL HOME OR CHURCH

NOTE: The Patrol Division Commander or his designee will give bold commands.
1. Department members who attend the funeral services as part of the honors detail will
report to a pre-designated assembly point away from the place of services for inspection and briefing.
2. Upon entering the building, Department members will remove their uniform hats, place them
under their left arm, hat brim forward, and move in an orderly manner to the place reserved for
them.
3. If adequate seating is provided, Department members will remain standing until all
members are in their places and the command, “BE SEATED”, is given.
Department members will sit with their hats upright in their laps, maintaining a military bearing
throughout the service.
5. At the end of the service, Department members, upon receiving the command, “OFFICERS
RISE”, will rise in unison and place their hats under their left arm, hat brim forward. The Department
members will then exit the building in an orderly manner.
6. Upon leaving the building, Department members will replace their hats and assemble in
formation.
Two equal ranks will be formed facing each other, leaving an aisle through which pallbearers and the
casket may pass.
They will normally be dressed at extended intervals but may be dressed at closer intervals if space is
limited.
While waiting in formation, Department members will stand at parade rest.
7. When the casket comes into view, the formation will be called to attention. The next command
will be “PRESENT ARMS”. All Department members will salute and hold the salute until the casket is
placed into the hearse. At this time the command “READY, FRONT” will be given and members will
return their hands to their sides.
8. The last command given at the funeral home or church will be, “OFFICERS DISMISSED”.
The Department members will break ranks and leave in a quiet and orderly manner.
9. Department members will then take their assigned places in the motorcade and proceed to the
cemetery or church.
GRAVESIDE SERVICES
NOTE: The Chief of Police or his designee will give bold commands.
1. Upon arrival at the graveside, Department members will form two ranks facing each other at
the rear of the hearse, leaving an aisle through which the pallbearers and casket may pass.
2. When the casket is ready to be removed from the hearse, the command “PRESENT ARMS”
will be given. All Department members will salute and hold the salute until the casket is at the
graveside opening. At the command “READY, FRONT”, the Department members will return their
hands to their sides. At the command “OFFICERS DISMISSED”, Department members may break
ranks in an orderly manner and assume a position to observe the graveside service.
3. If indoors, Department members will remove their hats and hold them under their left arm. All
Department members will sit with hats in laps, maintaining a military bearing throughout the services.
If services are held outdoors, Department members will wear their hats.
4. If the casket has been draped with an American flag, the funeral home directors will fold the
flag and present it to a pre-designated Department member. The Department member will then
present the folded flag to the deceased officer’s spouse or other designated survivor.
HONOR GUARD DURING VIEWING
1. The Honor Guard is comprised of volunteer officers from the Department. Officers who stand
as Honor Guards must present an excellent uniform appearance and conform to Department
grooming standards.
2. The dress uniform, including hat and white gloves, will be worn for the Honor Guard.
The Honor Guard will consist of two officers standing watch for 30 minutes at a time. The officers will
position themselves, standing at attention, at the head and feet of the deceased officer.
HONORS ACCORDED
1. Any Police Officer who is either an active sworn or pensioned member of the Department may
be accorded full honors if requested by his or her survivors.
2. Full honors shall include Honor Guard during viewing; honors detail, pallbearers, and motor
escort.
3. The Chief of Police or his designee is responsible for coordinating and directing the honors
activities.
4. Pallbearers
If Department member pallbearers are requested by the family, they will be selected by the
assigned supervisor following the family’s specific request.
Pallbearers will be under the direction of the funeral home directors and will report to the
funeral home for instructions and assignments.
PROCEDURAL VARIATIONS
1. The procedures as outlined shall be followed in most cases. Any changes made necessary by
a shortage of personnel, the unusual size of the funeral, the type and location of services, the
physical arrangement of the place of service or for any other reason shall be made by the Chief of
Police or his designee.
2. Any additional honors to be accorded to deceased members of the Department shall be at the
discretion of the Chief of Police.

Chapter 4 Police Operations

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter 4 Police Operations

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1

Chapter 4 / Police Operations

Patrol Operations / 4.000

In-Car Audiovisual Recording System / 4.610

Title: PATROL OPERATIONS Procedure: 4.000

Date Issued: MAY 01, 2002

To outline the general duties and responsibilities of the Patrol division.

The importance of patrol to a community cannot be overstated. Whether it be gauged

FUNCTIONS AND OBJECTIVES

Crime prevention activities.

Response to calls for service.

Preliminary investigation of crimes and incidents.

Arrest and processing of prisoners.

Traffic direction and control.

Traffic accident investigation.

Maintenance of public order.

Development of positive relationships between citizens and the Department.

Reporting of information to appropriate organizational components.

Supervisors should rotate beat assignment on a daily basis.

The Patrol division shall be responsible for:

complete area coverage and performance of tasks to accomplish Department

the preliminary investigation of all cases, including the preservation of evidence

selective traffic enforcement and visible patrol;

1. Personnel in the Patrol Division will report for duty as assigned.

4. Roll call should cover, but is not limited to:

report briefing from prior 24 hours;

problem areas to be checked in an officer's beat;

beat and squad car assignments;

inspection of full uniform, appearance and equipment;

schedule changes, new assignments and court dates;

review procedures, directives and memos;

investigation personnel will inform patrol officers of any pertinent information,

any hazardous areas, weather and road conditions, and; training.

5. The on duty shift will respond to calls until properly relieved.

6. Attendance by investigative personnel at roll call, crime data bulletins distributed

8. Officers will respond in a routine, expeditious or emergency manner, as outlined

11. Officers shall conduct a preliminary investigation of all criminal acts.

12. Follow-up investigations may be assigned to patrol officers by their shift

the investigation does not require a specialist's services;

sufficient manpower is available; and

the investigation can be conducted during duty hours.

Field interviews are endorsed and

when making a vehicle or pedestrian stop;

when completing assignments and resuming patrol; and

when leaving the vehicle for any reason.

DEPARTMENT MOTOR VEHICLES

2. Disruption of Utilities: The investigating officer shall immediately notify the

5. Notification of Death: medical emergencies or other messages of an emergency

Reviewed: October 2014

Title: MOBILE VIDEO RECORDING Procedure: 4.001

Date Issued: FEB. 01, 2003

Documentation of events, actions, or statements made during arrests and critical

1.Officers assigned vehicles with video

Officers will only use tapes provided by the department.

Supervisors will at least monthly, randomly review videotapes to assess officer

Title: OPERATION OF EMERGENCY VEHICLES Procedure: 4.002

Date Issued: MAY 01, 2002

To provide for the safe operation of Department vehicles as emergency vehicles.

An emergency is a situation in which there is a high probability of injury or death to a

2. The following may be considered some examples of emergency situations

Report of a forcible felony in progress.

Report of a shooting or stabbing.

Report of an auto accident with injury or other extenuating circumstances.